?_žÉCÿÿÿÿŠE¡˜lp˜w@)ö& ° !‚ ‚ÿ‚… …‡ 4rƒ…'ÿÿ‚ ƒ‚ÿ‚‚ …ú…-„üÿ…-‚ ÿ‚‚… …†5s‚ú …-„üÿ…-…'ÿÿ‚ ƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚…-…-…'ÿÿ‚ ƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚‡4r…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚‡4r…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚‡4r„üぅ-…ð…-‚ ã‚… …™$AXXôAôAƒú …-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ã‚‹øXA‡ÜA‚ÿ‚… …‡ÜX‡ÃA‡ÃX‡«A‡«X‡“A‡“X‡zA‡zX‡bA‡bX‡JA‡JX‡1A‡1X‡A‡X…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹ô\=‡b… …‡ôb‡ƒ‡ôƒ‡£‡ô£‡Ä‡ôćå‡ô凇ô‡'‡ô'‡H‡ôH…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…ú€‚…-…ð‡A… …‡X‡ôX‡ôA‡A‚ú …-…ð‡A‡ôA„ûõÿ‚ŒArialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-‡ô>‡ôD‡Ü>‡ÜD‡Ã>‡ÃD‡«>‡«D‡“>‡“D‡z>‡zD‡b>‡bD‡J>‡JD‡1>‡1D‡>‡D‡ôA‡ôX„ûõÿ‚ Arialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-‡÷A‡ñA‡÷b‡ñb‡÷ƒ‡ñƒ‡÷£‡ñ£‡÷ćñć÷å‡ñå‡÷‡ñ‡÷'‡ñ'‡÷H‡ñH…-…-…û‚Œ"System…Hú'%P÷°/äìw…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹/m…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹÷YA…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹ù^<ƒüƒÿÿ…-…ð…úB‚…-…ð‡ôA… …‡èQ‡Üb‡Ðr‡Ã‡·“‡«£‡ŸŽ‡“ć‡Õ‡zå‡nö‡b‡V‡J'‡>7‡1H‡%X…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹÷YA…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…-…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r‚ … … ‡2 í3…0 ‡2 Õ-‡30 ‡2 Œ-‡60 ‡2 €-‡90 ‡2 Œ'‹120 ‡2 s'‹150 ‡2 ['‹180 ‡2 C'‹210 ‡2 *'‹240 ‡2 '‹270…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r…-…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r… … ‡2 ý>…00 ‡2 ý\‡30 ‡2 ý}‡60 ‡2 ý‡90 ‡2 ý»‹120 ‡2 ýÜ‹150 ‡2 ýý‹180 ‡2 ý‹210 ‡2 ý?‹240…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r„ûõÿ‚ŒŒArialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‹$ÿš… …!‡2 œµImage Pixel Value …-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‹À%L… …Œûõÿ„„ŒArialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …- ‡2 Ÿ•Monitor Pixel Output…-…ð …-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r‚ü…- …ð…-…ð…'ÿÿ‡ 4rƒ‚ÿ‚‚ …'ÿÿ‚ ƒ‚ÿ‚‚ …'ÿÿƒ‚ÿ‚‚ †4r‚ú …-ƒü…-‚ ÿ‚‚… …†4r…- …ð…-…ð…'ÿÿ‚ówÿˆHúí×éìw ‡-ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ„ð¹ šó¥‹Ã_^[‹å]ÂU‹ìƒìhSVW‹]ÿÿÿƒÿÿˆÿÿÿÿÿø/Ìlp Ð\€€€€€€€€€ÀÀÀ€€€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿwÕÿÿwwwwÿwwÿwwxwÿÿw÷wxÿÿ÷÷w€ÿðÿw€ÿÿw€ÿÿw€ÿðÿwxÿÿ÷÷wxÿÿ÷wwˆˆww…ˆˆwwwwž$ |KWBTREEOI |KWDATA'A |KWMAP I |SYSTEMrl|TOPICdr|TTLBTREEŒ |VIOLAEä |bm0Š3 |bm1t? |bm10 ‘ |bm11þš |bm113¡5|bm114â8|bm115¢<|bm12è€ |bm13Fª |bm14¥¯ |bm15óŽ |bm16dº |bm17øÆ |bm18Ó |bm196à |bm2)@ |bm20äì |bm21xù |bm22õý |bm23\|bm24( |bm25ü|bm26Ã|bm27|bm28#|bm288#@|bm289§B|bm29€)|bm290G|bm292ŒI|bm293ãJ|bm294L|bm295XM|bm296ŽN|bm2977P|bm298äQ|bm3EL |bm30Ï+|bm301XT|bm302¬b|bm303)e|bm31Õ1|bm32¿7|bm33,<|bm34¢@|bm35 E|bm36P|bm372[|bm38wf|bm39‚q|bm4-X |bm40v||bm41{‡|bm425Œ|bm43¥Š|bm44D«|bm45ò¯|bm46ݶ|bm47»œ|bm48tÄ|bm49&Ë|bm5.d |bm50ËÑ|bm51iØ|bm52ß|bm53£å|bm54vê|bm553ï|bm56èü|bm6‡d |bm63|bm64à|bm66’.|bm7p |bm8—{ |bm9*‡ ²©lp˜wÀ.-  !‚ ‚ÿ‚… …‡ 4rƒ…'ÿÿ‚ ƒ‚ÿ‚‚ …ú…-„üÿ…-‚ ÿ‚‚… …†5s‚ú …-„üÿ…-…'ÿÿ‚ ƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚…-…-…'ÿÿ‚ ƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚‡4r…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚‡4r…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ÿ‚‡4r„üぅ-…ð…-‚ ã‚… …™$AWWôAôAƒú …-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚‚ ã‚‹øWA‡ÜA‚ÿ‚… …‡ÜW‡ÃA‡ÃW‡«A‡«W‡“A‡“W‡zA‡zW‡bA‡bW‡JA‡JW‡1A‡1W‡A‡W…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹ô[=‡b… …‡ôb‡‚‡ô‚‡£‡ô£‡Ä‡ôćå‡ô凇ô‡&‡ô&‡G‡ôG…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…ú€‚…-…ð‡A… …‡W‡ôW‡ôA‡A‚ú …-…ð‡A‡ôA„ûõÿ‚ŒArialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-‡ô>‡ôD‡Ü>‡ÜD‡Ã>‡ÃD‡«>‡«D‡“>‡“D‡z>‡zD‡b>‡bD‡J>‡JD‡1>‡1D‡>‡D‡ôA‡ôW‡÷A‡ñA‡÷b‡ñb‡÷‚‡ñ‚‡÷£‡ñ£‡÷ćñć÷å‡ñå‡÷‡ñ‡÷&‡ñ&‡÷G‡ñG…-…-…û‚Œ"System…Hú'%P÷°/äìw…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹/m…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹÷XA…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹ù]<ƒüƒÿÿ…-…ð…úB‚…-…ð‡ôA… …‡ÝF‡ÒL‡ÉQ‡ÂW‡»\‡µb‡¯g‡ªm‡¥r‡ x‡œ}‡—‚‡“ˆ‡‡‹“‡‡˜‡„ž‡€£‡|©‡y®‡v³‡r¹‡oŸ‡lćiɇfχcÔ‡`Ú‡]߇Zå‡Wê‡Tï‡Rõ‡Oú‡L‡J‡G ‡D‡B‡?‡= ‡:&‡8+‡51‡36‡1<‡.A‡,G‡*L‡'R‡%W…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ã‚‹÷XA…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ょ4r‚ … … ‡2 í3…0 ‡2 Õ-‡30 ‡2 Œ-‡60 ‡2 €-‡90 ‡2 Œ'‹120 ‡2 s'‹150 ‡2 ['‹180 ‡2 C'‹210 ‡2 *'‹240 ‡2 '‹270…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r… … ‡2 ý>…00 ‡2 ý\‡30 ‡2 ý|‡60 ‡2 ý‡90 ‡2 ý»‹120 ‡2 ýÜ‹150 ‡2 ýü‹180 ‡2 ý‹210 ‡2 ý>‹240…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r„ûõÿ‚ŒŒArialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‹$ÿš… …!‡2 œµImage Pixel Value …-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‹À%L… …Œûõÿ„„ŒArialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-‡2 Ÿ•Monitor Pixel Output…-…ð…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…-…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r„ûõÿ‚Œ Arialów²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-…-„üÿ…- …ð…-…ð‚ ÿ‚‚… …‹žý‰®‹œùŠ±…-‚ ‚ÿ‚…‡2 ‹³ £Gamma = 1.8 …-…-…-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-…- …-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r‚ü…-…ð …-…-…'ÿÿƒ…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4r…-…'ÿÿƒ…-‚ÿ‚‚ ‡4rƒüƒÿÿ…-…-…ð…'ÿÿ‡ 4rƒ‚ÿ‚‚ …'ÿÿ‚ ƒ‚ÿ‚‚ …'ÿÿƒ‚ÿ‚‚ †4r‚ú …-ƒü…- ‚ ÿ‚‚… …†4r…-…ð …-…ð…'ÿÿƒ…-‚ ã‚… …š$þ‰Fü‹Fü‹VþÉËžU‹ìŽØÿvÿv ÿv ²ówÿˆHú'×éìw …-ÿ‡«>‡«D‡“>ƒÿ‚ø‡bD‡J>JDÿÿÿÿÿ‚ÿÿÿ þ‰Fü‹Fü‹VþÉËžU‹ìŽØÿvÿv ÿv lp B €pÒ Ž ž~†&ÿƒ•WordMicrosoft Word‚ ‡ ©< ‚û„ …-…„û­ÿ‚“Book Antiqua…-‚ ………ƒ†;……-ƒ†©<ƒ‹© <@‡  @‚ ‚ ‡ U)‚ ‚ ‚ÿ‚~C Ì„U)„U)(…)Uƒ‚x2  „¿¿„¿¿¿ˆ¿¿¿¿À€„ÿÿ„ÿÿÿˆÿÿÿÿÿðððððððððððððððððððððððððððð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆð zˆ  ðzˆððððððððððððððððððððððððððð…'ÿÿ…'ÿÿ……'ÿÿ…ƒü…- …úƒ"…- …úƒ"…-%E»Ej ‚ú ƒ"…-…ð…ð„üÿ…-…ƒ‹Ž,Gº…„ûœÿ‚‰"Arial…-‰2 Eå §<©Solid Color-%%0%%……'ÿÿ… …úÿ„"…-‡,E‡ E…-…ð………- …úƒ"…- …úƒ"…-%@Ã@m…-…ð…ð…-…ƒ‹qJY……-‰2 HY<©Dithered0%%%%……'ÿÿ… …úÿ„"…-‡Ï@‡ @…-…ð……- ÿÿ¡jMìQÿ7è!ƒ}tGÿ7èƒc‹Ø…ÛtÿÿÿÿA8lp·¯6 ‚ …‚ÿ‚….ƒ1‚ ‡ @†&ÿƒÀÿ§ÿ‰Àç “& MathTypeà„ûÀþ‚Œ ArialT…- ‡2 €"…Fà ‡2 €‹…PÔ ‡2 4=…iF ‡2 õX…iF ‡2 €‹…Cæ ‡2 4y…iF„ûÀþ‚ŽPSymbol…-…ð ‡2 €O…=¯ ‡2 õù…=¯ ‡2 “ý…åä„ûÀþ‚Œ ArialT…-…ð ‡2 õø…1± ‡2 SŒ‡49±± †& ÿ…û‚Œ"Systemn…-…𜠠        * „tšÚ“£(‰*ÿ6hêh„šðƒ£$ف Ù¡þ‰Fü‹Fü‹VþÉËžU‹ìŽØÿvÿv ÿv فU ٍÿlDǃ8ÂC¿ÿ‰ëö…þÿÿCªrtfgenprol    ƒUÐÿÖq•ƒq81 ÿÂ88.rtfcomput~1.rtfcolorf~1.rtffilefo~2.rtfcolormgt.rtfjascpÀ·lp“ öÀ4 €‚ …‚ÿ‚….ƒ1‚ ‡ €€ †&ÿƒÀÿ§ÿ‰@ ' “& MathTypeð„ûÀþ‚Œ Arial…- ‡2  "…Fà ‡2  ó…PÔ ‡2 T¯…iF ‡2 Õ…iF ‡2  …Cæ ‡2 Tÿ…iF ‡2  L …Dæ„ûÀþ‚ŽPSymbol…-…ð ‡2  =…=¯ ‡2 d…=¯ ‡2 ³h…åä ‡2 D…ìž ‡2 ÔD…íž ‡2 áD…ïž ‡2 )D…îž ‡2 ËD…ïž ‡2 u…üž ‡2 Ôu…ýž ‡2 áu…ïž ‡2 )u…þž ‡2 Ëu…ïž ‡2  _…ž¯„ûÀþ‚Œ Arial…-…ð ‡2 Q…1± ‡2 s'‡49±± †& ÿ…û‚Œ"Systemn…-…ð‡5ƒ‚  ATE RECFROMSCANNER RESETSCAÿ¡ ×yÜ (×yÜ%0×yèê–Û†4PÜ ÿƒÿüÿüÿüÿüÿˆüK_KZCopyright (wy.ÿœððÿÿðÿÿðÿððÿÿxlpë ö ¶ ’‚ …‚ÿ‚….ƒ1‚ ‡ €  †&ÿƒÀÿ§ÿ‰` ' “& MathTypeð„ûÀþ‚ˆ Arial…- ‡2  "…Fà ‡2  ,…PÔ ‡2 TÞ…iF ‡2 ù…iF ‡2  ,…Cæ ‡2 T…iF ‡2  [ …Dæ ‡2  € …BÔ„ûÀþ‚ŽPSymbol…-…ð ‡2  O…=¯ ‡2 š…=¯ ‡2 ³ž…åä ‡2 h…ìž ‡2 Ôh…íž ‡2 áh…ïž ‡2 )h…îž ‡2 Ëh…ïž ‡2 †…üž ‡2 Ô†…ýž ‡2 á†…ïž ‡2 )†…þž ‡2 ˆ…ïž ‡2  o…ž¯ ‡2  “ …+¯„ûÀþ‚Œ Arial®…-…ð ‡2 ™…1± ‡2 s]‡49±± †& ÿ…û‚Œ"Systemn…-…ð"ÿ!†X%02X}ÿÿ„}e‚ ÿB‚ÿ‚ÀF‰@ ' & MathType„{lpOO@Œˆ f‚B‚ ‡  ‚ ‚ÿ‚BC ̃ ƒ (  ƒ„€€„€€€ˆ€€€€€À„ÿÿ„ÿÿÿˆÿÿÿÿÿÿð ÿð» ÿð»‚  ÿð»‚° ÿð»ƒ p ÿðƒ°w ÿ‡ »»°pwÿð… wwÿð»‚pwÿð»ƒ wÿð»„°wÿð»‚ppwÿ…{»»°°wÿ »wÿð»°wÿ »ÿðƒÿð»pÿð»ˆÿÿ »»°ÿð»ˆ ÿ »»°pÿð»ˆ°ÿ »»°pÿð»ƒ°p𻃰wÿ »‚ »ƒ°·ÿ »ƒ°{ÿð»ƒw·ÿð»ƒ {ÿ »„°ž·ÿð»ƒ »€ÿ»„pû»°ÿð„¿¿»ÿ ûð ÿ‚ð¿‚° ÿðÿ„Oÿ‚\|¿ÉÊhpscaner.dllRecFromScannrScannerLockSendToScanneri`lpÍ@†Ž p.‚ ‡ Í%…÷€…€€€Š€€€€€À€‚ÿ…ÿÿÿŠÿÿÿÿÿÿ‚…4‹5.C ̃ª„́(ªƒ‚Ø  „€€„€€€ˆ€€€€À€„ÿÿ„ÿÿÿˆÿÿÿÿÿ@́ÿÌ@́Ï̇ÏÿüÌÏÿÿÌÿžüÏÿÿüÏÿüÌÏÿüÌÏÿÿüÿÿÌüÿÿÌÌÿÿÌÌÏÿüÌÿÿÏÿÏÿÌÏÿüÏÿüÌüÿÿÌÏüÌÌÏÿÏÿÌÿÿÌÏÿüÌÿüÌ‚Ìÿ̏ÿüÌÌÿüÌÿüÌÿüÌÿÿ́ÿ̕ÿüÿüÿüÿüÿüÏÿÏüÌÿüÏÌÿüÿŽüÏÿÏÿüÏÌÿüÿüÿü̐ÏÿÌÏÿÌÿüüÿüÏÌÿüÌ‚ÌÏ̏ÿüÌÌÿÌÌÏÿÌÏÿÌÿǘÏ̧ÿüÏÌÿüÏÌÿüÏÿÏÿÌÿüÌüÏÿÏÿÏÿÏÌÿüÿüÌüÏÌÿüÿü̏ÿüÌÿüÏÿÌÿüÌüÿüÌ”ÌÌüÌÌÿüÌÏÿÌÌÏÿÌÏÿÌÿüÌšüÌÌÿüÌÏÿüÌÏÿüÏÿÌÿüÿüÌÌÏÿÏÿÌÿüÌÿüÿÿüÌÌÏÿü̊ÿüÌÿüÏÿÌÿü̃ÌÌÏÿüÌÏÿÌÌÏÿÌÏÿÏÿ́Ïÿ£üÌÏÿÌÌÏÿÌÏÿÌÿüÏüÌÌÏÿÌÿÌÿüÌÿüÏüÿüÌÏÿ̊ÿüÌÿÿÏÿÌÏüÌ̐üÌÿüÌÏÿÌÌÿÿüÏÿÏÿ̧üÌÿüÌÿüÏÌÿüÏÌÿüÿüÏÿÏÿÌÿüÿüÿüÌÿüÏÿÏÿÌÿüÏ̌ÿüÌÏüüÿüÏÿÏÿÌ̇ÏÌÿüÌÏÿÌÿÌšÏÌÿüÌÿüÏüÿüÏüÏüÿüÌÿüÿÏÿüÏüÿüÌÏÿÌÿÏÿÌÿüÏǚÏÿÌÿÿÏÿüÌÿüÿÌ̇üÿüÌÌÿǖÿüÏÿ̏üÿüÌÏÿüüÏÿüüÌÿÿ̕ÿÿÌÏüÌÿÏÿÌÿÿüÌÿÿÌÏÿüü̇ÏÿÌÌÿÌÿ̂ÿÿÌ̇ÏÿüÌÌÿü̇üÌÿüÌÿü̃Ïÿǘÿ̂Ïÿ Ì̆ÿüÌÌÏÿ̇üÌÿüÌÿü̂ÿü̂Ïÿ́Ï̂Ïÿ Ì̂Ïü̋ÿüÌÏÿÌÏÿÌÿü̂Ïü̂Ïÿ̂ÿü Ì́üÌÿ‚ÏÌÿ́ü̂ÏÿÌÿü ÌUÌUÌÚ&ƒøø‚ÿÿƒ¬£lpÀ ˆ V‚2‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚2C ̃ƒ(ƒ‚à  „€€„€€€ˆ€€€€€À„ÿÿ„ÿÿÿˆÿÿÿÿÿÿðÿÿ‚ »‚°ÿÿð»»ÿÿƒ »»ƒ»»°ÿ„ÿÿ𻻊ÿÿÿÿ »»°‰ »»°ÿÿÿ𻁰 »…ÿÿ »»„°ÿ𻁻ƒ𠻃𻁰 »ƒ »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ° »° »ƒ°ð»° »ƒð»° »ƒð»° »„ÿ »° »…°ÿÿ𻁰 »‰ÿÿÿ »»° »»°ÿÿÿÿð»»°‡ »»ÿÿÿƒ »°ƒ »°ÿÿð»ÿÿ‚ »‚°ÿÿðÿ‚ {sZ„sZŒsZ”{ZskÌÏÿÌÌÏÿÌÏÿÌÿü̎üÌÌÿüÌÏÿüÌÏÿüÏ'lp§rÀ‡ žz‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚…z…C ̃ƒ(ƒZ{µœށÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ôD‚@÷fƒ@÷f…ff@÷f„ff@÷f‚@÷f‚@÷f‚@÷f‚@÷f‚@÷f‚@÷f‚@÷w@ÿ‚ðˆ»»»°ÿ𻁻ƒð »90lp§rÀ&‡ žz‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚…z…C ̃ƒ(ƒZ{µœށÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ôD‚@÷fƒ@÷`„f@÷`f…`f@÷`f…`f@÷`f…`f@÷`f…`f@÷`f…`f@÷`f…`f@÷`„f@÷`ƒf@÷w@ÿ‚ðˆ»»»°ÿ𻁻ƒð »<3lp§rÀ,‡ žz‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚…z…C ̃ƒ(ƒ{œށÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ñ‚ó"Êó ""ó """"ó """"ó """ó "ó "ó" """ó" "ó" "ó3ÿ‚ðˆ»»»°ÿ𻁻ƒð »6-lp§rÀ ‡ žz‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚…z…C ̃ƒ(ƒZ{µœށÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ôD‚@÷f‚@÷fº@÷ffff@÷f``f@÷ffff@÷ff`ff@÷ffff@÷f``f@÷ffff@÷f‚@÷w@ÿ‚ðˆ»»»°ÿ𻁻ƒð »© lp`F‡ êÆ‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚…Æ…C ̃ƒ(ƒ{œޅÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ñ ‚ó "ƒ!ó "ƒ!ó "„!ó …"!ó ô†ð"!ó Oˆ@"!ó ôôŠôð"!ó OOO‰@"!ó ôôô•ð"!ó OOO@"!ó ôðô‰ð"!ó OOO†@"!ó ô†ð"!ó Š"!ó"ôô"‡!ó" "ƒ!ó "ƒ!ó "ƒ!ó 3‚1 ÿ‚ »°‚ »ƒ° »° »ƒ°ð»° ­€lp`F‡ êÆ‚ ‡ ‚ ‚ÿ‚…Æ…C ̃ƒ(ƒ{œޅÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ñ ‚ó "ƒ!ó "„!ó "„!ó O@"„!ó ôð"„!ó O@"„!ó ôˆð""!ó Oˆ@ ""!ó ôˆð""!ó — "!ó"ôð"""!ó"  …""!ó"ˆ"""!ó" "ƒ!ó "ƒ!ó" "ƒ!ó "ƒ!ó "ƒ!ó 3‚1 ÿ‚ »°‚ »ƒ° »° »ƒ°ð»° tklpþÂÀœˆ Ü‚ž‚ ‡ W‚ ‚ÿ‚žC ̃WƒW(Wƒ{cc””cÎÎkÞçï…{ï÷ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿð$ÿð#ÿÿ‚ðñÿ!‚ ñÿññÿ‹ÿñÿÿÿñÿ‚Aq“0ññÿññ‡ÿ‚‰ññÿññ†‡ÿ‚Aqˆ0ññÿÿñ†‡ÿÿÿ‚ñññññÿñ‡ÿ‚Aq0ñ‹ÿññ‹ÿñÿÿÿñðÿ‚…ñÿ „ÿ‚Aq…0ñÿ „ÿ…ññ ƒÿÿ„ÿA‚0ñÿ…ôÿ‚ðñÿ…ÿAA?ÿð#ÿÿð$ˆïÞ¥ÎÖ̇ÏÌÿüÌÏÿÌÿ̅ÏÌÿüÌTKlp Á€\ˆ 悁‚ ‡ .u‚ ‚ÿ‚ÂC ̃.uƒ.u(u.ƒ‚@?ÿVÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿWÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿÿµÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ‚Iÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ‚Lÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ‚Oÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ‚Rÿ0ÿÿÿ6ÿ~ÿ‚Oÿ*ÿÿ9ÿ{ÿ‚ÿcÿxÿ‚ÿfÿuÿ‚ÿiÿrÿ‚ÿlÿoÿ‚ÿoÿlÿ‚ÿrÿiÿ‚ÿuÿÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿ‡¿ž¿¿ž¿Zÿ‚:ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿›¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxoHÿˆÿÿ ÿ-ƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxoHÿˆÿÿ ÿª¿ž¿oxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxoÿoxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxoHÿ‹ÿÿÿ ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿÿoxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo]ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿Ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo]ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿŒ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ ¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿÿoxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ 9ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿoxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿƒ¿ž¿$ÿƒoxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿÿÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿª¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿ ÿÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿ°¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿ-ƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿª¿ž¿oxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿oxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxoÿ ÿ ÿ6ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿŒ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿oxoƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo ÿ ÿ 9ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿’¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿÿÿÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo]ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿÿÿ¿ž¿ƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo]ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿŒÿÿÿ¿ž¿ƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo]ÿª¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿƒ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿŠ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxo „ÿ¿ž¿ÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿oxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxošoxooxooxooxooxooxooxooxoÿ†¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ>ÿÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿-ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿€¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿ÿ¿ž¿-ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ‚.ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿ!ÿÿ#ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿPÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿ ÿÿÿPÿÿ ÿ ÿÿÿ ÿ ÿ ÿ ÿÿPÿÿÿÿPÿÿÿ‚ÿ‹øøÿŒ‚øø}tlp¶ ,€ ®ˆ ‚⁂ ‡ {‚ ‚ÿ‚âC ̃{ƒ{({ƒ‚@ {œÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ=ÿ„ð<"„ð3ÿð…ð3ÿò…ð3ÿ‚òò"†!ð3ÿ‚òò"•!ðÿÿðÿðÿÿÿðÿ$ÿ‚òò"!ðÿÿðÿðÿÿÿƒðÿð$ÿ‚òò"ˆ!ðÿÿƒÿÿð&ÿ‚òò"ˆ!ðÿÿƒÿÿƒð$ÿ–òò""""!ðÿðÿðÿðÿÿƒðÿð$ÿœòò" ""!ðÿðÿðÿðÿÿÿ$ÿ•òò""!ðÿðÿðÿðÿÿ'ÿƒòò ‰"!ðÿÿ‚ÿ'ÿ‚òò"ˆ!ðÿÿ…ÿÿ(ÿ‚òò"†!ð3ÿ‚òò"†!ð3ÿ‚òò"†!ð3ÿòÿ†ñð3ÿò"…ð;„ð=„ðÿÿ›¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿ž¿¿žI@lp¶  .Fˆ f ‚B ‚ ‡ X{‚ ‚ÿ‚B C ̃X{ƒX{({Xƒ {{œ…„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿA4ÿ 4ÿ2" Œÿÿðÿðÿ)ÿ?3 Œÿÿððÿðÿð)ÿ?3 Šÿÿððÿðð+ÿ?3 Œÿÿððÿðð)ÿ?3 Œÿÿððÿððÿð)ÿ„?3303 Œÿÿððÿðÿ)ÿˆ?3333 †ÿÿð/ÿˆ?3033 †ÿÿð/ÿ‚?3ƒ3 †ÿÿð/ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?ÿ ÿððÿÿÿðÿð%ÿ30ÿÿÿðÿððÿððÿð%ÿ ÿÿðÿðÿÿðÿÿðÿð%ÿ2" ÿÿðÿðððÿð%ÿ?3 ÿðÿðÿððÿððð%ÿ?3 ƒÿÿŠÿÿðð%ÿ?3 ƒÿ2ÿ?3 …ÿÿð0ÿ?3 …ÿð0ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 Œÿÿðÿðÿð)ÿ?3 Œÿÿðÿÿÿ)ÿ?3 Œÿÿðÿÿÿÿ)ÿ?3 Œÿÿðÿÿ)ÿ?3 Œÿÿÿÿ)ÿ?3 Œÿÿðÿðÿð)ÿ?3 …ÿÿðÿ)ÿ?3 …ÿÿðÿ)ÿ?3 …ÿÿ)ÿ?3 4ÿ?3 4ÿ?ÿ 4ÿ304ÿóÿÿðÿÿðÿð&ÿ?ÿÿððÿððÿððÿ&ÿóŽÿÿððÿððÿÿðð'ÿ?Žÿÿðÿðÿÿð'ÿó‹ÿÿðÿÿððÿð'ÿ?ÿÿðÿÿðÿ&ÿó†ÿÿðÿð(ÿ?†ÿÿðÿð(ÿó†ÿÿðÿð(ÿ 4ÿ2" 4ÿ?3 4A?3 3‚?3 ñññÿ&?3 ‰ññ„ññ$ƒ?3ƒ3 ‚ƒ‚ñ'ˆ?3033 ‚ƒ„ÿÿñ$‰?3333 ‰ññññ„ññ%„?3303 ñññññÿ%‚?3 ˆñññ)?3 ‚‚(‚?3 ‚…*?3 3‚?ÿ 4A30C=ÿ„ð#<3„ð 3ÿð…ð 3ÿó"…ð 3ÿ‚óó3†2ð 3ÿ‚óó3•2ð ÿÿðÿðÿÿÿðÿ$ÿ‚óó32ð ÿÿðÿðÿÿÿƒðÿð$ÿ‚óó3ˆ2ð ÿÿƒÿÿð&ÿ‚óó3ˆ2ð ÿÿƒÿÿƒð$ÿ–óó33332ð ÿðÿðÿðÿÿƒðÿð$ÿœóó30332ð ÿðÿðÿðÿÿÿ$ÿ•óó332ð ÿðÿðÿðÿÿ'ÿƒóó0‰32ð ÿÿ‚ÿ'ÿ‚óó3ˆ2ð ÿÿ…ÿÿ(ÿ‚óó3†2ð 3ÿ‚óó3†2ð 3ÿ‚óó3†2ð 3ÿóÿ†òð 3ÿó3…ð ;„ð="„ðˆø<U <‰þ|@4ýÿòél!Ÿš.5Paint Shop Pro HelpàPaint Shop Pro Version 5.0YInsertItem(`mnu_help',`mc_about',`About &Paint Shop Pro Help...',`PI(`',`Pop.About')',4)BrowseButtons()CB(`btnExit',`E&xit',`Exit()')Zmainmain ÌÌÀÀÀZsecondarymoreMore Informationb,GÀÀÀZsecondarymore2More Information2€,GÀÀÀZsecondaryhow toHow To2€^,ÀÀÀZsecondarygraphicsGraphicsžÀÀÀZsecondaryoptionsOptionsPž^,ÀÀÀZsecondaryexplainExplanation2€^,ÀÀÀZsecondaryexampleExample Žô,ÀÀÀZsecondaryrasterMore Information lÌÀÀÀZsecondaryinfoReferenced ÌÌEÀÀÀZsecondarystepsStep-by-Step Instructionsb,ÀÀÀZsecondarysteps2Step-by-Step Instructions2€,ÀÀÀZ secondaryorder ôôíÀÀÀ  .\PSP.cnt $T² K² ÿÿÿÿ 1ÿÿÿÿ=1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ=z³= z' €,€° €‚ÿBasic Image Editing9=³* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1zä1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿäÿÿÿÿ!=³!' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Undo Command= ä^1ÿÿÿÿ¥^ÎUndo Command@!ž* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0^Î, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ:ž+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUndo Command&òÎ.4 6€å€€ïøü{΀‰€‚ÿThe Undo command reverses the last edit to the active image. It can remove painting or drawing commands, color alterations, filter effects, etc. You can specify how Paint Shop Pro saves the Undo data. To use the Undo command, you can: Ïmýb ”€à€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæÝ m€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Undo from the Edit menu. Click the Undo button on the toolbar. Press + . <.9% €.€" œ€‚ÿRemoving All Changeså±ý4 6€c€€ïïP!³€‰€‚ÿTo undo all of your changes since you last saved the file, use the File Revert command. The File Revert command is not available for new images that have not been saved. 19O1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿOÿÿÿÿŒ=Œ' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Undo History= OÉ1b;]É9j Undo Command@Œ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0É9, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ: s+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUndo HistoryÑ962 2€#€€çÍŸ‚“€‰€‚‚‚ÿThe Undo History command lets you view your previous actions and select which of them to undo. You can allocate storage space for saving the Undo History, compress the information to save space, select the number of steps to save, and update the Undo History with each brush stroke. For help on setting the Undo options, see the section on General Program Preferences.To use the Undo History:4æsj N j€Í€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€æ2°;€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Choose Undo History from the Edit menu or click the Undo History button. The Undo History dialog box opens. The dialog box displays the type of action and time lapsed since the action occurred.2In the list, select the actions to undo, starting with the previous action. The most recent action has the highest number and is at the top of the list. 3Click the Undo button. The Undo History dialog box closes, and the results of the actions are removed from the image.16› 1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ› ÿÿÿÿÙ >j Ù ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Clear Command> ›  1§¥i ‡ ý Clear Command@Ù W * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0 ‡ , (€ €€†"€‚ÿ;W  + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿClear CommandÆŒ‡ ˆ : B€€€ïÁù§€‰€€€‚ÿThe Clear command deletes a floating selection without affecting the image. It deletes the contents of a standard selection. On a layer, the cleared selection area becomes transparent; on a background layer or an 8-bit or lower image, the cleared selection area becomes the background color. The Clear command does not send data to the Windows Clipboard. To use the command, you can: u6 ý ? N€p€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Clear from the Edit menu. Press . 1ˆ .1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ.ÿÿÿÿrDý r' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Cutting and PastingD.¶1r]߀¶&sACutting and Pasting@rö* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0¶&, (€ €€†"€‚ÿAög+ &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCutting and PastingZ7&Á# €n€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro offers cut, copy, and paste commands:ž#gk@{ ƀL€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÁtŽ€Ák@r‰€‚†"€ƒïrþCÒ€‰€‚†"€ƒïl¬q*€‰€‚ÿCutCopyPasteÄÁsAD V€‰€€ïVêh/€‰€ïVêh/€‰€‚ÿIt also has an Empty Clipboard command, which allows you to free the Clipboard of unwanted data, and the Empty Undo Buffers command, which empties the contents of the Undo History list.1k@€A1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ €AÿÿÿÿæABsAæA' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Cropping an ImageB€A(B1  i‚‰ (B˜BNCropping an Image@æAhB* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0(B˜B, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ?hB×B+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCropping an ImageêƘBÁC$ €€€‚ÿCropping an image is like cropping a photograph: you cut off one or more of the image edges, eliminating unwanted parts of the original graphic. Paint Shop Pro offers three ways to crop an image:9×BúC% €(€" œ€‚ÿUse the Crop Tool2®ÁC,F„ ր_€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ•–U€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Crop tool on the Tools palette.2Select the part of the image that you want to retain. The area outside the selection will be deleted. If you select a non-rectangular area, Paint Shop Pro will retain the rectangular portion of the image that contains the selection. 3If you want to change the area to be saved:To increase or decrease the area enclosed by the rectangle, drag any of its sides. Ü“úCHI `€+€Pä:„O€d€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿTo remove the rectangle and start over, right-click the image.To change the area to be cropped, click inside the rectangle and drag it to a new location.4After you have finished, double-click within the selected area, click the Crop Image button on the Tools Control tab of the Control palette, or choose Crop from the Image menu. The unwanted area is deleted, and the image window resizes.D,FLH% €>€" œ€‚ÿUse the Crop Area Dialog BoxÀH I0 .€!€€暣U€‰€‚ÿThe Crop Area dialog box allows you to crop all transparent areas or all areas outside a selection or specific coordinates automatically.¡LHJm š€C€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1To crop around a selection, select an area now.2Double-click the Crop tool to open the Crop Area dialog box.3Select 1 of 4 cropping methods.³\ IÍKW |€Á€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo crop around a specific area, enter the coordinates of the area to be retained.To crop around a selection, select the Surround current selection option.To crop the transparent area of a layer, select the Select opaque area- current layer option.To crop the transparent area of the image, select the Select opaque area-merged option.uFJBL/ .€Œ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ4Click the OK button to close the dialog box and crop the image.9ÍK{L% €(€" œ€‚ÿCrop to SelectionŒ(BLNd –€Q€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the part of the image that you want to retain. The area outside the selection will be deleted. If you select a non-rectangular area, Paint Shop Pro will retain the rectangular portion of the image that contains the selection. 2Choose Crop to Selection from the Image menu. 1{L8N1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ 8NÿÿÿÿƒNK$NƒN' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Adding Borders to an ImageK8NÎN1-߀X ÎN>OFƒAdding Borders to an Image@ƒNO* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0ÎN>O, (€ €€†"€‚ÿHO†O+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAdding Borders to an ImageK(>OÑO# €P€€‚ÿTo add a border to the active image: «5†Oˆv º€k€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ÑOˆƒNƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæBåžå€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ„Û׀‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the color for the borders as the background color. 2Choose Add Borders from the Image menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Add Borders dialog box. 3Mark the Symmetric check box if you want to create equally-sized borders on all sides. 4Enter the border widths. If you: %ÌÑO­‚Y €€€PـVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæüCހ‰€‚†"€ƒæüCހ‰€‚ÿTurned on the Symmetric option, use the Top Spin Control to set the width for the borders. Turned off the Symmetric option, set a width for each border using the appropriate spin control. ™gˆFƒ2 4€Î€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and add the borders to the image.1­‚wƒ1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ wƒÿÿÿÿÁƒJ#FƒÁƒ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Enlarging an Image CanvasJwƒ „1€‚‰X „{„ÊŒEnlarging an Image Canvas@ÁƒK„* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0 „{„, (€ €€†"€‚ÿFK„Á„+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿResizing an Image CanvasC{„†% €=€€‚‚ÿChanging an image canvas increases or decreases its dimensions by adding or removing pixels around the original image. You can add or remove pixels around the entire image or around selected edges. The background color of the new canvas depends on the background color of the image:ٙÁ„݆@ N€7€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿThe current background color becomes the color of the background layer’s background.The background color on all other layers will be transparent.UÔ†2‰ Ѐ«€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæpEin€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæüCހ‰€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿ1Select a background color, if appropriate.2Choose Canvas Size from the Image menu or click the Resize Canvas button. The Change Canvas Size dialog box opens. 3Use the spin controls to set the dimensions. 4Select the placement of the image in the new canvas.To center the image in the new canvas, select both the "Center the Image Horizontally" and the "Center the Image Vertically" check boxes. The boxes below them become dimmed.ä݆ŒT v€'€Pä:„O€d€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿTo center the image horizontally, select the "Center the Image Horizontally" check box. The Left and Right boxes become dimmed.To center the image vertically, select the "Center the Image Vertically" check box. The Top and Bottom boxes become dimmed.To position the image off-center, leave the check boxes unchecked.5If you have left any check boxes unchecked, use the Image Placement boxes to position the image. The Top and Bottom boxes control the vertical placement; the Left and Right control the horizontal placement. Each pair of boxes works in unison -- as you increase the numbers in one box, the numbers in the other box decrease.Ž€2‰ÊŒ4 6€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚‚ÿ6After positioning the image, click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new canvas appears in the image window.1ŒûŒ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿûŒÿÿÿÿKP)ʌK' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Changing Image Width and HeightPûŒ›1oX®„› ŽUÆChanging Image Width and Height@KÛ* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBasic Image Editing0› Ž, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿ?ۍJŽ+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿResizing an Image–s ŽàŽ# €æ€€‚ÿResizing duplicates or deletes pixels as necessary to achieve the desired width and height. To resize an image:ŒJŽóÀK d€y€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ€ €‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Resize from the Image menu or click the Resize button. The Resize dialog box opens.2Go to the line in the dialog box above the buttons that reads Maintain aspect ratio of [a number] to 1. AspecàŽóÀKt ratio is the relationship of the image’s width to height. If you want to retain the original proportions when resizing, select this check box. 3Return to the upper portion of the dialog box and select a measurement option:3èàŽ&ÂK d€×€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPixel Size -- Choose a new measurement in pixels.Percentage of Original -- Select a percentage increase or decrease from the original.Actual/Print Size -- Change the resolution or dimensions. Note that the two are linked.ÇróÀíÄU x€å€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€ïŸFϵÏ' €.€° €‚ÿ Cutting and Pasting9wÏ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:MoreµÏ FÏ1µÏ=1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ=ÿÿÿÿy< y' €*€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Cut CommandO=È1~ÿÿÿÿÕÈ8…Cut CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')@y* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCutting and Pasting0È8, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿ9q+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCut CommandH8¹4 6€)€€ïÁù§€‰€‚ÿThe Cut command is only available when the active image contains a selection. The Cut command sends the selection to the Windows Clipboard and removes it from the image. The resulting "hole" is filled with the current background color. To use the Cut command, you can: Ìjq…b ”€Ú€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ¹zр‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Cut from the Edit menu. Click the Cut button in the Toolbar. Press  + .1¹¶1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¶ÿÿÿÿó=…ó' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Copy CommandP¶C1‡C³ Copy CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')@óƒ* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCutting and Pasting0C³, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿ;ƒî+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCopy Commands,³% €€" œ€‚ÿCopyžxîž& €ð€€‚‚‚ÿThe Copy command copies visible data from the active layer only.To use the Copy command, do one of the following: Ík…b ”€Ü€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ@)Kú€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Copy from the Edit menu. Click the Copy button in the toolbar.Press  + .(ž­% €€‘€€‚ÿ3…à% €€" œ€‚ÿCopy Merged)­ ' €€€‚‚‚‚ÿThe Copy Merged command copies all visible data, regardless of the layer.To use the Copy Merged command, choose Copy Merged from the Edit menu.The Copy commands sends the current image or selection to the Windows Clipboard without affecting the image. 1à:1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ:ÿÿÿÿx> x' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Paste CommandQ :É1Õ³É9 — Paste CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')@x * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCutting and Pasting0É9 , (€ €€†"€‚ÿ; t + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPaste CommandëÅ9 _ & €‹€€‚‚‚ÿThe Paste command places a copy of the Windows clipboard contents into the same or a different image, depending on the Paste command chosen. You can paste the clipboard contents in five ways: 8†t — ² 2€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïQ®ò:€‰€‚†"€ƒïL;€‰€‚†"€ƒïD- €‰€‚†"€ƒïö6t €‚†"€ƒïe“ƒ€‰€‚‚ÿAs a New ImageAs a New LayerAs a New SelectionAs Transparent SelectionInto the Current Selection1_ È 1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÈ ÿÿÿÿ H!—  ' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Empty Clipboard Command[*È k 1Bÿÿÿÿk Û £@Empty Clipboard CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')@ « * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCutting and Pasting0k Û , (€ €€†"€‚ÿN#« ) + &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEmpty Clipboard and Undo Buffers?Û h % €4€" œ€‚ÿEmpty Clipboard CommandyR) á' €¥€€‚‚‚‚ÿData in the Windows Clipboard resides in your active memory (RAM). Since image data is often sizable, leftover data can tie up a considerable amount of memory and slow down your system. The Empty Clipboard command solves this problem by clearing the Clipboard of data. To use the command, choose Empty Clipboard from the Edit menu. Bh #% €:€" œ€‚ÿEmpty Undo Buffers CommandtMá£@' €›€€‚‚‚‚ÿUse this command to empty the contents of the Undo History list, thereby freeing disk space. You can allocate storage space for saving the Undo History and compress the information #£@ to save space in the Undo tab of the General Program Preferences. To empty the buffers, in the Edit menu, point to Empty, and choose Undo Buffers.1#Ô@1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÔ@ AEA7£@ A' € €° €‚ÿPaste Command:Ô@EA* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More21 AvA1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿvAÿÿÿÿµA?EAµA' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: As a New ImageR!vAB1šÿÿÿÿ‚ BqBÚDAs a New ImageSaveMark(`SubWin'):µAAB* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPaste Command0BqB, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ<AB­B+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAs a New Image%ñqBÒC4 6€ã€€ï¯íúª€‰€‚ÿWhen you paste as a new image, Paint Shop Pro loads the Clipboard image in an image window. If the data is in a metafile or vector format, Paint Shop Pro will open the Meta Picture Import dialog box. To paste as a new image, you can: ¥­BÚDc ”€Q€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæÜõkF€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Paste from the Edit menu, then choose As New Image from the submenu. Click the Paste as New Image button in the toolbar.Press  + .1ÒC E1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ! EÿÿÿÿNECÚDNE' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: As a New SelectionR! E E1r8€°ƒ" E FKHAs a New LayerSaveMark(`SubWin'):NEÚE* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPaste Command0 E F, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ<ÚEFF+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAs a New LayerúÊ F@G0 .€•€€çK>£i€‰€‚ÿWhen you paste data as a new layer, Paint Shop Pro makes the clipboard contents into a new layer above the active layer. To paste the clipboard contents as a new layer, do one of the following: åŒFF%HY €€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ‡¥6€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿChoose Paste from the Edit menu, and then choose As New Layer from the submenu.Click the Paste as New Layer toolbar button.&@GKH# €€€‚ÿ1%H|H1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ#|Hÿÿÿÿ¿HCKH¿H' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: As a New SelectionV%|HI1Ú‚6†$II(MAs a New SelectionSaveMark(`SubWin'):¿HOI* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPaste Command0II, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ@OI¿I+ &€*€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAs a New Selection™vIXJ# €ì€€‚ÿWhen you paste data as a new selection, Paint Shop Pro adds it to the current image and defines it as a selection. Ïc¿I'Kl š€Æ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ïN1õ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Open or select the image that you want to paste into. 2Do one of the following:áˆXJLY €€€P£€Lˆ,lžØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæfœœ€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿChoose As New Selection from the Paste sub-menu of the Edit menu.Click the Paste as New Selection button on the toolbar. ×'K(MI `€¯€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒï¯íúª€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ3If the data is in a metafile or vector format, Paint Shop Pro will open the Meta Picture Import dialog box. 4Use the mouse to position the selection. When you've got it where you want it, click once.1LYM1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ%YMÿÿÿÿ¢MI"(M¢M' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: As Transparent Selection\+YMþM1ž°ƒó&þMhNö‚As Transparent SelectionSaveMark(`SubWin'):¢M8N* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPaste Command0þMhN, (€ €€†"€‚ÿF8N®N+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAs Transparent Selection™YhNS€@ N€³€€æÇÜT€‰€ïâ…,ˆ€‰€‚ÿWhen you paste data as a transparent selection, Paint Shop Pro adds it to the current image, defines it as a selection, then deselects all of the pixels that match the current background color. The Transparent Paste tolerance option determines how close the color o®NS€¢Mf a pixel must be to the background color in order to be deselected. m®Nb‚¢ Û€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ïN1õ€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒï¯íúª€‰€‚ÿ1Open or select the image into which you want to paste the clipboard contents.2Select the color that you want to make transparent as the background color. 3Choose As Transparent Selection from the Edit Paste Sub-menu. 4If the data is in a metafile or vector format, Paint Shop Pro will open the Meta Picture Import dialog box. ”bS€ö‚2 4€Ä€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Use the mouse to position the selection. When you've got it where you want it, click once.1b‚'ƒ1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ''ƒÿÿÿÿrƒK$ö‚rƒ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Into the Current Selection^-'ƒЃ16†ÿÿÿÿ(Ѓ:„‡Into the Current SelectionSaveMark(`SubWin'):rƒ „* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPaste Command0Ѓ:„, (€ €€†"€‚ÿH „‚„+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿInto the Current Selection¯‹:„1…$ €€€‚ÿWhen you paste data into the current selection, Paint Shop Pro replaces the contents of the selection with the data from the Clipboard. é/‚„‡º B_€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ïN1õ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒï¯íúª€‰€‚ÿ1Open or select an image. 2Select the area into which you will paste the clipboard contents. 3Choose Into Selection from the Paste submenu of the Edit menu. 4If the data is in a metafile or vector format, Paint Shop Pro will open the Meta Picture Import dialog box. 11…K‡1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ)K‡”‡͇I"‡”‡' €D€° €‚ÿResizing and Resampling Defined9K‡͇* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1”‡þ‡1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ*þ‡ÿÿÿÿ?ˆA͇?ˆ' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Resizing DefinedT#þ‡“ˆ1‹ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ+“ˆЈ6ÀResizing DefinedSaveMark(`SubWin')=?ˆЈ* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿResizing Methods>“ˆ‰+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿResizing MethodsuRЈƒ‰# €€€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro includes four methods for changing an image’s width and height: ;‰Ÿ‰% €,€" œ€‚ÿPixel Resize Methodރ‰ÀŠ$ €œ€€‚ÿWith the Pixel Resize method, Paint Shop Pro duplicates or removes pixels as necessary to achieve the desired width and height of an image. It produces better results than the resampling methods with hard-edged images. 9Ÿ‰ùŠ% €(€" œ€‚ÿSmart Size Method—tÀŠ‹# €è€€‚ÿWith the Smart Size method, Paint Shop Pro chooses the best algorithm based on the current image characteristics.O*ùŠߋ% €T€" œ€‚ÿBilinear and Bicubic Resampling Methods?‹Ž$ €7€€‚ÿThe Bicubic Resampling method of resizing minimizes the raggedness normally associated with expanding an image by using a process called interpolation. As applied here, interpolation smoothes out rough spots by estimating how the "missing" pixels should appear, and then filling them with the appropriate color. It produces better results than the Pixel Resize method with photo-realistic images and with images that are irregular or complex. Use the Bilinear Resampling method for shrinking these images and Bicubic for enlarging them.(ߋFŽ% €€‘€€‚ÿðÊŽ6& €•€€‚‚‚ÿBilinear and Bicubic resampling are available for grey scale images and 24-bit images. If the image does not fit these categories, and you would like to use one of these methods, do the following: ô’FŽ6Àb ’€%€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒï‹†(«€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒï«IŽ(€‰€‚ÿ1Increase the image’s color depth.2Resize the image. 3Reduce the image’s color dep66À?ˆth and return it to the original depth. 16gÀ1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ,gÀ°ÀêÀI"6À°À' €D€° €‚ÿChanging Image Width and Height:gÀêÀ* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1°ÀÁ1‹ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ-ÁÿÿÿÿuÁZ3êÀuÁ' €f€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Access the Appropriate Dialog BoxvEÁëÁ1Fÿÿÿÿg.ëÁ8ÂMÃStep 1: Access the Appropriate Dialog BoxDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')M#uÁ8Â* $€F€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿChanging Image Width and Height X-ëÁÂ+ &€Z€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Access the Appropriate Dialog Box œ8ÂMÃ0 .€€€æ§HŽx€‰€‚ÿThe dialog boxes for the two functions differ only in their titles. You choose the function that you want to use from the Image menu. 1Â~Ã1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ/~ÃÿÿÿÿÊÃL%MÃÊÃ' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the New Sizeh7~Ã2Ä1Êe€0ƒ02ÄÄÇStep 2: Select the New SizeEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')M#ÊÃÄ* $€F€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿChanging Image Width and Height I2ÄÈÄ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the New SizeœyÄdÅ# €ò€€‚ÿYou can select one of five standard image sizes, a custom size by width and height, or a custom size by aspect ratio. 6ÈÄšÅ% €"€" œ€‚ÿStandard Sizesº–dÅTÆ$ €-€€‚ÿThe five standard image sizes are listed in the group box on the left. To select one of the standard sizes, click the option's button or its text. 3šÅ‡Æ% €€" œ€‚ÿCustom Size‘2TÆÇ_ Ž€h€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï‰ü¡€‰€‚†"€ƒïúœ€‰€‚ÿBy Width and HeightBy Aspect Ratio1‡ÆIÇ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ1IÇÿÿÿÿ–ÇM&Ç–Ç' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the OK Buttoni8IÇÿÇ12gÿÿÿÿ2ÿÇLÈMÉStep 3: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')M#–ÇLÈ* $€F€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿChanging Image Width and Height JÿÇ–È+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the OK Button·“LÈMÉ$ €'€€‚ÿWhen you're done setting the image's new size and shape, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will modify the image to match its new dimensions. 1–È~É1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ3~ÉÙÉÊ[4MÉÙÉ' €h€° €‚ÿChanging an Image's Width and Height: Custom Size:~ÉÊ* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More21ÙÉDÊ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ4DÊÿÿÿÿ”ÊP)Ê”Ê' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Custom Size By Width and Heightc2DÊ÷Ê1ÿÿÿÿڅ5÷Ê_Ë=ÍCustom Size By Width and HeightSaveMark(`SubWin')8”Ê/Ë* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustom Size0÷Ê_Ë, (€ €€†"€‚ÿM"/ˬË+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCustom Size By Width and Height^;_Ë Ì# €v€€‚ÿTo specify a custom size by width and height in pixels: 3Ó¬Ë=Í` Ž€§€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæ„Û׀‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Custom Size option. 2Empty the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box. 3Type the new width into the first text box. 4Press . 5Type the new height into the second text box. 1 ÌnÍ1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ6nÍÿÿÿÿºÍL%=ͺÍ' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Custom Size By Aspect Ratio_.nÍÎ1Ör„ÿÿÿÿ7΁Î7Custom Size By Aspect RatioSaveMark(`SubWin')8ºÍQÎ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustom Size0΁Î, (€ €€†"€‚ÿIQÎÊÎ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCustom Size By Aspect RatioÇ£Î‘Ï$ €G€€‚ÿThe aspect ratio is the relationship between the image's two dimensions, expressed as width divided by height. To specify a custom size using the aspect ratio: šCÊÎ7W |€‡€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæ„Û׀‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Custom Si‘Ï7ºÍze option. 2Mark the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box. 3The Aspect Ratio Text Box will display the image's current aspect ratio. If you want to change the ratio, double-click in the text box, then type the new ratio. 4Enter the setting for the dimension that you want to fix. For example, if you want to fix the width and let the height be determined by the aspect ratio, double-click in the Width Text Box and type the new width. The remaining field will update when you either (a) exit the current field, or (b) click the OK button. 1‘Ïh1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ8ÿÿÿÿhŽ&7Ž# €€€‚ÿ1h¿1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ9¿ù2:Žù' €&€° €‚ÿBefore You Begin9¿2* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1ùc1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ:cÿÿÿÿœ92œ' €$€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Overview9cÕ1*ÿÿÿÿŸ;ÕB;Overview=œ* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBefore You Begin0ÕB, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ6 x+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOverviewâœBZ% €{€€‚‚ÿWelcome to Paint Shop Pro 5, the newest version of the award-winning program from Jasc Software, Inc. Paint Shop Pro 5 contains the tools you will need to paint, edit, and retouch your images, and a browser to help manage your files. It is powerful enough for the professional and friendly enough for the beginner. Whether you work with graphics daily or occasionally and create Web or printed pages, Paint Shop Pro 5 is the program for you.?x™% €4€" œ€‚ÿExiting Paint Shop Pro ¢oZ;3 6€Þ€€ïaw€‰€‚ÿTo exit Paint Shop Pro, choose Exit from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will close all its open windows. 1™l1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ<lÿÿÿÿ±E;±' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using this Help FileElö1&7–=öcX Using this Help File=±3* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBefore You Begin0öc, (€ €€†"€‚ÿB3¥+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing this Help File jcE 6 <€Ô€€Ì HelpOn()€‰€‚ÿFor help using Windows Help, click here. Paint Shop Pro Help has a few special hypertext features: 1 ¥v % €€" œ€‚ÿTab Jumps; E ± 0 .€€€æƒ€:€‰€‚ÿEach topic has a row of tabs across the top, like this one. Each set of tabs groups related topics. You can access a topic by clicking its tab. If the current tab set is linked to another tab set, you can jump to the linked set by clicking the link indicator. <v í % €.€" œ€‚ÿHypertext FormattingÊŠ± · $ €M€€‚ÿIn the standard Windows Help File format, all hypertext is green. Topic jumps have a solid underline, and pop-ups have a dashed underline. In Paint Shop Pro Help: ¡Pí X Q r€Š€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ€€‚ÿTopic jumps are red.Pop-ups are blue. Hypertext is not underlined. 1· ‰ 1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ>‰ ÿÿÿÿÈ ?X È ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Getting Around?‰  1ùŸþ€? t CBGetting Around=È D * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBefore You Begin0 t , (€ €€†"€‚ÿ<D ° + &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿGetting Around3t ã % €€" œ€‚ÿMain WindowÃl° ŠW ~€Ø€€ïânSk€‰€ÌAL(`Main Window Regions')€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro's Main Window contains four regions. Each region has specific uses and functions. „$ã *` €J€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒÌ"AL(`Positioning the Main Window')€‰€‚ÿPositioning the Main Window9Šc% €(€" œ€‚ÿBars and Palettesq1*Ô@ P€b€€ÌAL(`Tool Windows')€‰€‚ÿThere are six types of Bars and Palettes. ‹*ck@a ’€V€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€Ôk@È ƒÌ#AL(`Controlling the Tool Windows')€‰€‚ÿControlling the Bars and Palettes5Ô @% € €" œ€‚ÿImage Windows:­k@ÚA è€[€€ÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ÌKL(`Creating Image Files')€‰€ïó©6€‰€ïânSk€‰€‚ÿWhen you open a file or create a new file, Paint Shop Pro displays the image in an image window. Image windows appear within the Main Window's Workspace. i% @CBD X€L€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïE/U倉€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows. 1ÚAtB1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ@tBÿÿÿÿ¶BBCB¶B' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Technical Support?tBõB1Õ–f‚AõB2CÖDAnimation Shop=¶B2C* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBefore You BeginDõBvC+ &€2€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRunning Animation Shop`<2CÖD$ €y€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro now includes Animation Shop, an animation program that can save animated GIF files for use on the World Wide Web or in multimedia presentations. To start Animation Shop from within Paint Shop Pro, choose Run Animation Shop from the File menu. Animation Shop will be launched in a separate window.BvCE1"þ€ÿÿÿÿBE…EvITechnical Support=ÖDUE* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBefore You Begin0E…E, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ?UEÄE+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿTechnical Support“p…EWF# €à€€‚ÿThis help file and the Paint Shop Pro User's Guide are designed to address the majority of user's questions. DÄE›F% €>€" œ€‚ÿSolutions to Common Problemsq>WF G3 6€|€€ïËŽ0€‰€‚ÿFor solutions to common problems, see Troubleshooting. B›FNG% €:€" œ€‚ÿPoor Image Display Quality”a GâG3 6€Â€€ï"…Ý̀‰€‚ÿMost of Jasc's Paint Shop Pro technical support calls concern poor image display quality. 9NGH% €(€" œ€‚ÿGetting More HelpxUâG“H# €ª€€‚ÿIf the above-mentioned sources fail to address your question or problem, you can: ãHvIV z€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ€ €‚†"€ƒï }ö€‰€‚ÿContact one of the distributors listed in the README.DOC file that is included with Paint Shop Pro. Contact Jasc Software, Inc.1“H§I1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿC§IëI$JDvIëI' €:€° €‚ÿPaint Shop Pro Main Window9§I$J* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ëIUJ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿDUJÿÿÿÿŽJ9$JŽJ' €$€° €‚ÿTOPIC: TitlebarLUJÚJ1ÿÿÿÿ¿‡EÚJBK/OTitlebarSaveMark(`SubWin')8ŽJK* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMain Window0ÚJBK, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ6 KxK+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿTitlebar qBKL/ .€â€€æW<¢€‰€‚ÿThe Titlebar displays "Paint Shop Pro" and the filename of the active image, if any image files are open. 4xKLL% €€" œ€‚ÿControl IconåµL1M0 .€k€€ælêA݀‰€‚ÿAt the left end of the Titlebar is the Control Icon, which you use to access the Control menu (see following section). Double-clicking the Control Icon closes Paint Shop Pro.4LLeM% €€" œ€‚ÿControl Menu֚1M;N< F€5€€æÓF݀‰€ælêA݀‰€‚ÿYou open the Control menu by clicking on the Control Icon. You can use the Control menu to position the Main Window or to exit Paint Shop Pro. 6eMqN% €"€" œ€‚ÿWindow ButtonsŸŽ;N/O0 .€€€æRf¶³€‰€‚ÿThe window buttons appear at the right end of the Titlebar. You use the buttons to position the Main Window or to exit Paint Shop Pro. 1qN`O1iÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿF`Oÿÿÿÿ˜O8/O˜O' €"€° €‚ÿTOPIC: MenubarK`O €1c…–G €t€Š„MenubarSaveMark("SubWin")˜O €˜O8˜OD€* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMain Window0 €t€, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ6 D€ª€+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMenu BarÆt€ª‚: B€€€æ1µZ€‰€‚‡"€‚ÿThe Menu bar displays Paint Shop Pro's menu headings. Each menu lists a "family" of selections, and each selection performs a specific action. Menus that are not currently available are temporarily removed from the Menu bar. When no images are open, only the File, Edit, View, Capture, and Help menus are visible. When one or more images are open, a total of 11 menus are visible. When the Browswer is open, a total of eight menus are visible.7ª€á‚% €$€" œ€‚ÿUsing the MenusÅŒª‚Š„9 @€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1You open a menu by clicking it, or by pressing plus the letter that is underlined in the menu's title. For example, to open the File menu, you press  + . 2You choose a menu selection by clicking it, by pressing its underlined letter, or by using the cursor keys to highlight it and then pressing . Menu selections that appear in grey are not currently available. 1á‚ׄ1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿHׄÿÿÿÿ…:Š„…' €&€° €‚ÿTOPIC: WorkspaceMׄ^…1h¿‡lI^…ƅý‰WorkspaceSaveMark("SubWin")8…–…* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMain Window0^…ƅ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ7 –…ý…+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿWorkspace…øƅ‚‡ è€ñ€€ïânSk€‰€ÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ÌKL(`Creating Image Files')€‰€ïE/U倉€‚ÿAs the name implies, the Workspace is where you do your work. For help locating the Workspace, see the Main Window diagram. When you open a file or create a new file, Paint Shop Pro opens a new image window within the Workspace. R-ý…ԇ% €Z€" œ€‚ÿMaximizing the Workspace: Full Screen Edit 炇߈$ €Ï€€‚ÿMaximizing the Workspace strips the Main Window of its Titlebar, Menu bar, and Status bar, and expands the Main Window so that it fills the entire screen. To switch between the normal Workspace and its maximized state, you can: ˆIԇg‰? N€–€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Full Screen Edit from the View menu. Press + . 5߈œ‰$ €"€ €‚ÿRelated Topicsag‰ý‰E Z€:€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï]¹€‰€‚ÿFull Screen Preview_.œ‰\Š1¥ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿJÿÿÿÿ\Š¢ŠFull Screen EditJI(`',`MainWindow.Workspace')Fý‰¢Š( €<€" œ€€‚ÿ Search / Full Screen Edit1\Šӊ1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿKӊÿÿÿÿ‹;¢Š‹' €(€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Status BarNӊ\‹1–ÿÿÿÿL\‹ċ“Status BarSaveMark("SubWin")8‹”‹* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMain Window0\‹ċ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ8 ”‹ü‹+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStatus Bar—gċ“0 .€Ï€€播Ø퀉€‚ÿThe Status bar appears at the bottom of the Main Window. The Status bar displays information about images, features, and procedures. When you point the cursor at an item or control, the Status bar displays a brief description. With an active image, it displays the size in pixels and memory (RAM) needed by the image, and the coordinates of the cursor.1ü‹č1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿMčŽCŽD“Ž' €:€° €‚ÿPaint Shop Pro Main Window;čCŽ* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:How To1ŽtŽ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿNtŽÿÿÿÿĎP)CŽĎ' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Maximize, Minimize, and RestorevEtŽ:1Ÿÿÿÿÿþ€O:²AÁMaximize, Minimize, and RestoreSaveMark(`SubWin');SaveMark("SubWin")HĎ‚* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPositioning the Main Window0:², (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿM"‚ À+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMaximize, Minimize, and Restore² ÀĎ5ܲAÁY €€œ€R¬Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæRf¶³€‰€‚†"€ƒæW<¢€‰€‚ÿYou can maximize, minimize, or restore the Main Window using the window buttons. Double-clicking the text display section of the Titlebar switches the Main Window between its maximized and normal states. 1 ÀrÁ1xÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿPrÁÿÿÿÿ¹ÁG AÁ¹Á' €@€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Moving the Main WindowZ)rÁÂ1óJT‚Q‹ÂMÄMoving the Main WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')H¹Á[Â* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPositioning the Main Window0‹Â, (€ €€†"€!‚ÿD[ÂÏÂ+ &€2€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMoving the Main WindowW4‹Â&Ã# €h€€‚ÿTo move the Main Window to a different location: 'ÄÏÂMÄc ”€‰€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæW<¢€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Point the cursor at the text display section of the Titlebar.2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 3Drag the window by moving the mouse.4Release the mouse button.1&Ã~Ä1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿR~ÄÿÿÿÿÇÄI"MÄÇÄ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Resizing the Main Window\+~Ä#Å1$þ€ÿÿÿÿS#śŎÇResizing the Main WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')HÇÄkÅ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPositioning the Main Window0#Å›Å, (€ €€†"€"‚ÿFkÅáÅ+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿResizing the Main WindowM*›Å.Æ# €T€€‚ÿTo change the size of the Main Window: ` áÅŽÇW |€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Point at a side or corner of the window. The cursor will change to a double-headed arrow. Grabbing a corner moves two sides at once.2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 3Resize the window by moving the mouse.4Release the mouse button.1.Æ¿Ç1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿT¿ÇúÇ3È;ŽÇúÇ' €(€° €‚ÿBars and Palettes9¿Ç3È* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1úÇdÈ1iÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿUdÈÿÿÿÿœÈ83ÈœÈ' €"€° €‚ÿTOPIC: ToolbarKdÈçÈ1+ÿÿÿÿ…VçÈUÉOËToolbarSaveMark(`SubWin')>œÈ%É* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBars and Palettes0çÈUÉ, (€ €€†"€#‚ÿ5 %ÉŠÉ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿToolbarÅjUÉOË[ „€×€€æäUÿ€‰€€ €‚‚çö1€‰€‚‚‡"€æSIV€‰€‚ÿThe toolbar provides buttons that access some of the frequently-used commands in the menus. If a command is unavailable, its button appears greyed-out. Using a toolbar button is easy - just click it. You can also add and remove toolbar buttons by customizing the Toolbar.Toolbar buttons that are not currently available appear greyed out. 1ŠÉ€Ë1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿW€ËÿÿÿÿœË=OËœË' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Tool PaletteP€Ë Ì1–ùƒï†X Ì{ÌàÎTool PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')>œËKÌ* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBars and Palettes0 Ì{Ì, (€ €€†"€$‚ÿ:K̵Ì+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿTool PalettesD{Ì(Í/ .€ˆ€€æp3gW€‰€‚ÿThe Tool Palette contains the following image-editing tools: K}µÌsÎÎ j€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï9íÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒï{š]–€‰€‚†"€ƒïäœX€‰€‚†"€ƒïÆ¡Z䀉€‚†"€ƒï6±ø4€‰€‚†"€ƒï·Œ>ž€‰€‚‚ÿZoom ToolDeform ToolCrop ToolMover ToolSelection ToolsPainting and Drawing ToolsmJ(ÍàÎ# €”€€‚ÿWhen you click a tool button, the Control palette displays its options.1sÎÏ1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿYÏÿÿÿÿQÏ@àÎQÏ' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Control PaletteS"Ï€Ï1K…MZ€Ï<UControl PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')>QÏ * $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBars and Palettes€Ï QÏ0€Ï<, (€ €€†"€%‚ÿ= y+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿControl Paletteß<”< F€¿€€æ§ Mš€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ÿYou use the Control Palette to set parameters for the Tool Palette's active tool. It contains two tabs: the Tool Controls tab, which contains options for modifying image-editing tools, and the Brush Tip tab, which contains controls for configuring brushes and accessing custom brushes. The Brush Tip tab becomes available whenever you select a brush; at other times, it is greyed-out. The Control Palette replaces the Style Bar of earlier versions of Paint Shop Pro.&yº# €€€‚ÿ›;”U` €z€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïò‡e€‰€‚†"€ƒï·Œ>ž€‰€‚ÿWorking with SelectionsPainting and Drawing1º†1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ[†ÿÿÿÿÄ>UÄ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color PaletteQ †1ï†ì\ƒYColor PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')>ÄS* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBars and Palettes0ƒ, (€ €€†"€&‚ÿ;SŸ+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor Palette›\ƒY? N€ž€€æg؝€‰€ïÁù§€‰€‚ÿThe Color Palette contains color selection tools and displays color information. 1ŸŠ1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ]ŠÿÿÿÿËAYË' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Histogram WindowT#Š1ÀM'^Histogram WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')>Ë]* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBars and Palettes0, (€ €€†"€'‚ÿ>]Ë+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHistogram WindowQ÷Z ‚€ñ€€æÁ>gȀ‰€ïš+€‰€‚‡"€ïi= ¶€‰€‚ÿThe Histogram window displays color component graphs for the active image. Paint Shop Pro runs faster with the Histogram Window closed because it doesn't have to update the histogram whenever you select an image or edit an image. 1ËM1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ_Mÿÿÿÿ‹>‹' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Layer PaletteQ MÜ1¢ìÿÿÿÿ`ÜJ » Layer PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')>‹ * $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBars and Palettes0ÜJ , (€ €€†"€(‚ÿ; … + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLayer PaletteÔŠJ Y J b€€€æY/Ó7€‰€çK>£i€‰€æ÷m X€‰€‚‚‚ÿThe Layer palette contains the controls used when working with layers and provides quick access to many of the commands and options in the Layers menu and Layer Properties dialog box. Unlike the menu and dialog box, the palette allows you to change the options for all the layers in an image simultaneously. If the palette is not visible, do one of the following to display it::â… “ X ~€Ë€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒælšËx€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPress .Click the View/Hide Layer button on the toolbar.From the View menu, choose Toolbars to open the Toolbars dialog box. In the Toolbars dialog box, select the "Layer Palette" check box, and then click OK.(Y » % €€‘€€ ‚ÿ1“ ì 1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿaì ' b ;» ' ' €(€° €‚ÿBars and Palettes;ì b * $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:How To1' “ 1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿb“ ÿÿÿÿß L%b ß ' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Displaying a Bar or Palette_.“ >1Üÿÿÿÿ@€c>Œ}@Displaying a Bar or PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')N$ß Œ* $€H€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿControlling the Bars and Palettes0>Œ, (€ €€†"€)‚ÿIŒ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDisplaying a Bar or PaletteñÁŒ @0 .€ƒ€€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿTo show or hide a bar or palette, choose Toolbars from the View menu and select the bar, palette, or window you wish to show or hide. You can also click the appropriate Toolbar button:  @ß @L@& €4€  ‚€‚ÿBar and Palette Buttons1 @}@- *€ €˜€†"€*‚ÿ1L@®@1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿd®@ÿÿÿÿö@H!}@ö@' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Moving a Bar or palette[*®@QA1{ 0‚eQAÏADMoving a Bar or PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')N$ö@ŸA* $€H€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿControlling the Bars and Palettes0QAÏA, (€ €€†"€+‚ÿEŸAB+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMoving a Bar or Palette†cÏAšB# €Æ€€‚ÿThe bars and palettes can be placed virtually anywhere on the screen. To move a bar or palette: (BDW |€Q€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Point the cursor at the text area of the window's titlebar, or at the bar or palette's main panel. Do not point at the control icon or one of the window's buttons. 2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 3Drag the window by moving the mouse.4Release the mouse button. 1šBJD1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿfJDÿÿÿÿ“DI"D“D' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Docking a Bar or palette\+JDïD1x@€ÿÿÿÿgïDmEŽGDocking a Bar or PaletteSaveMark(`SubWin')N$“D=E* $€H€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿControlling the Bars and Palettes0ïDmE, (€ €€†"€,‚ÿF=E³E+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDocking a Bar or PalettesmEŽGŽ ê€ç€€æg؝€‰€æäUÿ€‰€æp3gW€‰€ï&šú5€‰€ï+×s#€‰€‚‚æ§ Mš€‰€æY/Ó7€‰€æÁ>gȀ‰€‚ÿYou can dock the Color palette, toolbar, and Tool palette to a side of the Workspace by positioning it at the Workspace's edge. You can switch back and forth between a bar or palette's floating and docked states by double-clicking its titlebar or main panel. The Control palette, Layer palette, and Histogram Window cannot be docked. 1³EåG1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿhåGÿÿÿÿH9ŽGH( €"€° €ƒ‚ÿWindow:How To1åGOH1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿiOHÿÿÿÿ•HFH•H' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Contacting Jasc, Inc.b1OH÷H1'ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿj÷HBI8LContacting Jasc Software, Inc.SaveMark(`SubWin')K!•HBI* $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿContacting Jasc Software, Inc.j ÷H¬I_#Ž€³ñ€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ$€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ€‚ÿ€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ‚ÿÿÿViaAtsBIJT#x€>³ñ€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ€€Ôq€‚ÿ€€Ôq‚ÿÿÿInternet techsup@jasc.coma ¬I€JA#R€@³ñ€€Ôq€‚ÿ€€Ôq‚ÿÿÿWeb Sitehttp://www.jasc.comWJ×JA#R€,³ñ€€Ôq€‚ÿ€ €Ôq‚ÿÿÿBBS(612) 930-3516^€J5KA#R€:³ñ€€Ôq€‚ÿ€€Ôq‚ÿÿÿTelephone (612) 930-9171W×JŒKA#R€,³ñ€€Ôq€‚ÿ€ €Ôq‚ÿÿÿFax(612) 930-9172…B5KLC#V€„³ñ€€Ôq€‚ÿ€€Ôq‚ÿÿÿMailJasc Software, Inc.P.O. Box 44997Eden Prairie, MN 55344'ŒK8L$ €€j€‚ÿ1LiL1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿkÿÿÿÿiLL&8LL# €€€‚ÿ1iLÀL1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿlÀLøL1M8LøL' €"€° €‚ÿColor Commands9ÀL1M* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1øLbM1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿmbMÿÿÿÿªMH!1MªM' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color Commands Overview\+bMN1åÿÿÿÿënNqN1Color Functions OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin');ªMAN* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0NqN, (€ €€†"€-‚ÿEAN¶N+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor Commands OverviewQqN€N j€ €€ÌAL(`Color Functions')€‰€‚‡"€‚ÿThe color commands modify an image's color composition. The color commands will work on a selection if the image's color depth is greater than 256 colors, or if the image is grey scale. With lower color depths, these commands affect the entire i¶N€ªMmage.H#¶N[€% €F€" œ€‚ÿColor Composition and HistogramsÖ¥€11 0€K€ïš+€‰€‚ÿHistograms analyze image color composition. The information they provide can help you make image enhancement adjustments, or achieve particular color effects. 1[€b1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿobÿÿÿÿ¬J#1¬' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color Adjustment Commands^-b ‚1T…¿p ‚u‚R†Color Adjustment FunctionsSaveMark(`SubWin');¬E‚* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0 ‚u‚, (€ €€†"€.‚ÿGE‚Œ‚+ &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commandsû±u‚·„J b€g€€ï׫®’€‰€‚‚‡"€‚‡"€‚‚ÿPaint Shop Pro has six commands for adjusting an image or selection's color. The commands all use a similar dialog box and operate in a common manner. For the color adjustment commands to work on a selection, the image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image. With lower color depths, the command affects the entire image. To limit the color adjustment to a selection, make the selection before choosing the command.›ÏŒ‚R†Ì f«€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïtLøa€‰€‚†"€ƒïf³²€‰€‚†"€ƒïõóqဉ€‚†"€ƒïE0³N€‰€‚†"€ƒï™Ñ1€‰€‚†"€ƒï¬˜¡š€‰€‚ÿBrightness / Contrast commandGamma Correct commandHighlight / MidTone / Shadow commandHue / Saturation / Lightness commandHue Map commandRed / Green / Blue command1·„ƒ†1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿqƒ†ÿÿÿÿĆAR†Ć' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Colorize CommandU$ƒ†‡1Fër‡„‡™ŒColorize FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin');ĆT‡* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0‡„‡, (€ €€†"€/‚ÿ>T‡‡+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColorize Command¶’„‡xˆ$ €%€€‚ÿThe Colorize command converts an image or selection to a uniform hue and saturation while retaining its lightness. To use the Colorize command:Ér‡A‹W |€å€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ̕€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Colorize from the Colors menu. The Colorize dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.4Move the Hue slider to the left and right to shift all the colors in the image around the color wheel. 0 is pure red; 43 is pure yellow; 85 is green; 128 is cyan; 170 is blue; 312 is magenta; 255 is red again.Xxˆ™ŒC T€+€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚‚ÿ5Move the Saturation slider to the left to decrease saturation and to the right to increase it. At 0, the color is removed.6If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.7To apply the changes, click OK.1A‹ʌ1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿsʌÿÿÿÿ C™Œ ' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Grey Scale CommandW&ʌd1 ¿€tdύŸGrey Scale FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin'); Ÿ* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0dύ, (€ €€†"€0‚ÿ@ŸŽ+ &€*€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿGrey Scale Command¯‰ύŸ& €€€‚‚‚ÿThe Grey Scale command removes the colors from an image and replaces them with greys matching their luminance values. The effect is similar to a black-and-white photograph. Because a grey scale image can only display 256 shades of grey, converting a 16 million color image to grey scale automatically reduces it to 256 colors. To convert an image, choose Grey Scale from the Colors menu.1Ž À1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿu ÀÿÿÿÿOÀŸ ÀŸCŸOÀ' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Histogram CommandsW& ÀŠÀ1O…vŠÀÁ/ÇHistogram FunctionsSaveMark(`SubWin');OÀáÀ* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0ŠÀÁ, (€ €€†"€1‚ÿ@áÀQÁ+ &€*€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHistogram CommandsǓÁÂ4 6€'€€ïš+€‰€‚ÿThe two histogram commands change the shape of the histogram, thereby altering the image. To apply one of the commands to the active image: ̇QÁäÂE X€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæúúŸ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the area to modify. 2Choose Histogram Functions from the Colors menu, then choose the command from the submenu. EÂ)Ä7 <€!€€‡"€‚‡"€‚ÿ For the histogram commands to work on a selection, the image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image. With lower color depths, the commands affect the entire image. To limit the color adjustment to a selection, make the selection before choosing the command. BäÂkÄ% €:€" œ€‚ÿEqualize Histogram Commandð)ÄÅ$ €á€€‚ÿThe Equalize Histogram command smoothes out the image or selection’s histogram so that it is more evenly distributed across the spectrum. To equalize the histogram, choose Equalize from the Histogram Functions command in the Colors menu.AkÄÀÅ% €8€" œ€‚ÿStretch Histogram CommandoJÅ/Ç% €•€€‚‚ÿIf the histogram does not cover the entire spectrum, the image does not include both very dark or black and very light or white areas. The Stretch Histogram command adjusts it so the image’s luminance covers the entire spectrum. To stretch the histogram, choose Stretch from the Histogram Functions command in the Colors menu.1ÀÅ`Ç1xÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿw`Çÿÿÿÿ§ÇG /ǧÇ' €@€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Negative Image Command[*`ÇÈ1Ë€~†xÈmÈÊNegative Image FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin');§Ç=È* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0ÈmÈ, (€ €€†"€2‚ÿD=ȱÈ+ &€2€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿNegative Image CommandV0mÈÊ& €a€€‚‚‚ÿThe Negative Image command replaces the color value of each color with its opposite on the 0-255 scale. The effect is similar to a photographic negative, and the function can be used to create a positive image from a scanned negative. To convert an image, choose Negative Image from the Colors menu.1±È8Ê1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿy8ÊÿÿÿÿzÊBÊzÊ' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Posterize CommandV%8ÊÐÊ1å…zÐÊ;Ë Posterize FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin');zÊ Ë* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0ÐÊ;Ë, (€ €€†"€3‚ÿ? ËzË+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPosterize CommandfB;ËàÌ$ €…€€‚ÿThe Posterize command (pronounced with a long "O") reduces the number of bits per color channel. As the bits per channel decrease, the number of levels of lightness a color can display decrease. This results in a flatter-looking image with a pronounced choppiness in the gradients. To posterize a selection or an image:4ÝzËÏW |€»€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ›ŸJ?€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Posterize from the Colors menu. The Posterize dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.4Move the Bits per Channel slider to select from 1-7 bits. ۘàÌ C T€1€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ€ ‚€‚ÿ5If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.6To apply the changes, click OK.Ï zÊ1Ï=1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ{=ÿÿÿÿ~A ~' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Solarize CommandU$=Ó1Ø~†ÿÿÿÿ|Ó>åSolarize FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin');~* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Commands0Ó>, (€ €€†"€4‚ÿ>|+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSolarize Commandñ>‘$ €ã€€‚ÿThe Solarize command produces the same effect as the Negative Image function, but it lets you control the Threshold level. The Threshold level is the lightness value above which colors are inverted. You set the level, and all colors with lightness values above the level are turned into their inverse (on the 255 scale). At a Threshold level of 1, all colors except black change. As the Threshold level increases, colors must be increasingly lighter to invert. To solarize a selection or image:%|Z ‚€K€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæ%ÃQô€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Solarize from the Colors menu. The Solarize dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the image at the current settings. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.4Move the Threshold slider to select a level from 1-254 to select the lightness level at which colors are inverted. ՘‘å= H€1€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚‚ÿ5If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.6To apply the changes, click OK.. 11jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ}Jƒ4 åJ' €€° €‚ÿHistograms9ƒ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1JŽ1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ~ŽÿÿÿÿõAƒõ' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: About HistogramsT#ŽI1 ÿÿÿÿ I°About HistogramsSaveMark(`SubWin')7 õ€* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿHistograms0I°, (€ €€†"€5‚ÿ>€î+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAbout Histograms8°& 2 2€ €€‚‚æÁ>gȀ‰€‚ÿA histogram is a graph of the distribution of RGB and/or luminance values in an image. Each of the four values appear on the horizontal axis from dark to light (left to right). The vertical axis indicates the number of pixels of that value at each point. At a point where there are many pixels of a value, the corresponding line spikes; where there are no pixels, it lies at the bottom of the graph.To see the distribution of the red, green, blue, or lightness value, select its check box at the bottom of the histogram window. At the top of the window, Paint Shop Pro displays the number of pixels that match the histogram’s maximum and minimum, and then displays the average value.Paint Shop Pro displays histograms for the active image in the Histogram Window. / îU % €€" œ€‚ÿExampleÊ–& 4 6€-€€ïUK€‚ÿThe diagrams shown here contain a histogram and its source image. The luminance spectrum appears on the histogram's horizontal axis, ranging from zero luminance (black) to full luminance (white). The vertical axis indicates the percentage of the source image that matches a point on the luminance spectrum. The spike near the top of the luminance scale is caused by the sky in the image background. 1U P1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ€Pÿÿÿÿ¡Q*¡' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Histograms and Image Enhancementd3P1s'ÿÿÿÿlÉBHistograms and Image EnhancementSaveMark(`SubWin')7 ¡<* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿHistograms0l, (€ €€†"€6‚ÿN#<º+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHistograms and Image Enhancement‰elOA$ €Ë€€‚ÿA histogram can help you decide wºOA¡hat changes might enhance an image's quality. Changing the shape of the histogram will alter the image's balance, and in some cases that's exactly what you want to do. In other cases, when the image composition is good, you want to retain the histogram's shape, but shift it in one direction to subtly enhance the image. / º~A% €€" œ€‚ÿExampleKOAÉB4 6€/€€ïUK€‚ÿConsider the histogram shown here. The photograph appears harsh, and the histogram shows why: the colors are bunched tightly towards the top of the luminance spectrum. Shifting the histogram down slightly will reduce the harshness and improve the image's overall balance. 1~AúB1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‚úB=CvCCÉB=C' €8€° €‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands9úBvC* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1=C§C1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿƒ§CÿÿÿÿõCN'vCõC' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Brightness / Contrast Commandb1§CWD1^ÿÿÿÿŸ‡„WDÍDúKBrightness / Contrast FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')FõCD* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands0WDÍD, (€ €€†"€7‚ÿK DE+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿBrightness / Contrast CommandùÓÍDG& €§€€‚‚‚ÿThe Brightness/Contrast command brightens or darkens an image or selection and the range of light (the contrast) within it. The Brightness control is a quick way to adjust everything at once, such as when you have a picture that is too dark after being scanned. Contrast increases the difference in shading between areas. The brightness and contrast values are expressed as percentages, with 0% being the current setting.To adjust the brightness and/or contrast:ÇE)IQ p€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæÐ;@̀‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Brightness/Contrast in the Adjust submenu. The Brightness/Contrast dialog box opens.2The preview on the left shows the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.x*G¡KN j€U€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ4To view the image’s current settings, move the sliders to the midpoint. (Both boxes will display "0.")5Move the Brightness slider to the right to increase brightness and to the left to decrease brightness. At -100%, the image is solid black. At +100%, the image is solid white.6Move the Contrast slider to the left to increase contrast and to the right to decrease it. At -100%, the image has no contrast, so it is solid grey.7If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.Y')IúK2 4€N€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ8To apply the changes, click OK.1¡K+L1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ…+LÿÿÿÿqLFúKqL' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Gamma Correct CommandZ)+LËL1ôs¯ †ËLAMü…Gamma Correct FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')FqLM* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands0ËLAM, (€ €€†"€8‚ÿCM„M+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿGamma Correct CommandԞAMXN6 :€=€€ïÞ2k €‰€‚‚‚ÿThe Gamma Correction command lets you adjust red, green and blue to compensate for the way the monitor displays them.To adjust the gamma of an image:À„Mr€N j€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæˆn›ú€‰€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Gamma Correction in the Adjust submenu. The Gamma Correction dialog box opens.2The preview on the left shows the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into viXNr€qLew.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.\XN΂E X€/€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4By default, the sliders are linked so they move in unison. Clear the Link check box to drag them individually. 5To view the image’s current settings, move the sliders to the midpoint. (Both boxes will display "1.00.")6The Gamma Curve graph to the right of the sliders displays the three colors. The right side of the graph represents the highlights, the left side represents the shadows. At 1.00, the lines of each color form a straight line, indicating no change. As you move the slider of a color, it forms a curve.Or€…< F€'€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ7Drag the slider to move the majority of red, green and blue pixels to change the shape of the curve. Dragging to the right pushes more pixels to a higher lightness value so the line on the graph curves toward the left. Dragging to the left has the opposite effect. Notice that there is always some light at the darkest level of the sliders and some dark at the lightest because each line extends across the graph.8If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.U&΂r…/ .€L€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ9To apply the changes, click OK.-…Ÿ…* $€€P!ã~‚!€‚ÿ].r…ü…/ .€\€€ç)BSӀ‰€‚ÿYou can also adjust your monitor gamma.1Ÿ…-†1†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‡-†ÿÿÿÿ‚†U.ü…‚†' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Highlight / MidTone / Shadow Commandi8-†ë†1öŸ‡£ ˆë†a‡&ŽHighlight / MidTone / Shadow FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')F‚†1‡* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands0ë†a‡, (€ €€†"€9‚ÿR'1‡³‡+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHighlight / MidTone / Shadow CommandCa‡öˆ& €;€€‚‚‚ÿThe Highlight/Midtone/Shadow command adjusts the dark, middle, and light values separately. The values are expressed as percentages. The Highlight slider at 100%, Midtone at 50%, and Shadow at 0% represent the image’s current settings.To adjust the highlight, midtone, and shadow:%Ô³‡‹Q p€©€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€æ9p?S€‰€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Highlight/Midtone/Shadow in the Adjust submenu. The Highlight/Midtone/Shadow dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box. :øöˆUB R€ñ€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4The Highlight slider add lightness proportionally. As the slider moves to the left, it lightens increasingly darker pixels. This adds highlight to more of the image. 5Move the Midtone slider to shift the middle quarter of the light scale up or down. The areas of midtone lighten as the slider moves right and darken as it moves left.6The Shadow slider does the opposite of the highlight slider -- moving it to the right removes lightness proportionally. Lighter pixels are darkened more.ѕ‹&Ž< F€+€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ7If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.8To apply the changes, click OK.1UWŽ1†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‰WŽÿÿÿÿ¬ŽU.&Ž¬Ž' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Hue / Saturation / Luminance Commandi8WŽ1‰¯ E… Š‹.ÇHue / Saturation / Luminance FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')F¬Ž[* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands0‹, (€ €€†"€:‚ÿR'[ݏ+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHue / Saturation / Lightness Command%ÿ‹Á& €ÿ€€‚ݏÁ¬Ž‚‚ÿHue refers to the color’s tint, saturation to the hue’s purity, and lightness to the color’s brightness. Use the Hue/Saturation/Lightness command to modify these values for an entire image or selection.To adjust the hue, saturation, and/or lightness: Òݏ.ÃN j€¥€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ…FS€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Hue/Saturation/Lightness in the Adjust submenu. The Hue/Saturation/Lightness dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.)çÁWÅB R€Ï€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ4To view the image’s current settings, drag the sliders to the midpoint. (Both boxes will display "0.")5Move the Hue slider to the left and right to shift all the colors in the image around the color wheel. This slider measures the color wheel in percentage. The +100% and -100% return the color to its original position.6Drag the Saturation slider to the left to decrease saturation and to the right to increase it. At -100%, the color is removed, and only grey remains.ªe.ÃÇE X€Ë€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ7Move the Lightness slider to increase and decrease the lightness in the image. A -100% setting produces pure black. A +100% setting produces pure white in those colors with a lightness of 50% and above.8If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.9To apply the changes, click OK.-WÅ.Ç* $€€P!ã~‚!€‚ÿ1Ç_Ç1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‹_ÇÿÿÿÿªÇK$.ǪÇ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Red / Green / Blue Command_._Ç È1€£ Њ Œ ÈÈòÎRed / Green / Blue FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')FªÇOÈ* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands0 ÈÈ, (€ €€†"€;‚ÿHOÈÇÈ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRed / Green / Blue CommandžyÈeÊ% €ó€€‚‚ÿThe Red/Green/Blue command changes the levels of red, green, and blue in an image or selection. As mentioned above, computer monitors create colors by combining red, green, and blue, the three primary colors for projected light. The red, green, and blue values are represented as percentages, with 0% being the current setting. To adjust the red, green, and/or blue levels: ŸÇÈqÌN j€}€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæèXAU€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Red/Green/Blue in the Adjust submenu. The Red/Green/Blue dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag either image to bring other areas of them into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.*ÖeÊ›ÎT v€­€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ÿ4To view the image’s current settings, move the sliders to the midpoint. (The boxes will display "0.")5Move the Red slider to increase and decrease the amount of red in the image.6Move the Green slider to increase and decrease the amount of green in the image.7Move the Blue slider to increase and decrease the amount of blue in the image.8If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.W'qÌòÎ0 0€N€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚‚ÿ9To apply the changes, click OK.1›Î#Ï1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ#ÏÿÿÿÿcÏ@òÎcÏ' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Hue Map CommandT##Ï·Ï1ÙE… ÿÿÿÿŽ·Ï<äHue Map FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')FcÏ * $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Adjustment Commands·Ï cÏ0·Ï<, (€ €€†"€<‚ÿ= y+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHue Map CommandêÆ<c$ €€€‚ÿUse the Hue Map command to adjust hues individually in an image. In the Hue Shift area, the color wheel is represented in both the colored boxes and the slider columns.To use the Hue Map command:ŒbyZ ‚€Å€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæý Ÿì€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Hue Map in the Adjust submenu. The Map Hue dialog box opens.2The preview on the left displays the current image. The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag the image to bring other areas of it into view.3To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.4Click the Reset button to return the sliders to their default positions. The colors and values on either side of each slider match and they correspond to the slider’s position.p"cN j€E€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ5Move the sliders of each column to shift the hues individually. If a hue is not represented in the image, nothing happens.6Drag the Saturation slider to the left to decrease saturation and to the right to increase it. At -100%, the image becomes a grey scale image.7Drag the Lightness slider to increase and decrease the lightness in the image. A -100% setting produces pure black. A +100% setting produces pure white.8If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.U&ä/ .€L€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ÿ9To apply the changes, click OK.11kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ_™J#ä_' €F€° €‚ÿUsing a Color Adjustment Command:™* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More21_Ê1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÊÿÿÿÿQ*™' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using a Color Adjustment Commande4Ê€1hÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‘€Í Using a Color Adjustment FunctionSaveMark(`SubWin')M#Í* $€F€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing a Color Adjustment Command‰€ê ” ö€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæúúŸ€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÐ;@̀‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæüCހ‰€Ì!AL(`Color Adjustment Functions')€‰€‚ÿ1Select the area to modify. 2Choose a color adjustment command from the Colors Adjust submenu: choose Adjust from the Colors menu, then choose the command from the submenu. Paint Shop Pro will open the command's dialog box. 3Use the spin controls to set the command's parameters. Any changes that you make to the settings will be reflected in the Preview Box. ÞÍ < F€œ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4To see the function settings applied to the image or selection, click the Preview button. 5When you have finished adjusting the settings, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will modify the image or selection.1ê 5 1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ’ÿÿÿÿ5 [ & [ # €€€‚ÿ15 Œ 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ“Œ Ê  >[ Ê ' €.€° €‚ÿComputers and Colors9Œ  * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Info1Ê 4 1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ”4 ÿÿÿÿ} I" } ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color Definition Methods\+4 Ù 1ÿÿÿÿÿà† •Ù JüMColor Definition MethodsSaveMark(`SubWin')A} * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿComputers and Colors0Ù J, (€ €€†"€=‚ÿF+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor Definition MethodsCJÓ1 0€%€˜€æK‰œå€‰€‚ÿThere are several methods for defining the projected colors that appear on a computer monitor. The following table outlines the Color dialog box red, green, and blue (RGB) and hue, saturation, and lightness (HSL) settings for the standard white light color spectrum. ®&@ˆ#à€LsØØ€€Ó@}  q<ˆ^ŽŽÿ$€€Ôq< ˆ^ŽŽ€‚ÿ€€ q< ˆ^ŽŽÿ€€Ôq8 ^ŽŽ‚ÿ€0€Ôq8 ^ŽŽ‚ÿÿÿColorRGB SettingsHSL Settingsð(Ó}AÈ#`PsHHHHHH€€ q8 ^ŽŽÿ€€Ôq:Œ^ŽŽ€‚ÿ€€ q:Œ^ŽŽÿ€ €Ôq Œ^‚ÿ€€Ôq Œ^‚ÿ€"€Ôq Œ^‚ÿ€.€Ôq Œ^‚ÿ€8€Ôq Œ^‚ÿ€B€Ôq Œ^‚ÿÿÿRedGreenBlueHueSatLightÎ @KB®#,@sHHHHHH€€ q Œ^ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€ €ÔqŒ‚ÿ€&€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€,€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€6€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿRed255000240120Å%}AC #JsHHHHHH€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€(€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€.€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€6€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€@€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿOrange255128020240120Å%KBÕC #JsHHHHHH€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€(€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€.€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€6€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€@€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿYellow255255040240120Â"C—D #DsHHHHHH€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€"€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€(€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€0€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€:€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿGreen0255080240120Å%ÕC\E #JsHHHHHH€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€"€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€,€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€6€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€@€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿAzure0255255120240120Ä$—D F #HsHHHHHH€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€ €ÔqŒ‚ÿ€*€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€4€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€>€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿIndigo00255160240120Æ&\EæF #LsHHHHHH€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€$€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€.€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€8€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€B€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿViolet2550255200240120' F G$ €€j€‚ÿBæFOG% €:€"”œ€‚ÿRed, Green, and Blue (RGB) GI% €;€€‚‚ÿThe most popular method for defining a projected color is as a combination of red, green, and blue, with values ranging from 0 to 255. For example, pure red is defined by red = 255 (100%), green =0 ( 0%), and blue =0 ( 0%). Pure black has red, green, and blue values of 0%, and pure white has red, green, and blue values of 100%. The RGB model, one of the additive color models, is used on computer monitors.L'OG]I% €N€" œ€‚ÿHue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSL)‚_IßI# €Ÿ€€‚ÿA projected color can be defined by the three components of hue, saturation, and lightness: ü°]IÛKL f€g€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿHue describes the color's shade or tint. It is measured on a circular spectrum running from red to green to blue and returning to red. Saturation describes the hue's purity. A color with 100% saturation is bright and vivid, and a color with 0% saturation is a shade of grey. Lightness describes the color's brightness. A color with 100% lightness is always pure white, and a color with 0% lightness is always pure black. 2 ßI L% €€" œ€‚ÿCMYK ModelÁÛKÎM$ €;€€‚ÿThe CMYK model, a subtractive color model, is based on light being absorbed and reflected by paint and ink. This model is often used when printing. The primary colors, cyan, magenta, and yellow, are mixed to produce the other colors. When all three are combined, they produce black. Because impurities in the ink make it difficult to produce a true black, a fourth color, black (the K), is added when printing.. LüM+ &€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€‚ÿ1ÎM-N1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ–-NÿÿÿÿnNAüMnN' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Gamma CorrectionT#-NÂN1  ¹ t —ÂN3O0ˆGamma CorrectionSaveMark(`SubWin')AnNO* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿComputers and Colors0ÂN3O, (€ €€†"€>‚ÿ>OqO+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿGamma Correction@ 3Oœ‚7 <€€˜‘€‚e€æÇÜT€‰€‚‚ÿAn image is stored in computer memory as a series of numbers. Depending on the image’s qOœ‚nNformat, a pixel's values can be described in a variety of ways. All of these formats have at least one thing in common: a higher number means a brighter color value. This rule has two corollaries: (1) the highest combination of values possible for a pixel produces pure white; and (2) the lowest combination of values possible for a pixel produces pure black. It would follow logically that a value half-way up any scale would have a lightness exactly between black and white. This assumes that our hypothetical scale would allow an integer value exactly in the middle, which in reality it would not: image formats are based on powers of two, so integer midpoints are not possible. ­ƒqOj„* "€€˜‘€‚e€‚ÿTo get over this hurdle, let’s consider an approximate midpoint, and to base it in reality, let’s assume that the image is in a grey scale format. A graph of a monitor’s pixel output over the image’s potential pixel values would look like the following diagram entitled "Linear Brightness." Our approximate midpoint -- say 120 -- would produce an identical brightness on the monitor. :œ‚€„& €(€&”˜º€‚ÿLinear Brightness3j„ׄ/ .€ €&˜˜º€†"€?‚ÿâ·€„¹‡+ $€o€˜‘€‚e€‚‚ÿA computer monitor displays colors by exciting phosphors on the screen. Unfortunately, phosphors do not excite linearly. For example, if a computer reads a lightness value from a photographic image and sends it directly to the monitor, the displayed color will be dimmer than in the original photograph. As you may have already guessed, this is where gamma correction comes in: a gamma correction value adjusts for the non-linearity of phosphor excitation. The diagram entitled "Gamma-Corrected Brightness" below provides an example of how gamma correction can alter the color values sent to a computer monitor. In this case, our approximate midpoint of 120 produces a monitor value of 168. Bׄû‡% €:€$˜º€‚ÿGamma-Corrected Brightness5¹‡0ˆ2 4€€ˆˆ„€:€†"€@ÿT#û‡„ˆ1™à† ù ˜„ˆõˆ]ŽGamma AdjustmentSaveMark(`SubWin')A0ˆň* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿComputers and Colors0„ˆõˆ, (€ €€†"€A‚ÿS(ňH‰+ &€P€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAdjusting Your Monitor’s Gamma Level ‘kõˆى& €Ö€Œ‘€€‚ÿYou can adjust your monitor’s gamma level by choosing Monitor Gamma from Preferences in the File menu. ©vH‰‚‹3 4€í€‘€€‚æsÊQ~€‰€‚ÿThe Monitor Gamma Adjustment dialog box includes four sections, one each for red, green, blue, and grey. On the left side of the dialog box, a sample of each section is displayed with an outer area and a center area. The outer area is a dithered pattern of pixels with lightness values of 0 and 255, and the center area contains pixels with a lightness value of 128.K'ى͋$ €N€˜€‚ÿPaired Areas Before Gamma Correction2‚‹ÿ‹. ,€ €˜€€†"€B‚ÿ8͋7Ž* "€€˜‘€‚e€‚ÿOn the right side of the dialog box, slider controls for red, green, and blue are provided to adjust monitor gamma. Use the slider controls to adjust the image’s gamma level so that these two areas are of equal brightness. With the Link Channels check box selected, the three sliders move together as you drag any individual slider. With the check box unchecked, you can adjust colors individually by dragging the applicable slider. The values that synchronize brightness represent the correct gamma level of your monitor. &ÿ‹]Ž# €€€‚ÿ17ŽŽŽ1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ™ŽŽÿÿÿÿ؎J#]Ž؎' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Error Diffusion Dithering],ŽŽ51ž t ÿÿÿÿš5Š‚ÉError Diffusion DitheringSaveMark(`SubWin')A؎v* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿComputers and Colors05Š, (€ €€†"€C‚ÿGv À+ &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿError Diffusion DitheringŠ À؎öÄŠÃ2 2€‰€€æÇÜT€‰€‚‚‚ÿDithering is a technique for simulating colors that are missing from an image file's palette. The missing colors are simulated by intermingling pixels of two or more palette colors. If the unavailable color differs too greatly from the colors in the image's palette, dithering will produce a grainy or mottled appearance. Error diffusion dithering is a popular dithering method. The "error" in the title refers to the cumulative difference between the actual values of pixels in the image and their "true" values if they were all set to their correct colors. By reducing this error, error diffusion dithering produces image quality that is superior to that achieved by non-error adjusted dithering. “l À•Å' €Ù€€‚‚‚‚ÿThe process starts at the first pixel in the image (the upper left corner). The algorithm finds the color in the palette that is nearest to the color of the pixel. It then compares the two colors' numerical values, saves the difference as the initial error, and applies the color from the palette to the pixel. The process then proceeds to the second pixel. It finds this pixel's nearest color, and calculates the sum of the color and the error value from the last pixel. It sets the pixel to the color that is nearest to this sum. Any difference between the applied color and the sum becomes the new error value. "þ÷Æ$ €ý€€‚ÿWhen the process reaches the third pixel, it repeats the procedure that was used to set the color for the second pixel. The algorithm cycles through the image's remaining pixels in the same manner. The error value is abandoned at the end of each row. D•ÅûÆ% €>€" œ€‚ÿReduce Color Bleeding Option‡a·Æ‚É& €Ã€€‚‚‚ÿAs you may have suspected, error diffusion dithering causes colors to bleed from left to right. This is because the algorithm, and therefore the error value, travels in this direction. Color bleed is most noticeable in images with hard vertical edges, because the edges are softened by the traveling color. Paint Shop Pro functions that use error diffusion dithering include a Reduce Color Bleeding option. This option lessens the left-to-right color bleed by applying a fractional coefficient to the error value. By reducing the error value, less color information is carried from one pixel to the next.1ûƳÉ1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ›ÿÿÿÿ³ÉÙÉ&‚ÉÙÉ# €€€‚ÿ1³É Ê1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿœ ÊHʁÊ>ÙÉHÊ' €.€° €‚ÿCreating Image Files9 ʁÊ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1HʲÊ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ²ÊÿÿÿÿËN'ÊË' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating Image Files Overviewa0²ÊaË1}ÿÿÿÿrŠ žaËÒËÎCreating Image Files OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')AË¢Ë* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating Image Files0aËÒË, (€ €€†"€D‚ÿK ¢ËÌ+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating Image Files Overview_<ÒË|Ì# €x€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides five ways to create image files: ¢ÕÌÎÍ h·€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÿ;œ%€‰€‚†"€ƒïžïYπ‰€‚†"€ƒï‰v倉€‚†"€ƒï˜c–选€‚†"€ƒï†ë€‰€‚†"€ƒïQ®ò:€‰€‚ÿCreating an Empty ImageDuplicating an ImageCapturing an Image from the ScreenUsing a TWAIN-Compliant DeviceLoading a Kodak Digital Camera ImagePasting from the Clipboard1|ÌOÎ1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŸOÎÿÿÿÿ—ÎH!ΗÎ' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating an Empty Image[*OÎòÎ1Vþˆ ã  òÎcϘCreating an Empty ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')A—Î3Ï* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating Image Files0òÎcÏ, (€ €€†"€E‚ÿD3ϧÏ+ &€2€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Blank ImageM*cÏ # €T€€‚ÿTo create a new, blank image, you can: §Ï —ΪS§Ï¶W ~€ª€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒækYž.€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿChoose New from the File menu.Click the New button in the Toolbar. |M 2/ .€š€€æu'd€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the New Image dialog box. For more help, see:f"¶˜D X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïIpé^ €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions12É1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¡ÉÿÿÿÿE˜' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Duplicating an ImageX'Éf1ÜrŠ  ¢fׂDuplicating an ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')A§* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating Image Files0f×, (€ €€†"€F‚ÿB§+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDuplicating an Image?×X# €8€€‚ÿTo copy an entire image: *­‚} Ȁ[€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ïN1õ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒïE/U倉€‚ÿ1Open the image file, or select the image's window. 2Choose Duplicate from the Window menu. Paint Shop Pro will copy the image to a new image window. 1X³1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ£³ÿÿÿÿQ*‚' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Capturing Images From the Screend3³h1oã M €hÙ Capturing Images From the ScreenSaveMark(`SubWin')A©* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating Image Files0hÙ, (€ €€†"€G‚ÿN#©'+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCapturing Images From the ScreenΪÙõ$ €U€€‚ÿThe Screen Capture Function lets you copy all or part of your computer screen into Paint Shop Pro. Images captured from the screen are commonly called "screen snaps". / '$% €€" œ€‚ÿExampleŠ‚õÊ$ €€€‚ÿAll of the pictures of Paint Shop Pro's features that appear in this help file were created using the Screen Capture Function. @$ % €6€" œ€‚ÿCreating Screen CapturesgDÊq# €ˆ€€‚ÿYou have to setup the Screen Capture Function before you use it. ŠF  ` €€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïˆØxÙ €‰€‚†"€ƒïàôŽ €‰€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen CapturePerforming a Screen Capture1qH 1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¥H ÿÿÿÿ— O( — ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using a TWAIN-Compliant Deviceb1H ù 1Ž  Ü Šù j í Using a TWAIN-Compliant DeviceSaveMark(`SubWin')A— : * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating Image Files0ù j , (€ €€†"€H‚ÿL!: ¶ + &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing a TWAIN-Compliant Device“dj I / .€È€€æ—rS.€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro supports TWAIN-compliant image devices, such as scanners and digital cameras. £D¶ ì _ Ž€Œ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïwYE€‰€‚†"€ƒï¹€nU€‰€‚ÿSelecting a TWAIN-Compliant DeviceAcquiring an ImageG"I 3 % €D€" œ€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro and TWAIN_32.DLLº†ì í 4 6€ €€ïâŒL€‰€‚ÿIf you have installed a TWAIN-compliant device, but Acquire and Select Source on the File menu are greyed out, see Operations. h73 U 1úM ÿÿÿÿ§U Æ Loading a Kodak Digital Camera ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')Aí – * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating Image Files0U Æ , (€ €€†"€I‚ÿR'– + &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLoading a Kodak Digital Camera Image¶’Æ Î$ €%€€‚ÿIf you have a Kodak DC40, DC50, or DC120 camera, you can use Paint Shop Pro to access and manage the files while they are still in the camera. ™:g_ Ž€x€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÑŠŠ€‰€‚†"€ƒï1<瀉€‚ÿConfiguring the SettingsAcquiring an Image(Ώ$ €€€‚‚ÿ1gÀ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿšÀ @F@A @' €4€° €‚ÿCreating an Empty ImageÀ @9ÀF@* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1 @w@1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ©w@ÿÿÿÿÎ@W/F@Î@( €^€”° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Open the New Image Dialog BoxrAw@@A1šÿÿÿÿI ª@AƒAúBStep 1: Open the New Image Dialog BoxDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')CÎ@ƒA* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Blank ImageS(@AÖA+ &€P€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Open the New Image Dialog Boxk<ƒAAB/ .€x€€æu'd€‰€‚ÿThere are two ways to open the New Image dialog box: ¹bÖAúBW ~€È€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒækYž.€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿYou can choose New from the File menuYou can click the New button in the Toolbar. 1AB+C1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ«+Cÿÿÿÿ|CQ*úB|C' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Set the Width and Heightm<+CéC1•>€ €‚ ¬éC,DEStep 2: Set the Width and HeightEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')C|C,D* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Blank ImageN#éCzD+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Set the Width and Heightò,DE$ €å€€‚ÿIn the Width and Height text boxes, type the image's dimensions, and then select pixels, inches, or centimeters as the units of measurement. In a similar manner, type the resolution number, and select the units of pixels/inch or pixels/cm.1zDÁE1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ­ÁEÿÿÿÿFT-EF' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Background Colorp?ÁE…F1~I ƒ„ ®…FÍFIStep 3: Select the Background ColorEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')HFÍF- *€6€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Creating a Blank ImageQ&…FG+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the Background Color×ÍF5H@ N€¯€€æP.4W€‰€ïÁù§€‰€‚ÿWhen the new image first opens, it will be filled with the selected background color. You select the color from the Background Color drop down box. The first two selections are the current active colors. å GIE X€A€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚ÿ1Click the drop down box to open it. 2Click the color you want to select. If the color isn't visible, use the scrollbar to move through the list.15HKI1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¯KIÿÿÿÿ™IN'I™I' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Image Typej9KIJ1¿€‚ ·… °JFJÔKStep 4: Select the Image TypeEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')C™IFJ* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Blank ImageK J‘J+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Image Type¡rFJ2K/ .€ä€€挏ëd€‰€‚ÿThe image type is the new image's color depth. You select the image type from the Image Type Drop Down Box:¢^‘JÔKD X€Œ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the drop down box to open it. 2Click the image type you want to select. 12KL1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ±LÿÿÿÿWLR+ÔKWL' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Check the Memory Requiredn=LÅL1Fƒ„ F‡ ²ÅLMOStep 5: Check the Memory RequiredEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')CWLM* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Blank ImageO$ÅLWM+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Check the Memory Required2öM‰N< F€í€€æu'd€‰€ænpO€‰€‚ÿAt the bottom of the New Image dialog box is a text display that indicates how much memory (RAM) is required to create the new image. If you don't have at least as much memory as is indicated here, select one or both of the following: ”4WMO` €l€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïKpé^ €‰€‚†"€ƒïIpé^ €‰€‚ÿLower color depth Smaller dimensions1‰NNO1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ³NOÿÿÿÿ›OM&O›O' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the OK Buttoni8NO€1X·… ÿÿÿÿŽ€S€z‚Step 6: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNe›O€›Oxt')C›OS€* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Blank ImageJ€€+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Select the OK ButtonZ7S€÷€# €n€€‚ÿClick the OK button. One of two things will happen: ƒ7€z‚L f€s€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæՈY€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open a new image window filled with the selected background color. Paint Shop Pro will present a prompt stating that there is insufficient memory to create the image. Click the OK button. To create an image, you will have to select a lower color depth and/or smaller dimensions. 1÷€«‚1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿµ«‚ð‚)ƒEz‚ð‚' €<€° €‚ÿSetting Up a Screen Capture9«‚)ƒ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ð‚Zƒ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¶Zƒÿÿÿÿ¶ƒ\5)ƒ¶ƒ' €j€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Access the Capture Setup Dialog BoxxGZƒ.„1ÿÿÿÿß ·.„v„`…Step 1: Access the Capture Setup Dialog BoxDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')H¶ƒv„* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen CaptureY..„τ+ &€\€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Access the Capture Setup Dialog Box‘bv„`…/ .€Ä€€扃\!€‰€‚ÿChoose Setup from the Capture menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Capture Setup dialog box. 1τ‘…1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿž‘…ÿÿÿÿ߅N'`…߅' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Choose a Capture Typej9‘…I†1Ž  Ï ¹I†‘†‰Step 2: Choose a Capture TypeEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')H߅‘†* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen CaptureK I†܆+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Choose a Capture Type’‘†ž‡0 .€%€€暮ə€‰€‚ÿThe capture type determines which area of the screen will be copied. You select a capture type by clicking on it in the Capture Group Box. :܆؇, (€€R˜!ã~‚!€ƒ‚ÿTypeActionជíˆ4 6€Ã€P!ã~‚!€ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ÿAreaSelect a rectangular portion of the screenFull ScreenCopy the entire screenClient AreaCopy the input area of the active windowWindowCopy the entire active windowObjectCopy a window feature or group of features'؇‰$ €€j€‚ÿ1íˆE‰1†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿºE‰ÿÿÿÿš‰U.‰š‰' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Activation Methodq@E‰ Š1 ß # » ŠSŠ-ŒStep 3: Select the Activation MethodEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')Hš‰SŠ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen CaptureR' Š¥Š+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the Activation MethodĔSŠi‹0 .€)€€æÿç%€‰€‚ÿYou select an activation method from the Activate Capture Group Box. The activation method determines how the screen captures are initiated. ÄI¥Š-Œ{ ƀ˜€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï÷ÖäN€‰€‚†"€ƒïJ0z€‰€‚†"€ƒï9h‰á€‰€‚ÿRight Mouse Click MethodHot Key MethodTimer Method1i‹^Œ1‡ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŒ^ŒÿÿÿÿŽŒV/-ŒŽŒ' €^€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Set the Include Cursor OptionrA^Œ&1CÏ * œ&n€ŽStep 4: Set the Include Cursor OptionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')HŽŒn* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen CaptureS(&Á+ &€P€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Set the Include Cursor Option¿n€Ž0 .€€€æ„Û׀‰€‚ÿTo include the cursor in the screen capture, mark the check box labeled Include cursor. This option is not available for area captures. 1Á±Ž1ŠÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŸ±Žÿÿÿÿ Y2€Ž ' €d€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Set the Multiple Captures OptionuD±Ž1ò# 1 ¿Ǐ„ÁStep 5: Set the Multiple Captures OptionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')H Ǐ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen CaptureV+)À+ &€V€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Set tǏ)À he Multiple Captures Optionh9Ǐ‘À/ .€r€€æ„Û׀‰€‚ÿWhen the check box labeled "Multiple captures" is:óœ)À„Á6 :€{€P­€W‚¬€€ƒ‚€€ƒ‚ÿEmptyPaint Shop Pro is automatically reactivated when you perform a screen capture. FilledYou can continue performing screen captures until you manually reactivate Paint Shop Pro. 1‘ÀµÁ1“ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÀµÁÿÿÿÿÂb;„ÁÂ' €v€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Choose the OK Button / Capture Now Button~MµÁ•Â1A* ÿÿÿÿÁ•ÂÝÂíÄStep 6: Select the OK Button / Capture Now ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')HÂÝÂ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSetting Up a Screen Capture_4•Â<Ã+ &€h€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Choose the OK Button / Capture Now Button±QÝÂíÄ` Ž€§€P¬Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïàôŽ €‰€‚†"€ƒïãôŽ €‰€‚ÿClick the OK button to close the dialog box and save the capture setup settings. You can now perform a screen capture using the selected settings. Click the Capture Now button to close the dialog box, save the capture setup settings, and start taking screen snaps. Continue at Step 4 under "Performing a Screen Capture". 1<ÃÅ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÂÅcÅœÅEíÄcÅ' €<€° €‚ÿPerforming a Screen Capture9ÅœÅ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1cÅÍÅ1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÃÍÅÿÿÿÿÆI"œÅÆ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Setup the Screene4ÍÅ{Æ1vÿÿÿÿH„ Ä{ÆÃÆÈStep 1: Setup the ScreenDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')HÆÃÆ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPerforming a Screen CaptureF{Æ Ç+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Setup the Screenÿ¿ÃÆÈ@ N€ƒ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿIf you are copying part of an application, start the application now. If you want to copy the whole screen, arrange the open windows as you want them to appear in the captured image. 1 Ç9È1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÅ9Èÿÿÿÿ‰ÈP)ȉÈ' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Activate Paint Shop Prol;9ÈõÈ1Ð%ƒ í„ ÆõÈ=ÉÜÉStep 2: Activate Paint Shop ProEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')H‰È=É* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPerforming a Screen CaptureM"õÈŠÉ+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Activate Paint Shop ProR/=ÉÜÉ# €^€€‚ÿMake Paint Shop Pro the active application. 1ŠÉ Ê1ŽÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÇ ÊÿÿÿÿjÊ]6ÜÉjÊ' €l€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select "Start" From the Capture MenuyH ÊãÊ1ÿH„ ą ÈãÊ+ËùËStep 3: Select "Start" From the Capture MenuEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')HjÊ+Ë* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPerforming a Screen CaptureX-ãʃË+ &€Z€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Choose Start From the Capture MenuvS+ËùË# €Š€€‚ÿChoose Start From the Capture menu. Paint Shop Pro will minimize automatically. 1ƒË*Ì1‘ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÉ*ÌÿÿÿÿŠÌ`9ùËŠÌ' €r€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Window / Position the Cursor|K*ÌÍ1íí„ €ÊÍNÍ Step 4: Select the Window / Position the CursorEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')HŠÌNÍ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPerforming a Screen Capture]2Í«Í+ &€d€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Window / Position the Cursor<NÍçÍ# €2€€‚ÿIf you are capturing: 6«ÍÎ% €"€" œ€‚ÿArea or ObjectòÎçÍÏ$ €€€‚ÿPosition the cursor over the area or object that you want to capture. If you are capturing an object and using the Include Cursor Option, position the cursor as you want it to appear in the screen snap. =ÎLÏ% €0€" œ€‚ÿWindow or Client AreaîÊÏF$ €•€€‚ÿSelect the window (or the window that contains the client area) that you want to capture. If you are using the Include Cursor Option, position LÏFŠÌthe cursor as you want it to appear in the screen snap. 3LÏy% €€" œ€‚ÿFull Screen“pF # €à€€‚ÿIf you are using the Include Cursor Option, position the cursor as you want it to appear in the screen snap. 1y=1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿË=ÿÿÿÿŠM& Š' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Activate the Capturei8=ó1eą ]Ìó;oStep 5: Activate the CaptureEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')HŠ;* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPerforming a Screen CaptureJó…+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Activate the Capture|I;3 6€’€€ïŠØxÙ €‰€‚ÿHow you activate the capture depends on what method you selected. A…B, (€*€R˜…~‚…€ƒ‚ÿMethodTo Activate-ño< F€ã€P…~‚…€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ÿRight Mouse Click Click with the secondary mouse button. Hot Key Press the hot key that you selected when you setup the screen capture function. Timer Activates automatically. Paint Shop Pro will beep when it performs a capture. 1B 1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÍ ÿÿÿÿôT-oô' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Complete the Screen Capturep? d1O€ÿÿÿÿÎd¬ÊStep 6: Complete the Screen CaptureEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')Hô¬* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPerforming a Screen CaptureQ&dý+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Complete the Screen CaptureiF¬f# €Œ€€‚ÿWhat happens next depends on the type of capture you are creating: dýÊ` Ž€ €PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒïŸÿs§€‰€ï©-A쀉€‚ÿIf you are capturing the full screen, a client area, or a window, Paint Shop Pro will copy the captured screen area to a new image window. If you are capturing an area or an object, you must specify the area or object that you want to capture. 1fû1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÏû@{EÊ@' €<€° €‚ÿComplete the Screen Capture;û{* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:How To1@¬1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿЬÿÿÿÿîB{î' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Capturing an AreaN¬m 1_ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÑm « Ù Capturing an AreaSaveMark(`SubWin');FocusWindow(`More');FocusWindow(`How To')>î« * $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCapturing an AreaL)m ÷ # €R€€‚ÿThe cursor will change to crosshairs. â©« Ù 9 @€S€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click one corner of the area you want to select. 2Click the area's opposite corner. Paint Shop Pro will copy the captured screen area to a new image window. 1÷  1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÒ ÿÿÿÿN DÙ N ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Capturing an ObjectP Ï 1]ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÓÏ  ; Capturing an ObjectSaveMark(`SubWin');FocusWindow(`More');FocusWindow(`How To')@N  * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCapturing an ObjectW4Ï f # €h€€‚ÿThe object under the cursor will be highlighted. ՜ ; 9 @€9€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Move the cursor until the correct object is highlighted. 2Click the object. Paint Shop Pro will copy the captured object to a new image window. 1f l 1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÔl ÿÿÿÿŠ :; Š ( €$€° €ƒ‚ÿWindow:Options1l × 1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÕ× ÿÿÿÿ I"Š  ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Right Mouse Click Method\+× |1öÿÿÿÿ€Ö|¡W@Right Mouse Click MethodSaveMark(`SubWin')@ Œ* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿActivation Methods:H|, (€:€€‡"€J‚ÿRight Mouse Click MethodOŒS: D€,€ˆïJ0z€‡"€K€‰‚ÿHot Key MethodN¡; F€(€ˆï9h‰á€‡"€K€‰‚ÿTimer Methodª{SW@/ .€ö€€æès–'€‰€‚ÿYou can activate the screen capture using the ¡W@ secondary mouse button. Click the option labeled "Right mouse click". 1¡ˆ@1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ׈@ÿÿÿÿÇ@?W@Ç@' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Hot Key MethodR!ˆ@A1„TnØA>B‘CHot Key MethodSaveMark(`SubWin')@Ç@YA* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿActivation Methods:XA±A9 B€@€ï÷ÖäN€‡"€K€‰‚ÿRight Mouse Click Method?YAðA- *€&€ˆ€‡"€J‚ÿHot Key MethodN±A>B; F€(€ˆï9h‰á€‡"€K€‰‚ÿTimer MethodŠgðAÈB# €Î€€‚ÿYou can specify a function key or a function key combination that will activate the screen capture. É|>B‘CM j€ø€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click "Hot Key". 2Click the Hot Key Drop Down Box to open it. 3Click the hot key that you want to use. 1ÈBÂC1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÙÂCÿÿÿÿÿC=‘CÿC' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Timer MethodPÂCOD1z€ÿÿÿÿÚODtEœFTimer MethodSaveMark(`SubWin')@ÿCD* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿActivation Methods:XODçD9 B€@€ï÷ÖäN€‡"€K€‰‚ÿRight Mouse Click MethodOD6E: D€,€ˆïJ0z€‡"€K€‰‚ÿHot Key Method>çDtE. ,€"€ˆ€‡"€J‚ÿTimer MethodŸ|6EF# €ø€€‚ÿYou can specify an interval in seconds between the time that the capture is initiated and the time that it is performed. ªitEœFA R€Ò€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click "Delay timer". 2Press to access the text box. 3Enter the number of seconds. 1FîF1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÛîFGVG/œFG' €€° €‚ÿTWAIN9îFVG* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1G‡G1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ܇GÿÿÿÿÚGS,VGÚG' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Selecting a TWAIN-Compliant Devicef5‡G@H1òÿÿÿÿ`„Ý@H»H|JSelecting a TWAIN-Complaint DeviceSaveMark(`SubWin')K!ÚG‹H* $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing a TWAIN-Compliant Device0@H»H, (€ €€†"€L‚ÿP%‹H I+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting a TWAIN-Compliant Device_<»HjI# €x€€‚ÿTo select a TWAIN-compliant device for acquiring images: Ê I|JH ^€•€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Select Source from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will tell TWAIN_32.DLL to open its Select Source dialog box. 2Highlight the device that you want to use. 3Click the OK button. 1jI­J1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÞ­JÿÿÿÿðJC|JðJ' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Acquiring an ImageV%­JFK1Šó‚ÿÿÿÿßFKÁKNAcquiring an ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')K!ðJ‘K* $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing a TWAIN-Compliant Device0FKÁK, (€ €€†"€M‚ÿ@‘KL+ &€*€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAcquiring an ImageeBÁKfL# €„€€‚ÿTo acquire an image using the selected TWAIN-compliant device: ŽuLN? L€ë€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Acquire from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will tell TWAIN_32.DLL to open the device software's interface. 2Use the interface to set the image acquisition options. For help using the interface, consult its on-line help or the device software's help file. When the device and its software finish processing the image, it will be sent to Paint Shop Pro. 1fLKN1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿàKNzN³N/NzN' €€° €‚ÿKodak9KN³N* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1zNäN1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿáäNÿÿÿÿ O<³N O' €*€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Configuring\+äN|O1,ÿÿÿÿþâ|O €ô„Configuring the SettingsSaveMark(`SubWin')Q' OÍO* $€N€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLoading a Kodak Digital Camera Image0|O €, (€ €€†"€N‚ÿÍO € OFÍOR€+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿConfiguring the SettingsuM €ǀ( €š€V˜˜€‚ÿNOTE: Connect the camera to the computer before configuring your settings.@R€# €:€€‚ÿTo configure the settings:Ùyǀàƒ` Ž€ó€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ€€æ €‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1In the File menu, choose Import, then Kodak Digital Camera, and then Configure. The Kodak Digital Camera Configuration dialog box opens.2In the Camera Type list box, select the camera.3If you know which port on your computer is connected to your camera, select it from the Communication Port list. If you do not know the port, leave the selection at Auto Detect. 4If you know the appropriate baud rate setting, select it from the Baud Rate list. If you do not know the setting, leave the selection at auto-detect. Paint Shop Pro will check the computer and camera and set the fastest possible connection.äô„0 .€É€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ÿ5To download thumbnails of the images as soon as the camera connects to the computer, select the "Download thumbnails immediately after opening" check box. This allows you to preview the files while they are in the camera.1àƒ%…1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿã%…ÿÿÿÿh…Cô„h…' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Acquiring an ImageV%%…Ÿ…1] ~†ÿÿÿÿ䟅?†kAcquiring an ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')Q'h…†* $€N€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLoading a Kodak Digital Camera Image0Ÿ…?†, (€ €€†"€O‚ÿ@††+ &€*€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAcquiring an Imageµ}?†4‰8 >€û€€€€æØî"G€‰€‚‚‚ÿThe Kodak Digital Camera dialog box, which opens when you choose the Acquire command from the Kodak Digital Camera submenu, lets you work with the image files individually or together. In the File menu, choose Import, then Kodak Digital Camera, and then Acquire. When the Kodak Digital Camera dialog box opens, the camera style and resolution (in pixels) appear at the top. The dialog box contains three panels:The Current Image Source panel displays the number of exposures taken and the number remaining. Select the Camera Memory or Card Memory (if your camera has one) option to alternate between these two images sources.€\†Ž‰$ €ž€€‚‚ÿThe Multiple Exposure Operations panel is used to apply the commands to all the images. Å4‰ϋV z€“€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿIf you chose not to download thumbnails when you configured the settings, click the Get Previews button to download them now. When no previews have been downloaded, an "X" appears in the preview window. To delete all the images in the current image source, click Delete All. Click Open All in PSP to open all the images in the Paint Shop Pro workspace. Click Save All to Disk to save all the images on your hard disk without opening them. ~ZŽ‰MŒ$ €Ž€€‚‚ÿThe Single Exposure Operations panel is used to view and work with individual images. ¿ϋbŽV z€‡€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿAs you click the left and right arrows to scroll through the images, each picture’s time , date, and preview appear. (The preview appears only if you downloaded the thumbnails.) If you chose not to download the thumbnails and want to see a preview of the selected image, click Get Preview. Click Open in PSP to open the image in the Paint Shop Pro workspace. Click Save to Disk to save the image on your hard disk without opening it.k7MŒ͎4 8€p€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚ÿClick Delete to delete the image from the camera. ž|bŽk" €ø€€ÿIf you want to take a picture and see it immediately, position the camera, click Take Picture, and then click Get Preview.1͎œ1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿåÿÿÿÿœ&k# €€€‚ÿ1œ À1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿæ ÀMÀ†À ÀAMÀ' €4€° €‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar9 À†À* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1MÀ·À1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿç·ÀÿÿÿÿÁQ*†ÀÁ' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Customizing the Toolbar Overviewd3·ÀlÁ1Hÿÿÿÿ^‚èlÁàÁ÷ÄCustomizing the Toolbar OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')DÁ°Á* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar0lÁàÁ, (€ €€†"€P‚ÿN#°Á.Â+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar Overview˛àÁùÂ0 .€7€€æ4íB~€‰€‚ÿYou can add, remove, and rearrange the buttons on the Toolbar. You edit the Toolbar from the Customize Toolbar dialog box. To access the dialog box:§l. Ã; F€Ø€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Preferences from the File menu. 2Choose Customize Toolbar from the Preferences Submenu. 5ùÂÕÃ$ €"€ €‚ÿRelated Topics"‹ Ã÷Ä— ü€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïàãE­€‰€‚†"€ƒï°4À‰€‚†"€ƒïuFj€‰€‚†"€ƒï}`Ü°€‰€‚ÿAdding a Button or SpaceRemoving a Button or SpaceMoving a Button or SpaceRestoring the Default Configuration1ÕÃ(Å1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿé(ÅÿÿÿÿqÅI"÷ÄqÅ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Adding a Button or Space\+(ÅÍÅ1@S€…êÍÅAÆPÉAdding a Button or SpaceSaveMark(`SubWin')DqÅÆ* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar0ÍÅAÆ, (€ €€†"€Q‚ÿFƇÆ+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAdding a Button or SpaceÀœAÆGÇ$ €9€€‚ÿYou can add a button or space by dragging the item from the Available Buttons list box to the Toolbar Buttons list box. You can also use the Add button: LJÆPÉB R€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the button that you want to add in the Available Buttons list box. To add a space, click Separator. 2Use the Toolbar buttons List Box to select the position where you want to insert the new item. Click the item that currently occupies the position. 3Click the Add button. Paint Shop Pro will insert the new button or space at the selected position. If you added a new button, it will be deleted from the Available Buttons list box. 1GǁÉ1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿëÉÿÿÿÿÌÉK$PÉÌÉ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Removing a Button or Space^-É*Ê1Ž^‚5‡ì*ÊžÊûÌRemoving a Button or SpaceSaveMark(`SubWin')DÌÉnÊ* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar0*ÊžÊ, (€ €€†"€R‚ÿHnÊæÊ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRemoving a Button or SpaceÆ¢žÊ¬Ë$ €E€€‚ÿYou can remove a button or space by dragging the item from the Toolbar Buttons list box to the Available Buttons list box. You can also use the Remove button: OæÊûÌ9 @€-€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the button or space that you want to delete in the Toolbar Buttons list box. 2Click the Remove button. Paint Shop Pro will delete the selected item from the Toolbar Buttons List Box. If you deleted a button, it will be added to the Available Buttons list box. 1¬Ë,Í1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿí,ÍÿÿÿÿuÍI"ûÌuÍ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Moving a Button or Space\+,ÍÑÍ1T…-îÑÍEÎ`Moving a Button or SpaceSaveMark(`SubWin')DuÍÎ* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar0ÑÍEÎ, (€ €€†"€S‚ÿF΋Î+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMoving a Button or SpaceŸšEÎIÏ$ €5€€‚ÿYou can move a button or space by dragging the item within the Toolbar Buttons list box. You can also use the Move Up button and the Move Down button: ҋÎ`9 @€¥€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the button or space that you want to move in the Toolbar Buttons list box. 2Click the Move Up button to move tIÏ`uÍhe item up one space. Click the Move Down button to move the item down one space. 1IÏ‘1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿï‘ÿÿÿÿåT-`å' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Restoring the Default Configurationg6‘L15‡ÿÿÿÿðLÀRestoring the Default ConfigurationSaveMark(`SubWin')Då* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCustomizing the Toolbar0LÀ, (€ €€†"€T‚ÿQ&+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRestoring the Default Configuration\À# €ž€€‚ÿTo add all the buttons to the Toolbar and remove all the spaces, click the Reset button. 1Á1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿñÿÿÿÿÁç&ç# €€€‚ÿ1Á1gÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿòÿÿÿÿN6çN' €€° €‚ÿDummy Topicsj9ž1ŸÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿóžÿÿÿÿíContentsJI(`>Main',`BeforeYouBegin.Overview');Contents()5 Ní* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿContents€Ožm1·ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿômÿÿÿÿ€Page SetupJI(`>Main',`BeforeYouBegin.Overview');JI(`>More2',`PageSetup.Step1')7 í€* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPage SetupŽ]m21Ëÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿõ2ÿÿÿÿoPage Setup ImageJI(`>Main',`ManagingImageFiles.PrintingFile');JI(`>More2',`PageSetup.Step1')=€o* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPage Setup Image‹Z2ú1Êÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿöúÿÿÿÿ9Page Setup BrowserJI(`>Main',`Browser.ManagingThumbnails');JI(`>More2',`PageSetup.Step1')?o9* $€*€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPage Setup Browserk:ú€1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ÷€ÿÿÿÿÖPrintJI(`>Main',`BeforeYouBegin.Overview');KL(`Printing')29Ö* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrint™h€o1áÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿøoÿÿÿÿ·File Information Dialog BoxJI(`>Main',`BeforeYouBegin.Overview');JI(`>Graphics',`Graphics.FileInfoDlg')HÖ·* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Information Dialog BoxœkoS1ÕÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿùSÿÿÿÿŒBrowser FindJI(`>Main',`Browser.ManagingThumbnails');JI(`>Graphics',` SelectingFiles.SearchingByFilename')9·Œ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBrowser Find1Sœ1Xÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿúÿÿÿÿœä'Œä$ €€˜€‚ÿ1œ 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿû V  AäV ' €4€° €‚ÿFile Format Preferences9  * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1V À 1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿüÀ ÿÿÿÿ Q*  ' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: File Format Preferences OverviewQ À b 1,ÿÿÿÿýb Ö Ñ File Format Preferences OverviewD Š * $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Format Preferences0b Ö , (€ €€†"€U‚ÿN#Š $ + &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿFile Format Preferences OverviewrOÖ – # €ž€€‚ÿYou can set preferences for the way Paint Shop Pro opens three file formats:œN$ S o ®€¢€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒçÛɛɀ‰€‚†"€ƒç ؛ɀ‰€‚†"€ƒçþ›É€‰€‚ÿPhoto-CD Format (PCD)RAW FormatMeta/Vector Format (WMF)~Z– Ñ $ €µ€€‚ÿTo access the File Format Preferences dialog box, choose Preferences from the File menu, and then choose File Format Preferences from the Preferences submenu. The options in the File Format Preferences dialog box are grouped under ten tabs. You access a tab by clicking on it. When you have finished setting preferences, click the OK button. 1S 1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿþÿÿÿÿCAÑ C' €4€° €‚ÿ TOPIC: PCD Preferences@ƒ1ž«.‚ÿƒ÷+CPCD PreferencesDCÇ* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Format Preferences0ƒ÷, (€ €€†"€V‚ÿ=Ç4+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPCD Preferencesk-÷«@> J€[€€æ ò6·€‰€æâCìø€‰€‚‚‚ÿKodak Photo-CD (PCD) files contain an image saved in multiple sizes. You select a default size; then, when you load a PCD image, Paint Shop P4«@Cro opens the image in this size. Set the default PCD size option in the PCD tab of the File Format Preferences page. To select a default PCD size: ê¥4•AE X€K€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1From the File Format Preferences submenu, click the PCD tab to bring it to the front if necessary.2Click one of the default image sizes.3Click OK. –o«@+C' €ß€€‚‚‚‚ÿIf you selected the "Ask when loading each file" option instead of a size, Paint Shop Pro opens the PCD Size dialog box each time you load a PCD file. If the image being opened is a protected Pro Photo-CD image, Paint Shop Pro displays an Enter Password dialog box. Enter the password or decryption key that was obtained from the image owner to open the image. 1•A\C1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ\CÿÿÿÿCA+CC' €4€° €‚ÿ TOPIC: RAW Preferences@\CÝC1Zø„ÝCQDzGRAW PreferencesDC!D* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Format Preferences0ÝCQD, (€ €€†"€W‚ÿ=!DŽD+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRAW PreferencesîQD¡E% €Ý€€‚‚ÿUse the RAW options dialog box to determine how Paint Shop Pro interprets RAW pixel data. For information about a RAW file’s format, refer to the documentation for the application that created the image. To set the RAW format options:Ù‘ŽDzGH ^€#€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€æÖßHˆ€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1From the File Format Preferences submenu, click the RAW tab to bring it to the front.2If you are familiar with RAW files, the RAW Options dialog box should be self-explanatory. If you are new to the format, please find and read information about RAW data in general and the file you are trying to open in particular. A discussion of RAW pixel data is beyond the scope of this manual. 1¡E«G1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ«GÿÿÿÿìGAzGìG' €4€° €‚ÿ TOPIC: WMF Preferences@«G,H1ý.‚ÿÿÿÿ,H HlNWMF PreferencesDìGpH* $€4€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Format Preferences0,H H, (€ €€†"€X‚ÿ=pHÝH+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿWMF Preferencesâ HóI4 6€Å€€ï¯íúª€‰€‚ÿWhen you open a file or clipboard image that is in a Windows metafile (WMF) or vector format, you need to select a size for the image using the Meta Picture Import dialog box. Paint Shop Pro will open the dialog box if:VýÝHIKY €€ÿ€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæÞÓ1€‰€æâCìø€‰€‚ÿYou are pasting metafile or vector data from the clipboard.You are opening a file and have previously selected the "Ask for size and options each time a file is opened" option in the WMF/Import tab tab of the File Preferences dialog box.W2óI K% €d€" œ€‚ÿSetting the Windows Metafile Import PreferencesM*IKíK# €T€€‚ÿTo set the metafile format preferences:@þ K-NB R€ý€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1From the File Format Preferences submenu, click the WMF/Import tab to bring it to the front.2Select whether you want Paint Shop Pro to prompt for size and options when opening a file or to use an available header. If you select to use the header, Paint Shop Pro will attempt to read the header information. If it is unable to, or if there is none, the program will use the default size.3If you have selected to use the header information, set a default size to use when no header is available.?íKlN/ .€ €Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ÿ4Click OK.1-NN1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿNÙNO<lNÙN' €*€° €‚ÿ Transparent Color9NO* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ÙNCO1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿCOÿÿÿÿ…OBO…O' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Transparent ColorU$COÚO1éÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÚO$€ӃTransparent ColorSaveMark(`SubWin')>…O$€* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€ÚO$€…O‚ÿTransparent Colorç¹ÚO ‚. *€u€€‚‡"€‚ÿWhen an image containing a transparent color is displayed, the transparent color is replaced with a color or colors selected by the host application. The selected color or pattern is usually the application's background fill. Paint Shop Pro does not utilize transparent colors. The transparent color feature is used by other applications. The transparent color will display as a normal color when the image is viewed in Paint Shop Pro. / $€:‚% €€" œ€‚ÿExampleó ‚Rƒ% €ç€€‚ÿConsider an image of a rose against a white background, with its transparent color set to white. When the image is displayed against a grey fill, the white will be replaced with the grey, so that the rose appears against a grey background. Z:‚¬ƒS#v€ë$Ø(€€Ôq€†"€Y‚ÿ"€€Ôq†"€Z‚ÿÿÿ'RƒӃ$ €€j€‚ÿ1¬ƒ„1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ„B„~„>ӃB„' €.€° €‚ÿTransparency Options<„~„* $€$€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Options1B„¯„1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¯„ÿÿÿÿþ„O(~„þ„' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Maintain Original Transparencyb1¯„`…1·ÿÿÿÿ0 `…ކd‡Maintain Original TransparencySaveMark(`SubWin')Bþ„¢…* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTransparency Options:V$`…ø…2 4€J€€‡"€J€€‚ÿMaintain Original Transparency<¢…ˆ†T x€|€ˆï©A×€‡"€K€‰‚ï©$€‡"€K€‰‚ÿDo Not Save TransparencySet to Background ColorVø…ކ; F€8€ˆïSÄ]F€‡"€K€‰‚ÿSet to Palette Entry†cˆ†d‡# €Æ€€‚ÿThe current transparency information is retained. The image's transparency will not be changed. 1ކ•‡1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ •‡ÿÿÿÿއI"d‡އ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Do Not Save Transparency\+•‡:ˆ1­A :ˆž‰4ŠDo Not Save TransparencySaveMark(`SubWin')Bއ|ˆ* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTransparency Options:^%:ˆڈ9 B€L€ï(ÉÎÛ€‡"€K€‰‚ÿMaintain Original Transparencyˆ;|ˆb‰M j€z€ˆ€‡"€J€€‚ï©$€‡"€K€‰‚ÿDo Not Save TransparencySet to Background ColorVڈž‰; F€8€ˆïSÄ]F€‡"€K€‰‚ÿSet to Palette Entry|Yb‰4Š# €²€€‚ÿThe current transparency information is deleted. The image will be displayed "as is". 1ž‰eŠ1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ eŠÿÿÿÿ­ŠH!4Š­Š' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Set to Background Color[*eŠ‹1¿0Q ‹‡ŒŽSet to Background ColorSaveMark(`SubWin')G­ŠO‹- *€4€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Transparency Options:^%‹­‹9 B€L€ï(ÉÎÛ€‡"€K€‰‚ÿMaintain Original Transparency„:O‹1ŒJ d€x€ˆï©A×€‡"€K€‰‚‡"€J€€‚ÿDo Not Save TransparencySet to Background ColorV­‹‡Œ; F€8€ˆïSÄ]F€‡"€K€‰‚ÿSet to Palette EntryŽZ1ŒŽ4 6€µ€€ïÁù§€‰€‚ÿThe transparent color is set to the first best-match index for the current background color. For example, consider the following situation: the selected background color is dark blue, and the only blues in the image's palette are two identical lighter shades. The image's transparent color will be set to the first of the palette's blues. 1‡ŒFŽ1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿFŽÿÿÿÿ‹ŽEŽ‹Ž' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Set to Palette EntryX'FŽãŽ11AÿÿÿÿãŽmÀmÁSet to Palette EntrySaveMark(`SubWin')B‹Ž%* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTransparency Options:^%㎃9 B€L€ï(ÉÎÛ€‡"€K€‰‚ÿMaintain Original Transparency<%ÀT x€|€ˆï©A×€‡"€K€‰‚ï©$€‡"€K€‰‚ÿDo Not Save TransparencySet to ƒÀ‹ŽBackground ColorNƒmÀ4 8€6€ˆ€‡"€J€€‚ÿSet to Palette EntryÐÀmÁ0 .€¡€€æüCހ‰€‚ÿThe transparent color is set to a specific palette index. The image's transparent color will change if the selected index differs from the current color's index. Use the spin control to set the index. 1mÀžÁ1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿžÁÄÁ&mÁÄÁ# €€€‚ÿ1žÁõÁ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿõÁ+ÂdÂ6ÄÁ+Â' €€° €‚ÿFile Formats9õÁdÂ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1+•Â1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ•ÂÿÿÿÿÛÂFdÂÛÂ' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: File Formats OverviewY(•Â4Ã1-ÿÿÿÿz‚4ÝÙÅFile Formats OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')9ÛÂmÃ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Formats04ÝÃ, (€ €€†"€[‚ÿCmÃàÃ+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿFile Formats Overviewb?ÃBÄ# €~€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro directly supports 46 different file formats: ©IàÃëÄ` €–€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïFÀ-€‰€‚†"€ƒï}\¿€‰€‚ÿ34 raster image formats 12 meta and vector image formats ®{BÄ™Å3 6€ö€€ïŸÂ‹)€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro can read other file formats if the appropriate external import filters are installed on your system. 1ëÄÊÅ1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÊÅÿÿÿÿÆE™ÅÆ' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Raster Image FormatsX'ÊÅgÆ1Š+W„gÆÐÆEÉRaster Image FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')9Æ Æ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Formats0gÆÐÆ, (€ €€†"€\‚ÿB ÆÇ+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRaster Image FormatswGÐƉÈ0 .€€€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿA raster format breaks an image into a grid of equally-sized pieces, called pixels, and records color information for each pixel. The number of colors that the file can contain is determined by the bits-per-pixel: the more information that is recorded for each pixel, the more shades and hues that the file can contain. ŒAÇEÉ{ ƀˆ€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïrwËS€‰€‚†"€ƒïø§Š€‰€‚†"€ƒïh|Œ*€‰€‚ÿColor DepthPlanar FormatsSupported Formats1‰ÈvÉ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿvÉÿÿÿÿÄÉN'EÉÄÉ' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Meta and Vector Image Formatsa0vÉ%Ê1;z‚Ň%ʎʘÎMeta and Vector Image FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')9ÄÉ^Ê* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Formats0%ÊŽÊ, (€ €€†"€]‚ÿK ^ÊÙÊ+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMeta and Vector Image FormatsÄŽÊÛÍ> J€‹€€ïFÀ-€‰€‚‡"€‚ÿMeta and vector image formats can both contain vector data. Vector data is a collection of geometric shapes that combine to make an image, recorded as mathematical formulas. Vector data cannot reproduce photo-realistic images, but for other types of images it has two advantages over raster data: it is scaleable without distortion (the "jaggies" that come with re-sizing a bitmap), and it produces smaller files. Paint Shop Pro can read vector data, but it cannot write vector data. When you view a vector image from Paint Shop Pro, what you are seeing is a raster image based on the vector data. Paint Shop Pro can write to some metafile formats, but the resulting files contain raster data only. œBÙʘÎ{ ƀŠ€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïŸœ€‰€‚†"€ƒïªNׇ€‰€‚†"€ƒï¥æP’€‰€‚ÿMeta FormatsVector FormatsSupported Formats1ÛÍÉÎ1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÉÎÿÿÿÿ ÏW0˜Î Ï' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Other Formats: External Import Filtersj9ÉΊÏ1€W„ÿÿÿÿŠÏ D Other Formats: External Import FiltersSaveMark(`SubWin')9 ÏÃÏ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Formats0ŠÏ , (€ €€†"€^‚ÿÃÏ ÏT)ÃÏ` + &€R€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOther Formats: External Import Filtersä£ D A P€G€€ï£Ò^Ï€‰€€€‚€€‚ÿIn addition to the file formats that it supports directly, Paint Shop Pro can read other image file formats if the appropriate external import filters are installed on your system. Most major software applications, such as Microsoft Word®, install external import filters. In Paint Shop Pro's dialog boxes, the file types that are supported via external import filters have "EXT:" after the file extension. 1` u 1fÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿu ³ è >D ³ ' €.€° €‚ÿRaster Image Formats5 u è * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:1³  1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿU <è U ' €*€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color DepthO € 1|ÿÿÿÿø€  ` Color DepthSaveMark(`SubWin')AU å * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿRaster Image Formats0€  , (€ €€†"€_‚ÿ9å N + &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor Depth; ‰ $ €/€€‚ÿMost raster formats support more than one level of bits-per-pixel, and therefore more than one level of color. The following table lists all of the bits-per-pixel ratios in the raster formats that Paint Shop Pro supports, and shows the corresponding maximum number of colors. /N  R#t€^Þ& Y"€€Ôq2˜ŽŽ€€‚ÿ"€$€Ôq2˜ŽŽ€€‚ÿÿÿBits-Per-PixelMaximum Number of Colors `‰ j X#€€Þ& Y€€ q2˜ŽŽÿ€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ€‚ÿ€ €Ôq2ŒŽŽ‚ÿÿÿ12R  Œ I#b€Þ& Y€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ‚ÿÿÿ416 S j  I#b€Þ& Y€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ‚ÿÿÿ8256 t+Œ ƒ I#b€VÞ& Y€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ€‚ÿ€ €Ôq2ŒŽŽ‚ÿÿÿ1632,768 or 65,536 (depends on format)[ Þ I#b€$Þ& Y€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ€‚ÿ€ €Ôq2ŒŽŽ‚ÿÿÿ2416,777,216 [ƒ 9 I#b€$Þ& Y€€Ôq2ŒŽŽ€‚ÿ€ €Ôq2ŒŽŽ‚ÿÿÿ3216,777,216 'Þ ` $ €€j€‚ÿ19 ‘ 1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‘ ÿÿÿÿÐ ?` Ð ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Planar FormatsR!‘ " 1Hä" “ ª Planar FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')AÐ c * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿRaster Image Formats0" “ , (€ €€†"€`‚ÿ<c Ï + &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPlanar FormatsÛ€“ ª 7 <€I€€‚€€€€€€‚ÿMost raster formats record color information on pixel-by-pixel basis, but some formats use color planes. Each color plane contains all of the pixel information for a single color. Color planes are also called color channels. Formats that use color planes are called planar formats. The bits-per-pixel are determined by the bits-per-plane times the number of planes. If the resulting number is not a power of two (expressible as 2^x, where x is an integer), then the bits-per-pixel are "promoted" to the next- highest power of two. For example, if there are two bits-per-plane and three planes, the bits-per-pixel are promoted to eight: 2 x 3 = 6, and 2^2 < 6 < 2^3. 1Ï Û 1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÛ ÿÿÿÿ Bª  ' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Supported FormatsU$Û r 18øÿÿÿÿ r ã @ Supported FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')A ³ * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿRaster Image Formats0r ã , (€ €€†"€a‚ÿ?³ " + &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSupported Formats]/ã  . *€a€€‚‡"€‚ÿThe following table lists the raster image formats that are supported by Paint Shop Pro, the type of support that is provided (read, write, or both), and the format's bits-per-pixel levels. In order to view this table correctly, you must have the Wingdings True Type Font installed on your system. k'" @ D X€P€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÞú3 €‰€‚ÿSupported Raster Image Formats @  1 =@ 1fÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ!=@ „@ ¹@ G @ „@ ' €@€° €‚ÿMeta and Vector Image Formats5 =@ ¹@ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:1„@ ê@ 1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ"ê@ ÿÿÿÿ'A =¹@ 'A ' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Meta FormatsPê@ wA 1•ÿÿÿÿ“#wA ñA UC Meta FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')J 'A ÁA * $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMeta and Vector Image Formats0wA ñA , (€ €€†"€b‚ÿ:ÁA +B + &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMeta Formats*ñA UC $ € €€‚ÿMeta formats explicitly allow more than just vector data. For example, a typical Windows metafile might contain a bitmap, vector information, and text, with the bitmap constituting the majority of the image, and the vector and text data providing annotation. 1+B †C 1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ$†C ÿÿÿÿÅC ?UC ÅC ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Vector FormatsR!†C D 1rA€ł%D ‘D ÒE Vector FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')J ÅC aD * $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMeta and Vector Image Formats0D ‘D , (€ €€†"€c‚ÿ<aD ÍD + &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿVector Formatsá‘D ÒE $ €Ã€€‚ÿIn the strictest definition, a vector format can only contain vector information. In common practice, many formats that are considered to be vector allow the user to include non-vector data, such as raster images or text. 1ÍD F 1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ&F ÿÿÿÿEF BÒE EF ' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Supported FormatsU$F šF 1. “ÿÿÿÿ'šF G ‚ Supported FormatsSaveMark(`SubWin')J EF äF * $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿMeta and Vector Image Formats0šF G , (€ €€†"€d‚ÿ?äF SG + &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSupported FormatsÒG TH / ,€§€€‚‡"€‚‚ÿThe following table lists the ten meta and vector formats that are supported by Paint Shop Pro. In order to view this table correctly, you must have the Wingdings True Type Font installed on your system. ³'SG I Œ#è€N0Gµ!€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ$€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ€‚ÿ€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ‚ÿ€6€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ€8€Ôq6 ˆˆŽŽ‚ÿÿÿFormatSource/StandardOpen/SaveªTH ±I #ð€40Gµ!€€ q6 ˆˆŽŽÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€(€ q2ŒœŽÿ€*€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿCDRCorelDRAW!1Ž*I eJ Š#ä€T0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€H€ q2ŒœŽÿ€J€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿCGMComputer Graphics Metafile1£±I K ‡#ހ80Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€.€ q2ŒœŽÿ€0€ÔqŒ€‚ÿÿÿCMXCorel Clipart1©eJ ±K Š#ä€>0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€2€ q2ŒœŽÿ€4€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿDRWMicrografx Draw1¢K SL Š#ä€00Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€$€ q2ŒœŽÿ€&€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿDXFAutodesk1°)±K M ‡#ހR0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€F€ q2ŒœŽÿ€H€ÔqŒ€‚ÿÿÿEMFWindows Enhanced Metafile1<¥SL šM Š#ä€60Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€*€ q2ŒœŽÿ€,€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿGEMVentura/GEM1»1M cN Š#ä€b0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€V€ q2ŒœŽÿ€X€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿHGLHewlett-Packard Graphics Language1 šM O Š#ä€,0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€€ q2ŒœŽÿ€ €ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿPCTApple1<±'cN ŽO Š#ä€N0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€B€ q2ŒœŽÿ€D€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿPICLotus Development Corp.1µ+O u€ Š#ä€V0Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€ŽO u€ EF € qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€H€ q2ŒœŽÿ€J€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿWMFMicrosoft Windows Metafile1<ŠŽO  Š#ä€80Gµ!€€ qŒÿ€€ÔqŒ¬€‚ÿ€€ qŒ¬ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿ€*€ q2ŒœŽÿ€,€ÔqŒ€€‚ÿÿÿWPGWordPerfect1<'u€ B $ €€j€‚ÿP$ ’ , (€H€\Œb­€:€€ƒ‚ÿ1 Can open files of this formatuIB ‚ , (€’€\€b­€:€€ƒ‚ÿ< Can save files to this format, the files contain raster data only.1’ 8‚ 1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ(ÿÿÿÿ8‚ ^‚ &‚ ^‚ # €€€‚ÿ18‚ ‚ 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ)‚ ɂ ƒ :^‚ ɂ ' €&€° €‚ÿImage Processing9‚ ƒ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1ɂ 3ƒ 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ*3ƒ ÿÿÿÿ}ƒ J#ƒ }ƒ ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Image Processing Overview],3ƒ ڃ 1Óÿÿÿÿg+ڃ G„ é‡ Image Processing OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')=}ƒ „ * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Processing0ڃ G„ , (€ €€†"€e‚ÿG„ Ž„ + &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿImage Processing Overview–IG„ $… M j€’€€Ì AL(`Image Processing Features')€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides five groups of image processing features. DŽ„ h… % €>€" œ€‚ÿAvailability and Color Depth€6$… è† J b€m€€ï¯0ë€‰€ï’ãj±€‰€€€‚ÿWith the exception of the Image Arithmetic command and the Color Channel commands, Paint Shop Pro's image processing features require that images be grey scale or 24 bit. These features are not available for images with lower color depths. To apply a feature to an image with a lower color depth: Ÿh… é‡ b ’€?€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒï‹†(«€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒï«IŽ(€‰€‚ÿ1Increase its color depth to 24 bit or to grey scale. 2Apply the filter or deformation. 3Reduce the image to its original color depth. 1è† ˆ 1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ,ˆ ÿÿÿÿcˆ I"é‡ cˆ ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Image Arithmetic Command\+ˆ ¿ˆ 1”Ôq-¿ˆ ,‰ Š Image Arithmetic CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')=cˆ üˆ * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Processing0¿ˆ ,‰ , (€ €€†"€f‚ÿFüˆ r‰ + &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿImage Arithmetic Command·“,‰ )Š $ €'€€‚ÿThe Image Arithmetic command combines data from two images and produces a third image that is the product of the two source images' color data. f"r‰ Š D X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïrÚK €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions1)Š ÀŠ 1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ.ÀŠ ÿÿÿÿ‹ H!Š ‹ ' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color Channels Commands[*ÀŠ c‹ 1 g–€/c‹ Ћ ó Color Channels CommandsSaveMark(`SubWin')=‹  ‹ * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Processing0c‹ Ћ , (€ €€†"€g‚ÿE ‹ Œ + &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor Channels CommandsnKЋ ƒŒ # €–€€‚ÿUse the Color Channel commands to split and combine color channel data. @Œ Ì % €6€" œ€‚ÿSplitting Color ChannelsÕ¯ƒŒ ˜Ž & €_€€‚‚‚ÿSplitting an image’s color channels creates individual grey scale images that are based on its RGB, HSL, or CMYK channels. The names of the images will be the appropriate channels. For example, an HSL image will be split into three separate images with the names "Hue, " "Saturation, " and "Lightness." To split an active image, from the Colors menu, point to Channel Splitting, and choose RGB, HSL, or CMYK from the submenu. @Ì ؎ % €6€" œ€‚ÿCombining Color Channels:˜Ž  # €.€€‚ÿTo combine channels:ýµ؎  H ^€k€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæç«,2€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1From the Colors menu, choose Channel Combining, and then choose one of the three methods from the submenu. The RGB, HSL, or CMYK Combining dialog box opens.  ‹ 2Select the Source Images (the images containing the channels to be combined). You can use source images that were generated by splitting an image’s color channels, or you can select other images. If you generated the source images by splitting an image’s channels, selecting the "Sync" check box will automatically select the channel images that match the selected channel image. If the source images were not created by splitting an image’s channels, use the drop down boxes to select a source image for each channel. «y Æ 2 4€ò€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ3Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro creates an image by converting the grey scale images into color channel data.- ó * $€€PäVˆ,džØ€‚ÿ1Æ $à 1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ0$à ÿÿÿÿeà Aó eà ' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Effects Commands\+$à Áà 1Eq‚1Áà .Ä BÆ Special Effects CommandsSaveMark(`SubWin')=eà þà * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Processing0Áà .Ä , (€ €€†"€h‚ÿ>þà lÄ + &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEffects Commandsß».Ä KÅ $ €w€€‚ÿThe Effects commands add emphasis to an area or to an entire image. You choose the commands from the Effects submenu, which appears on the Image menu. There are four Effects commands: ÷blÄ BÆ • ú€Ì€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïq n€‰€‚†"€ƒï/ÒP瀉€‚†"€ƒï­?€‰€‚†"€ƒï{n€‰€‚ÿAdd Drop Shadow CommandCutout CommandChisel CommandButtonize Command1KÅ sÆ 1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ2sÆ ÿÿÿÿŒÆ I"BÆ ŒÆ ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Deformations and Filters\+sÆ Ç 1¯–€@…3Ç …Ç Ì Deformations and FiltersSaveMark(`SubWin')=ŒÆ UÇ * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Processing0Ç …Ç , (€ €€†"€i‚ÿFUÇ ËÇ + &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDeformations and Filters̓…Ç —È 9 @€'€ææ u‘€‰€æЅ:/€‰€‚ÿDeformations and filters alter an image or selection to achieve a particular effect. To apply a built-in deformation or filter, you can: ìvËÇ ƒÉ v Œ€ò€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïšÖœ€‰€‚†"€ƒï¢VÒ¥€‰€‚†"€ƒç{š]–€‰€‚ÿSelect it from the Image menuUse the Deformation or Filter BrowserUse the Free Deformation Tooll8—È ïÉ 4 8€p€€‚ïóŸRn€‰€‚ÿYou can also create and apply your own filters. 6ƒÉ %Ê % €"€" œ€‚ÿPlugin FiltersÞ”ïÉ Ì J b€-€€ïÌ[„K€‰€‚‚‡"€‚‚‡"€‚ÿIf you have successfully installed Adobe-compatible image processing filters, there will be a Plugins submenu at the bottom of the Image menu. You select a plugin filter from the submenu. The plugin filter may open a dialog box. For help using it, please consult the plugin's documentation or on-line help. Deformations and filters can be applied only to grey scale and 24-bit color images.1%Ê 4Ì 1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ44Ì ÿÿÿÿyÌ EÌ yÌ ' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: User Defined FiltersX'4Ì ÑÌ 1‚ÿÿÿÿ5ÑÌ >Í / User Defined FiltersSaveMark(`SubWin')=yÌ Í * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Processing0ÑÌ >Í , (€ €€†"€j‚ÿP%Í ŽÍ + &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUser Defined (Convolution) FiltersQ.>Í ßÍ # €\€€‚ÿYou can create and apply your own filters. >ŽÍ |Î _ Ž€€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïßf{n€‰€‚†"€ƒïJ‚êp €‰€‚ÿHow Filters WorkCreating a User Defined FilterF!ßÍ ÂÎ % €B€" œ€‚ÿApplying a User Defined Filtera|Î / Q p€!€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæcù1€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose User Defined Filters from the Image menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the User Defined Filters dialog box. 2Highlight the filter in the Filter Name list box. 3Click the Apply button. Paint Shop Pro will close the ÂÎ / yÌ dialog box and apply the filter. 1ÂÎ ` 1fÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ6` ÿÿÿÿ• 5/ • ' €€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Blur1` Æ 1Ùÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ7ÿÿÿÿÆ n -• ó * $€€TŒÙ€:‚e€‚ÿBÆ 5 ' €6€° €‚ÿImage Arithmetic Command9ó n * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More15 Ÿ 1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ8Ÿ ÿÿÿÿç H!n ç ' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Open the Imagesd3Ÿ K 1êÿÿÿÿø9K  I Step 1: Open the ImagesDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')Eç  * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic CommandEK Õ + &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Open the Imagest0 I D X€`€ÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€‚ÿOpen the images that you want to combine. 1Õ z 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ:z ÿÿÿÿØ ^7I Ø ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Choose Arithmetic From the Image Menu|Kz T 1û\Š;T ™ c Step 2: Select "Arithmetic" From the Image MenuEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')EØ ™ * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic Command[0T ô + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Choose Arithmetic From the Image Menuo@™ c / .€€€€æn ä€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the Image Arithmetic dialog box.1ô ” 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ<” ÿÿÿÿÞ J#c Þ ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Imagesf5” D 1høÁ=D ‰ À Step 3: Select the ImagesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')EÞ ‰ * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic CommandGD Ð + &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the ImagesðÀ‰ À 0 .€€€æ-/e‰€‰€‚ÿUse the drop down boxes labeled "Source image #1" and "Source image #2" to select the images that you want to combine. The size of the resulting image is determined by source image #1. 1Ð ñ 1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ>ñ ÿÿÿÿ< K$À < ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Commandg6ñ £ 1bŠ)?£ è  Step 4: Select the CommandEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E< è * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic CommandH£ 0 + &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the CommandŒ]è Œ / .€º€€ævÀŒë€‰€‚ÿClick a command in the Command group box. Command processing is performed as follows: q,0 - E X€Y€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ1A copy of source image #2 is resized to match source image #1. The resized copy is used in the command processing. It resides in temporary memory and is not displayed. 2The color data from the two images is combined on a pixel-by-pixel basis according to the formulas detailed below. N"Œ { , (€D€RM‚M€ƒ‚ÿFunctionNew Color Value Equalsž`-  > J€Á€RˆM‚M€ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚‚ÿAddImage 1 Value + Image 2 Value SubtractImage 1 Value - Image 2 Value MultiplyImage 1 Value x Image 2 Value DifferenceAbsolute Value of (Image 1 Value - Image 2 Value) LightestMaximum of (Image 1 Value, Image 2 Value)DarkestMinimum of (Image 1 Value, Image 2 Value)Average(Image 1 value + Image 2 Value) 2OrBinary OrAndBinary And1{ J 1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ@J ÿÿÿÿ– L% – ' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Select the Channelsh7J þ 1dÁ#€Aþ C _@ Step 5: Select the ChannelsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E– C * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic CommandIþ Œ + &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Select the Channels‡XC  / .€°€€æǯŒS€‰€‚ÿUse the Channel group box to select the color channels that you want to process. @ôŒ _@ L f€í€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæ„Û׀‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿSelect the All Channels check box to use all color channels in both images. The command will produce a 24-bit image. Select a specific channel for each _@ – image to produce a grey scale image. You select a color channel by clicking it. 1 @ 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿB@ ÿÿÿÿÚ@ J#_@ Ú@ ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Set the Modifiersf5@ @A 1))ŸƒC@A …A }G Step 6: Set the ModifiersEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')EÚ@ …A * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic CommandG@A ÌA + &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Set the ModifiersŠw…A rB / .€î€€æ ‰š•€‰€‚ÿThe modifiers are applied to the color values produced by the command formula and the color channel selections. / ÌA ¡B % €€" œ€‚ÿDivisorÕrB ŠC 0 .€«€€æüCހ‰€‚ÿThe color value produced by the command formula and the color channel selections is divided by the value selected in the Divisor Spin Control. This allows you to reduce the effects of the other selections. ,¡B ÒC % €€" œ€‚ÿBiasÿÏŠC ÑD 0 .€Ÿ€€æüCހ‰€‚ÿYou use the bias to shift each color value by a fixed amount. The value selected in the Bias Spin Control is added to the color value produced by the command formula, channel, and divisor selections. 9ÒC E % €(€" œ€‚ÿClip Color ValuesºŠÑD ÄE 0 .€€€æ„Û׀‰€‚ÿThe Clip Color Values check box determines how Paint Shop Pro handles final color values that are greater than 255 or less than 0. “ E WF w#Ÿ€8e‚€€ qVˆˆœŽÿ$€€ÔqVˆˆœŽ€‚ÿ€€ÔqVˆˆœŽ‚ÿ€$€ÔqVˆˆœŽ‚ÿÿÿSettingX < 0X > 255 „ÄE ÛF n#¬€,e‚€€ qVˆˆœŽÿ€€Ôq2ˆœœ€‚ÿ€ €Ôq2ˆœœ‚ÿ€€Ôq2ˆœœ‚ÿÿÿOnX = 0X = 255{ WF VG [#†€@e‚€€Ôq2ˆœœ€‚ÿ€ €Ôq2ˆœœ‚ÿ€&€Ôq2ˆœœ‚ÿÿÿOffX = 256 + XX = X - 256'ÛF }G $ €€j€‚ÿ1VG ®G 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿD®G ÿÿÿÿûG M&}G ûG ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 7: Select the OK Buttoni8®G dH 1#€ÿÿÿÿEdH ©H I Step 7: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')EûG ©H * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Arithmetic CommandIdH òH + &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 7: Click the OK Button›x©H I # €ð€€‚ÿClick the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and create the new image from the combined color data. 1òH ŸI 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿFŸI J 9J BI J ' €6€° €‚ÿCombining Color Channels9ŸI 9J * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1J jJ 1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿGjJ ÿÿÿÿ¹J O(9J ¹J ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Open the Source Imagesk:jJ $K 1Eÿÿÿÿ©…H$K iK }L Step 1: Open the Source ImagesDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E¹J iK * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCombining Color ChannelsL!$K µK + &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Open the Source ImagesȔiK }L 4 6€)€€ï’ãj±€‰€‚ÿOpen the grey scale images that you want to use as source data. The source images are often generated by splitting an image's color channels.1µK ®L 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿI®L ÿÿÿÿ M ^7}L M ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Open the Channel Combining Dialog BoxzI®L †M 1i¢„³†J†M ËM O Step 2: Open the Channel Combining Dialog BoxEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E M ËM * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCombining Color Channels[0†M &N + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Open the Channel Combining Dialog BoxݕËM O H ^€+€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæç«,2€‰€‚ÿ1Choose Channels from the Image menu. 2Choose Combining from the submenu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Channel Combining dialog box. 1&N 4O 1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿK4O ÿÿÿÿ…O Q*O …O ' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Source Imagesm<4O € 1¿©…ÇL € Q€ ߃ Step 3: Select the Source ImagesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')…O € …O E…O Q€ * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCombining Color ChannelsN# € Ÿ€ + &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the Source ImagesœyQ€ ; # €ò€€‚ÿYou can use source images that were generated by splitting an image's color channels, or you can select other images. BŸ€ } % €:€" œ€‚ÿUsing Split Color Channels[; ؂ @ N€7€€ï’ãj±€‰€æ„Û׀‰€‚ÿTo use source images generated by splitting an image's color channels, select the check box labeled "Sync blue and green to red if possible." Paint Shop Pro will automatically select the green and blue color channel images that match the selected red color channel image. :} ƒ % €*€" œ€‚ÿUsing Other Images͝؂ ߃ 0 .€;€€æ-/e‰€‰€‚ÿIf the source images were not created by splitting an image's color channels, then use the drop down boxes to select a source image for each channel. 1ƒ „ 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿM„ ÿÿÿÿ]„ M&߃ ]„ ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the OK Buttoni8„ Ƅ 1³†ÿÿÿÿNƄ … ð… Step 4: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')E]„ … * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCombining Color ChannelsIƄ T… + &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Click the OK Buttonœy … ð… # €ò€€‚ÿClick the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will create an image by converting the grey scale images into color channel data. 1T… !† 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿO!† [† ”† :ð… [† ' €&€° €‚ÿEffects Commands9!† ”† * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1[† ņ 1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿPņ ÿÿÿÿ ‡ H!”† ‡ ' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Add Drop Shadow Command[*ņ h‡ 1àÿÿÿÿD Qh‡ Շ „Ž Add Drop Shadow CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')= ‡ ¥‡ * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEffects Commands0h‡ Շ , (€ €€†"€k‚ÿE¥‡ ˆ + &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAdd Drop Shadow CommandjՇ §ˆ # €Ô€€‚ÿThe Add Drop Shadow command adds a shadow effect behind the current selection. To create a Drop Shadow:5ψ ܊ f š€Ÿ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒçpz쀉€‚€ƒ€ƒæU•a€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the area or item to which you are adding a drop shadow.2To create a shadow in the foreground or background color, pick the desired color.3In the Image menu, choose Effects, and then choose Drop Shadow from the submenu. The Drop Shadow dialog box opens.4The preview on the right updates as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag the image to bring other areas of it into view.졧ˆ ȍ K d€C€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ5In the Attributes panel, choose a shadow color from the Color box. 6Drag the Opacity to select the shadow’s opacity. As the opacity decreases, the drop shadow fades.7Drag the Blur slider to set the blur of the shadow. As the blur level increases, the appearance of the shadow softens.8In the Offset panel, drag the Vertical and Horizontal Offset sliders to control the alignment of the drop shadow. Move the Vertical slider to the right to move the shadow toward the bottom of the image and to the left to move it toward the top. Move the Horizontal slider to the right to move the shadow toward the right and to the left to move it toward the left. `܊ WŽ / .€À€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ÿ9Click OK. The dialog box closes and the Drop Shadow appears behind the item or selection.-ȍ „Ž * $€€PäVˆ,džØ€‚ÿ1WŽ µŽ 1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿRµŽ ÿÿÿÿõŽ @„Ž õŽ ' €2€° €‚ÿ TOPIC: Cutout CommandR!µŽ G 1y Œò‡SG Ž :É Cutout CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')=õŽ „ * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEffects Commands0G Ž , (€ €€†"€l‚ÿ<„ À + &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCutout CommandŽ À õŽ ,Ž 8Á $ €€€‚ÿThe Cutout effect creates the illusion that part of the image has been removed, allowing you to see through the image to a lower level. You can apply this effect only to a layer that contains a selection or is not a background layer. To apply the Cutout effect:j À ¢Ã c ”€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒçpz쀉€‚€ƒ€ƒæ&€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Use a selection tool to select the area or item to which you are applying the Cutout effect.2To color the interior or the shadow with the foreground or background color, select the desired color.3In the Image menu, choose Effects, and then choose Cutout from the submenu. The Cutout dialog box. opens.4Use the preview on the right to view the cutout as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification. Drag the image to bring other areas of it into view."×8Á ÄÅ K d€¯€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ5To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.6In the Attributes panel, select the "Fill the interior with color" check box to replace the contents of the cutout area with a solid color.7If you selected the check box in the previous step, choose an interior color from the Interior color drop-down box.8Choose a shadow color from the Shadow color box. Your color choices are the same as for the interior.¡\¢Ã eÈ E X€¹€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ9Set the opacity of the shadow by dragging the Opacity slider.10Set the blur of the shadow by dragging the Blur slider. As you increase the Blur level, the shadow widens and its edges soften.11The Vertical and Horizontal Offset sliders control the alignment of the interior and outline by moving the interior. Move the Vertical slider to the right to move the interior toward the bottom of the image and to the left to move the interior toward the top. Move the Horizontal slider to the right to move the interior toward the right and to the left to move the interior toward the left. ՘ÄÅ :É = H€1€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚‚ÿ12If you have not selected "Auto Proof," click the Proof button to view the changes on the original image.13Click OK to apply the settings.1eÈ kÉ 1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿTÿÿÿÿkÉ ­É B:É ­É * $€0€Pä:„O€d€‚ÿTOPIC: Chisel CommandR!kÉ ÿÉ 1\D UÿÉ lÊ —Ï Chisel CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')=­É <Ê * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEffects Commands0ÿÉ lÊ , (€ €€†"€m‚ÿ<<Ê šÊ + &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿChisel Command€€lÊ LÌ $ €€€‚ÿThe Chisel effect adds a three-dimensional border around a selection or layer to make it appear as though it were cut out of stone. The layer must contain a selection or transparency to create the Chisel effect from it. The chiseled area can either be transparent, allowing the underlying colors to show through, or be created from the background color. To apply the Chisel effect:!ŸšÊ mÎ c ”€}€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒçpz쀉€‚ƒ€€ƒæ–ÒC€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the area or item to which you are applying the Chisel effect.2If you want to use a background color, select the desired color3In the Image menu, choose Effects, and then choose Chisel from the submenu. The Chisel dialog box opens.4Use the Preview to view the image as you adjust the settings. Click the "+" and "-" buttons to change the magnification, and drag the image to bring other areas of it into view.*äLÌ —Ï F Z€É€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚‚ÿ5Set the size of the chiseled area by dragging the Size slider or typing a pixel value in the Size box. 6Select the Transparent or Background Color option for the chiseled area.7Click OK to apply the settings. 1mÎ ÈÏ 1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿVÈÏ ÿÿÿÿ B—Ï  ' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: ButtonizeÈÏ  —Ï CommandU$ÈÏ k 1€ò‡ÿÿÿÿWk Ø K Buttonize CommandSaveMark(`SubWin')= š * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEffects Commands0k Ø , (€ €€†"€n‚ÿ?š  + &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿButtonize Command åØ  $ €Ë€€‚ÿAdd interest to your Web page by creating square or rectangular buttons from any image or selection. The Buttonize command applies a three dimensional border that makes the image or selection appear raised. To create a button:%Á E d –€ƒ€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒïÁù§€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ¿&a€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Select a background color to create a button with colored edges.2From the Image menu, choose Effects, and then choose Buttonize. The Buttonize dialog box opens.3Use the Preview to view the button as you configure it. To update the original image as you change the settings, select the "Auto Proof" check box.4Select the solid colored or transparent edges option. Paint Shop Pro uses the background color for solid edges.®  K X ~€]€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚‚ÿ5Select a height in pixels for the button’s top and bottom edges using the Height slider.6Select a width in pixels for the button’s left and right edges using the Width slider. 7Set the opacity of the edges. Dragging the slider to the right increases the opacity. 8If you did not select the "Auto Proof" check box, click the Proof button to see the effect on the image.9Click OK to apply the settings. 1E | 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿX| Ç  K$K Ç ' €H€° €‚ÿApplying Deformations and Filters9|  * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1Ç 1 1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿY1 ÿÿÿÿu D u ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: From the Image MenuW&1 Ì 1¬ÿÿÿÿ7ZÌ J Å From the Image MenuSaveMark(`SubWin')N$u  * $€H€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿApplying Deformations and Filters0Ì J , (€ €€†"€o‚ÿA ‹ + &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿFrom the Image Menu:J Å 5 8€ €€‚ï?‚䀉€‚ÿThe Image menu contains Paint Shop Pro's built-in filters and a submenu that lists the Deformations: The deformation or filter that you select may open a dialog box. These dialog boxes that are similar to the ones used by the Color Adjustment commands. 1‹ ö 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ[ö ÿÿÿÿ@ J#Å @ ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Effects Browser],ö  1Ðÿÿÿÿ\  @ Using the Effects BrowserSaveMark(`SubWin')N$@ ë * $€H€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿApplying Deformations and Filters0  , (€ €€†"€p‚ÿW,ë r + &€X€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Deformation and Filter BrowsersÖZ H | ƀµ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒænÐÅ€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1To modify part of the image, select it now. To modify the entire image, make sure that there is no selection. Choose Select None from the Selections menu. 2The Image menu contains the Deformation Browser and the Filter Browser. Choose the appropriate selection from the Image menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the relevant dialog box. 3Click a filter or deformation in the list box on the left. Paint Shop Pro will preview the effect in the Sample Preview Box on the right. The preview will show the effect as applied to the entire image, even if the image contains a selection. ]r × 2 4€º€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4Click the Apply button. Paint Shop Pro will close the Browser dialog box and either: ÄH @ Q p€€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒï?‚䀉€‚ÿApply the deformation or filter to the image or selection. Open the deformation or filter's dialog box. The dialog boxes are similar to the ones used by the Color Adjustment commands. × @ @ 1× =@ 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ]=@ w@ °@ : @ w@ ' €&€° €‚ÿHow Filters Work9=@ °@ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1w@ á@ 1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ^á@ ÿÿÿÿ"A A°@ "A ' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: How Filters WorkT#á@ vA 1Åÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ_vA ³A GF How Filters WorkSaveMark(`SubWin')="A ³A * $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿHow Filters Workg)vA D > J€S€€æÇÜT€‰€æè$º€‰€‚‚‚ÿA filter alters each pixel's color based on its current color and the colors of any neighboring pixels. The heart of a filter is an array of coefficients called a filter matrix. A filter processes an image pixel-by-pixel: each pixel's color value is multiplied by the coefficient in the matrix center, and any pixels within the matrix are multiplied by the corresponding coefficients. The sum of the products becomes the target pixel's new value. The new value is saved in a separate bitmap so that it does not affect the remaining pixels. J'³A dD # €N€€‚ÿThe formula for this calculation is:1D •D - *€ € º€†"€q‚ÿ±|dD FE 5 :€ø€€€€€€€€‚ÿWhere F is the filtered value of the target pixel, P is a pixel in the grid, and C is a coefficient in the matrix. a•D §E E Z€:€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÌï €‰€‚ÿCalculation Example5FE ÜE $ €"€ €‚ÿRelated Topicsk'§E GF D X€P€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïJ‚êp €‰€‚ÿCreating a User Defined Filter1ÜE xF 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ`xF ÀF ùF H!GF ÀF ' €B€° €‚ÿCreating a User Defined Filter9xF ùF * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ÀF *G 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿa*G ÿÿÿÿˆG ^7ùF ˆG ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Open the Define New Filter Dialog BoxzI*G H 1¶ÿÿÿÿ+…bH MH ÒI Step 1: Open the Define New Filter Dialog BoxDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')K!ˆG MH * $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a User Defined Filter[0H šH + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Open the Define New Filter Dialog Box*ÖMH ÒI T v€­€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæcù1€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÉÔf€‰€‚ÿ1Choose User Defined Filters from the Image menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the User Defined Filters dialog box. 2Click the New button. Paint Shop Pro will open the Define New Filter dialog box. 1šH J 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿcJ ÿÿÿÿQJ N'ÒI QJ ' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Enter the Filter Namej9J »J 19݃ò…d»J K L Step 2: Enter the Filter NameEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')K!QJ K * $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a User Defined FilterK »J QK + &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Enter the Filter Name`=K ±K # €z€€‚ÿType the new filter's name into the Filter Name text box. ]QK L E Z€2€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïHÇŒ€‰€‚ÿExample Filters1±K ?L 1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿe?L ÿÿÿÿ–L W0L –L ' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Enter the Filter Matrix ValuessB?L M 1é+…a‡f M TM O Step 3: Enter the Filter Matrix ValuesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')K!–L TM * $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a User Defined FilterT) M šM + &€R€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Enter the Filter Matrix ValuesãTM ¯N $ €Ç€€‚ÿEnter the filter matrix values into the table in the center of the dialog box. Non-integers will be truncated (chopped off at the decimal place). See the next step for help achieving the same effect as decimal coefficients. ]šM O E Z€2€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïHÇŒ€‰€‚ÿExample Filters1¯N =O 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿg=O ÿÿÿÿO P) O O ' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Set the Division Factorl;=O € 10ò…Ðh € W€ V† Step 4: Set the Division FactorEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')O € O K!O W€ * $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a User Defined FilterM" € €€ + &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Set the Division Factoro?W€ ‚ 0 .€€€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿYou can think of the division factor as the coefficient denominator: each coefficient in the filter matrix is divided by the division factor before being applied to a pixel. In actuality, the division factor is applied to the product of the matrix calculation. The division factor changes the filter formula to: 1€€ D‚ - *€ € º€†"€r‚ÿÛž‚ „ = H€=€€€€€€€€€€‚‚ÿWhere F is the filtered value of the target pixel, P is a pixel in the grid, C is a coefficient in the matrix, and D is the division factor. The division factor allows you to achieve effects that would otherwise require decimal coefficients. The advantage of requiring non-decimal coefficients is execution speed: Paint Shop Pro can accelerate the filtering process by perform the math using integers. YD‚ Œ„ D X€Ž€P¬Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïHÇŒ€‰€‚ÿIf you're using one of the example filters, leave the division factor set to 1. A„ ý„ % €8€" œ€‚ÿUsing the Division FactorYŒ„ V† B R€/€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Raise the decimal coefficients to integers by multiplying them by the division factor (typically 10, 100, or 1000). 2Enter the "integer-ized" coefficients in the matrix. 3Enter the division factor in the Division Factor Text Box. Non-integers will be truncated. 1ý„ ‡† 1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿi‡† ÿÿÿÿ̆ EV† ̆ ' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Set the Biasa0‡† -‡ 1Ÿa‡ j-‡ x‡ æ‹ Step 5: Set the BiasEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')K!̆ x‡ * $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a User Defined FilterB-‡ º‡ + &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Set the BiasQx‡ ‰ < F€+€€æÇÜT€‰€æŽc.ð€‰€‚ÿThe bias is added to the product of the matrix calculation and the division factor. You use the bias to shift the value of each pixel by a fixed amount. Bias adjustments are particularly useful for creating embossing effects. The bias changes the filter formula to: 1º‡ <‰ - *€ € º€†"€s‚ÿë© ‰ 'Š B R€S€€€€€€€€€€€€‚ÿWhere F is the filtered value of the target pixel, P is a pixel in the grid, C is a coefficient in the matrix, D is the division factor, and B is the bias. ’N<‰ ¹Š D X€ž€P¬Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïHÇŒ€‰€‚ÿIf you're using one of the example filters, leave the bias set to 0. 6'Š ïŠ % €"€" œ€‚ÿUsing the Bias÷¶¹Š æ‹ A P€q€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿNon-integers will be truncated. Integers outside of the range of 0 to 255 will be converted to fall within the range. For example, 256 becomes 0, and -1 is converted to 255. 1ïŠ Œ 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿkŒ ÿÿÿÿdŒ M&æ‹ dŒ ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the OK Buttoni8Œ ͌ 1GÐÿÿÿÿl͌  . Step 6: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')K!dŒ  * $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a User Defined FilterI͌ a + &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Click the OK Button֍ gŽ 0 .€­€€æcù1€‰€‚ÿWhen you've finished entering the filter's settings, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will save the filter and return to the User Defined Filters dialog box. To apply your new filter to the active image: Nja . < F€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click it in the Filter Name list box. 2Click the Apply button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and apply the filter. 1gŽ _ 1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿmÿÿÿÿ_ … &. … # €€€‚ÿ1_ ¶ 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿn¶ À EÀ >… À ' €.€° €‚ÿManaging Image Files¶ À … 9¶ EÀ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1 À vÀ 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿovÀ ÿÿÿÿÄÀ N'EÀ ÄÀ ' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Managing Image Files Overviewa0vÀ %Á 1öÿÿÿÿˁp%Á –Á [Ä Managing Image Files OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')AÄÀ fÁ * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0%Á –Á , (€ €€†"€t‚ÿK fÁ áÁ + &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿManaging Image Files OverviewwT–Á X # €š€€‚ÿYou can use Paint Shop Pro to perform the following image file management tasks: åáÁ [Ä  ‚Ý€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï4¿1q€‰€‚†"€ƒïïP!³€‰€‚†"€ƒïŒøC€‰€‚†"€ƒïèH”G€‰€‚†"€ƒïÚ,A!€‰€‚†"€ƒïë¹€‰€‚†"€ƒïn3ƪ€‰€‚†"€ƒï^r0€‰€‚†"€ƒïPþèT€‰€‚ÿSaving a FileReverting to the Saved FileClosing FilesCopying FilesConverting FilesPrinting a FileViewing Image InformationDeleting a FileSending a File Using Email 1X ŒÄ 1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿqŒÄ ÿÿÿÿÊÄ >[Ä ÊÄ ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Saving a FileQ ŒÄ Å 1E6€0„rÅ ŒÅ  È Saving a FileSaveMark(`SubWin')AÊÄ \Å * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0Å ŒÅ , (€ €€†"€u‚ÿ;\Å ÇÅ + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSaving a FileX5ŒÅ Æ # €j€€‚ÿTo save the changes to the active image, you can: ²ZÇÅ ÑÆ X €€ž€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ@E €‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚‚ÿSelect Save from the File menu. Click on the Save button in the Toolbar. Ï‚Æ  È M h€€€æñb׀‰€‚†"€ƒïª šl €‰€‚‚‚ÿIf you are saving a new file, Paint Shop Pro opens the Save As dialog box. Step-by-Step InstructionsIf you are saving an image using the Save Copy As command, Paint Shop Pro opens the Save Copy As dialog box, which is essentially the same as the Save As dialog box. With the Save Copy As command, you copy and save a version of the file without affecting the original. 1ÑÆ ÑÈ 1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿsÑÈ ÿÿÿÿÉ L% È É ' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Reverting to the Saved File_.ÑÈ |É 1ˁŸ…t|É íÉ ÂË Reverting to the Saved FileSaveMark(`SubWin')AÉ œÉ * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0|É íÉ , (€ €€†"€v‚ÿIœÉ 6Ê + &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿReverting to the Saved FileǗíÉ ýÊ 0 .€/€€æ+‘3€‰€‚ÿTo abandon all changes made to a file since it was last saved, select Revert from the File menu. You will be prompted to confirm your decision. Ņ6Ê ÂË @ N€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo abandon all of your changes and revert to the saved file, click the Yes button.To keep your changes, click the No button. 1ýÊ óË 1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿuóË ÿÿÿÿ1Ì >ÂË 1Ì ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Closing FilesQ óË ‚Ì 1Õ0„v‚Ì óÌ ƒ Closing FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')A1Ì ÃÌ * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0‚Ì óÌ , (€ €€†"€w‚ÿ;ÃÌ .Í + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿClosing FileskHóÌ ™Í # €€€‚ÿYou can close a single file, or you can close all of the open files. =.Í ÖÍ % €0€" œ€‚ÿClosing a Single FileFå™Í Ï a €Ë€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒïN1õ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæRf¶³€‰€æÀ.-Ȁ‰€‚ÿ1Select the file's image window. 2Select Close from the File menu, or click the image window's Close button. If you have edited the file and haven't saved it, you will be prompted to confirm your decision. 9ÖÍ UÏ % €(€" œ€‚ÿClosing All Files"âÏ ƒ @ N€Å€€ïҠ€æqí%„€‰€‚ÿTo close all open files, select Close All from the Window menu. The Window Close All option determinesUÏ ƒ 1Ì whether you will be prompted to save any new or edited files. Paint Shop Pro will also close the Browser Window.1UÏ Ž 1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿwŽ ÿÿÿÿò >ƒ ò ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Copying FilesQ Ž C 1ퟅæxC Ž p Copying FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')Aò „ * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0C Ž , (€ €€†"€x‚ÿ;„ ï + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCopying FilesM*Ž < # €T€€‚ÿThere are several ways to copy a file: Šï Æ „ ր€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæñb׀‰€ïª šl €‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒïžïYπ‰€æñb׀‰€‚ÿChoose Save As from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Save As dialog box. Use the dialog box to save the image under a new filename and/or format.Choose Save Copy As from the File menu to copy and save a version of the file without affecting the original.You can copy an image to a new image window. It will appear in the new window as a Paint Shop Pro image. If you want to change the format, choose Save As from the File menu and change the file type in the Save As dialog box.ªU< p U z€¬€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïIv¯ €‰€ï‚òß׀‰€‚ÿYou can use the Browser to copy one or more files to a different folder.1Æ ¡ 1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿy¡ ÿÿÿÿâ Ap â ' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Converting FilesT#¡ 6 1É]z6 § ? Converting FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')Aâ w * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files06 § , (€ €€†"€y‚ÿ>w å + &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿConverting FilesdA§ I # €‚€€‚ÿThere are two ways to convert files to different file formats:E å Ž % €@€" œ€‚ÿUsing the Save As Dialog Box PI  / .€ €€æñb׀‰€‚ÿYou can use the Save As dialog box to save a file in a different format. UùŽ b \ †€ó€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒïª šl €‰€‚ƒ€€ƒï †27 €‰€‚ÿ1Select Save As from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Save As dialog box. 2When you get to Step 2, select the new format. Paint Shop Pro will change the image you're editing to match the selected format's color depth. J%  ¬ % €J€" œ€‚ÿUsing the Batch Conversion Utility“`b ? 3 6€À€€ïæNU÷ €‰€‚ÿYou can use the Batch Conversion Utility to convert a group of files to a single format. 1¬ p 1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ{p ÿÿÿÿ° @? ° ' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Printing a FileS"p  1æ=| t  Printing a FileSaveMark(`SubWin')A° D * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0 t , (€ €€†"€z‚ÿ=D ± + &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPrinting a File«lt \ ? N€Ø€€æ_óò€‰€ïI;«`€‰€‚ÿYou print the active image from the Print dialog box. You can preview a file before printing it. f"±  D X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÖV¯ €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions1\ ó 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ}ó ÿÿÿÿ= J# = ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Viewing Image Information],ó š 1']‚~š  ‘B Viewing Image InformationSaveMark(`SubWin')A= Û * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0š  , (€ €€†"€{‚ÿGÛ R + &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿViewing Image Information`  ² L f€)€€ï/‹Òœ€‰€æMïр‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿTo view information of the image file while the image is open and active, open the Current Image Information dialog box by choosing Image Information from the View menu or clicking the Image Information button on the toolbar. The dialog box contains two tabs: IR @ . ,€6€" œæãËïр‰€‚ÿImage Information Tab² @ = É¥² Õ@ $ €K€€‚ÿThis tab contains the file’s name and type of format, its dimensions and bit depth, selection, layer, and channel information, and a breakdown of the memory used.( @ ý@ % €€‘€€‚ÿKÕ@ HA . ,€:€" œæöÙö€‰€‚ÿCreator Information TabI$ý@ ‘B % €I€€‚‚ÿUnlike most file formats, the .psp format lets you save information about the image. You can type a title, the creator’s name, copyright information, and any comments in the Creator Information tab. Click OK to close the dialog box. This information is not saved until you save the image.1HA ÂB 1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÂB ÿÿÿÿC @‘B C ' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Deleting a FileS"ÂB UC 1=.ƒ€UC ÆC ŠE Deleting a FileSaveMark(`SubWin')AC –C * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0UC ÆC , (€ €€†"€|‚ÿ=–C D + &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDeleting a File?ÆC BD # €8€€‚ÿTo delete an image file: dâD ŠE ‚ ҀÅ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ïN1õ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ’ãG_€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Open or select the file. 2Choose Delete from the File menu. You will be prompted to confirm your decision. 3To delete the file, click the Yes button. To leave the file intact, click the No button. R!BD øE 10‚ÿÿÿÿøE iF hH Sending a FileSaveMark(`SubWin')AŠE 9F * $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿManaging Image Files0øE iF , (€ €€†"€}‚ÿJ9F ³F + &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSending an Image Using Emailµ‘iF hH $ €#€€‚ÿIf you have an email application on your computer, you can use the Send command in the File menu. When you choose Send, Paint Shop Pro 5 pastes a copy of the active image in a new email message. The image will be in its original format unless it cannot be sent that way; in that case, the image will be sent in the ".psp" format. An image from the clipboard will also be sent in the ".psp" format.1³F ™H 1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‚™H ÕH I <hH ÕH ' €*€° €‚ÿSave As Dialog Box:™H I * $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1ÕH @I 1Œÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿƒ@I ÿÿÿÿ›I [4I ›I ' €h€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select or Create the File's FolderwF@I J 1ïÿÿÿÿú†„J [J M Step 1: Select or Create the File's FolderDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')I›I [J * $€>€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Save As Dialog BoxX-J ³J + &€Z€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select or Create the File's Folder:[J íJ % €*€" œ€‚ÿSelecting a FolderX5³J EK # €j€€‚ÿYou select a folder using the following controls: ËPíJ L { ƀŠ€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï‘OŽ3€‰€‚†"€ƒïÇAÛ€‰€‚†"€ƒï|z8‘€‰€‚ÿSave In Drop Down BoxUp One Level ButtonContents List Box9EK IL % €(€" œ€‚ÿCreating a FolderЄL M L f€ €PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒïy–ì³€‰€‚ÿ1Select the folder that will contain the new folder. See the section above. 2Click on the Create New Folder Button. 1IL JM 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ…JM ÿÿÿÿ—M M&M —M ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the File Typei8JM N 1õS…*†N IN € Step 2: Select the File TypeEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')I—M IN * $€>€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Save As Dialog BoxJN “N + &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the File TypeqBIN O / .€„€€æý°K€‰€‚ÿYou select the file type from the File Type drop down box. ž“N € Q p€q€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚ÿ1Click on the drop down box to open it. 2Click on the file type that you want to select. If the file type isn't visible, use the scrollbar to move throughO € —M the list. 1O J€ 1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‡J€ ÿÿÿÿ›€ Q*€ ›€ ' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Set the File Preferencesm<J€  1Oú†ˆ Q oƒ Step 3: Set the File PreferencesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')I›€ Q * $€>€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Save As Dialog BoxV+ § + &€V€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Set the File Format Save OptionsŠ‚Q M‚ $ €€€‚ÿIf the file type that you selected in the previous step supports format options, then the Options button will become available."槁 oƒ < F€Í€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click on the Options button. Paint Shop Pro will open the Save Options dialog box. 2Use the dialog box to set the file format options. The settings that you select become the new defaults for the specified file type. 1M‚  ƒ 1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‰ ƒ ÿÿÿÿëƒ K$oƒ ëƒ ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Enter the Filenameg6 ƒ R„ 1³*6ŠR„ ›„ † Step 4: Enter the FilenameEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')Iëƒ ›„ * $€>€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Save As Dialog BoxHR„ ㄠ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Enter the FilenameĔ›„ §… 0 .€)€€æñb׀‰€‚ÿYou enter a name for the new file in the File Name text box. Don't worry about the file extension Paint Shop Pro will add it automatically. v>ㄠ† 8 @€|€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Double-click in the text box. 2Type the filename. 1§… N† 1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‹N† ÿÿÿÿ† O(† † ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Select the Save Buttonk:N† ‡ 1ƒÿÿÿÿŒ‡ Q‡ £‰ Step 5: Select the Save ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')I† Q‡ * $€>€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Save As Dialog BoxL!‡ ‡ + &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Select the Save Button^;Q‡ û‡ # €v€€‚ÿClick on the Save button. One of two things will happen:ߓ‡ ڈ L f€+€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæÚ,ü€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will save the image file and close the Save As dialog box. You will be asked if you want to overwrite an existing file. ɇû‡ £‰ B R€€RŒÙ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick on the Yes button to overwrite it. Click on the No button to leave the file intact and return to the Save As dialog box. 1ڈ ԉ 1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿԉ Š PŠ B£‰ Š ' €6€° €‚ÿBatch Conversion Utility:ԉ PŠ * $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1Š Š 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŽŠ ÿÿÿÿàŠ _8PŠ àŠ ' €p€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Access the Batch Conversion Dialog Box{JŠ [‹ 1)ÿÿÿÿ#[‹  ‹ ˜Œ Step 1: Access the Batch Conversion Dialog BoxDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')EàŠ  ‹ * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion Utility\1[‹ ü‹ + &€b€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Access the Batch Conversion Dialog Boxœm ‹ ˜Œ / .€Ú€€ærOx€‰€‚ÿSelect Batch Conversion from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Batch Conversion dialog box. 1ü‹ Ɍ 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿɌ ÿÿÿÿ( _8˜Œ ( ' €p€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the Output File Format Settings{JɌ £ 1,2‘£ è ãŽ Step 2: Select the Output File Format SettingsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E( è * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion Utility\1£ DŽ + &€b€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the Output File Format SettingsŸ|è ãŽ # €ø€€‚ÿYou select the output file format settings from the Output Settings group box. Select the file type and options (if any).1DŽ  1Œÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ’ ÿÿÿÿo [4㎠o ' €h€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select or Create the Output FolderwF À 1%#ž“ À QÀ E Step 3: Select or Create the Output FolderEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')o À o Eo QÀ * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion UtilityX- À ©À + &€Z€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select or Create the Output Folderœ$QÀ E x Ÿ€I€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒï -9 €‰€‚ƒ€€ƒï -9 €‰€ïDQž\ €‰€ærOx€‰€‚ÿ1Click on the Browse button. Paint Shop Pro will open the Select Folder dialog box. 2Use the dialog box to select or create the destination folder for the new files. When you choose the Select button, Paint Shop Pro will return to the Batch Conversion dialog box. uD©À ºÂ 1œÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ”ÿÿÿÿºÂ à Batch Conversion UtilityJI(`',`BatchConv.Step3.SelectOutputFolder')H#E à % €F€" œ€‚ÿALink / Select Folder Dialog Box1ºÂ 3à 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ•3à ÿÿÿÿƒÃ P)à ƒÃ ' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Input Folderl;3à ïà 1êþ‚–ïà 4Ä íÅ Step 4: Select the Input FolderEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')EƒÃ 4Ä * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion UtilityM"ïà Ä + &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Input Folder }4Ä !Å # €ú€€‚ÿSelect the folder that contains the source files. You select a folder using the following standard Windows file controls: ÌQÄ íÅ { ƀš€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï€Œß€‰€‚†"€ƒïè]=€‰€‚†"€ƒïwñª}€‰€‚ÿLook In Drop Down BoxUp One Level ButtonContents List Box 1!Å Æ 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ—Æ ÿÿÿÿ}Æ _8íÅ }Æ ' €p€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Set the Suppress Error Messages Option{JÆ øÆ 1ªž[„˜øÆ =Ç ¶È Step 5: Set the Suppress Error Messages OptionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E}Æ =Ç * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion Utility[0øÆ ˜Ç + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Set the Stop on Error Messages Optionê=Ç ¶È 4 6€Õ€€ï-̲ €‰€‚ÿIf you want the conversion to stop if Paint Shop Pro encounters any errors, select the "Stop on error" check box. If not, leave it blank. Error messages will still appear in the Batch Conversion Status dialog box (see Step 7). 1˜Ç çÈ 1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ™çÈ ÿÿÿÿ6É O(¶È 6É ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the Input Filesk:çÈ ¡É 1Îþ‚چš¡É æÉ ƒÍ Step 6: Select the Input FilesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')E6É æÉ * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion UtilityL!¡É 2Ê + &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Select the Input Files@æÉ rÊ % €6€" œ€‚ÿSelecting Specific Files‚_2Ê ôÊ # €Ÿ€€‚ÿYou select specific files from the Contents List Box. You select files by clicking on them. Ÿ_rÊ “Ë @ P€Â€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPress to select contiguous files. Press to select non-contiguous files. DôÊ ×Ë % €>€" œ€‚ÿSelecting Nonspecific Files K(“Ë "Ì # €P€€‚ÿYou can select nonspecific files by: Ë~×Ë íÌ M h€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ÿEntering filename wildcards in the File Name Text Box.Selecting a file type from the Files of Type drop down box. –s"Ì ƒÍ # €æ€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will look for filename wildcards first. If none were entered, it will select files by file type. 1íÌ ŽÍ 1†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ›ŽÍ ÿÿÿÿ Î U.ƒÍ Î ' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 7: Execute the Batch Conversionq@ŽÍ zÎ 1—[„ÿÿÿÿœzÎ ¿Î Ù Step 7: Execute the Batch ConversionEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')E Î ¿Î * $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿBatch Conversion UtilityR'zÎ Ï + &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 7: Execute the Batch ConversionX5¿Î iÏ # €j€€‚ÿThere are two ways to execute a batch conversion: >îÏ ³ P n€á€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÑùÒ €‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo convert the specific files that you selected in the last stepiÏ ³ Î , click the Start button. To convert the files in the Contents List Box that match the filename wildcards or the selected file type, click the Select All button. êiÏ Î 1 0€Õ€˜€æL5ÆÀ‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will begin the batch conversion and will open the Batch Conversion Status dialog box. The dialog box displays messages about the batch conversion's progress. To stop the batch conversion, click the Abort button. D³  % €>€" œ€‚ÿFormat-Specific Dialog BoxesÚŠÎ ì 4 6€M€€ïêKO+€‰€‚ÿIf you selected a meta or vector file, a Photo-CD file, or a RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information. H# 4 % €F€" œ€‚ÿWhen Conversion is Complete. . .ç·ì  0 .€o€€æL5ÆÀ‰€‚ÿWhen the conversion is complete, the Abort button on the Batch Conversion Status dialog box will become inactive, and the OK button and the Save Log button will become active. Ÿ~4 Ù @ N€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿSelect the OK button to exit the dialog box. Select the Save Log button to save the progress messages to a text file. 1  1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ  C } 9Ù C ' €$€° €‚ÿPrinting a File:  } * $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1C ® 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿž® ÿÿÿÿû M&} û ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Check the Page Setupi8® d 1ÿÿÿÿŸd   ~ Step 1: Check the Page SetupDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')<û   * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a FileJd ê + &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Check the Page Setup”a  ~ 3 6€Â€€ï÷Ѭô €‰€‚ÿThe page setup settings determine the paper source and the image's placement on the page. 1ê ¯ 1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ¯ ÿÿÿÿ T-~  ' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Access the Print Dialog Boxp?¯ s 1ªQ¡s ¯ ( Step 2: Access the Print Dialog BoxEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')< ¯ * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a FileQ&s + &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Access the Print Dialog Boxi:¯ i / .€t€€æ_óò€‰€‚ÿThere are two ways to access the Print dialog box: ¿h ( W ~€Ô€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæþQóò€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿYou can select Print from the File menu. You can click the Print button in the toolbar. 1i Y 1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¢Y ÿÿÿÿ€ K$( € ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Printerg6Y 1ÅA£ G Û Step 3: Select the PrinterEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')<€ G * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a FileH  + &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the PrinterAG Ð 0 .€#€€æ¯À€‰€‚ÿYou select the printer from the Printer drop down box. The drop down box lists all of the output devices that are available to your system. For example, in addition to the available printers, it will also include any fax software that is installed on your computer. º Û Q p€u€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚ÿ1Click on the drop down box to open it.2Click on the printer that you want to select. If the list is too long to fit in the box, use the scrollbar to move through it. 1Ð  1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ€  ÿÿÿÿj ^7Û j ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Set the Printer Properties (Optional)zI  ä 1Ý0€¥ä  —@ Step 4: Set the Printer Properties (Optional)EB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')<j  * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a File[0ä { + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Set the Printer Properties (Optional)Ü  —@ 4 6€¹€€ïØV¯ €‰€‚ÿIf you want to change the selected printer's properties, click the Properties bu{ —@ j tton. Paint Shop Pro will open the properties dialog box for the selected printer. For help using the dialog box, try pressing . 1{ È@ 1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŠÈ@ ÿÿÿÿA W0—@ A ' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Set the Print to File CheckboxsBÈ@ ’A 1”Aƒ§’A ÎA 1E Step 5: Set the Print to File CheckboxEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')<A ÎA * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a Fileg<’A 5B + &€x€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Set the Print to File Check Box and Print Options²‚ÎA çB 0 .€€€æM€_`€‰€‚ÿThe Print to File check box determines if the output is sent to the selected printer or to a printer file. If you want to: ü»5B ãC A P€{€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚‚ÿSend the output to the selected printer, make sure that the check box is empty. Send the output to a print file, mark the check box. You will be prompted for the filename later. N*çB 1E $ €U€€‚ÿIf you want to print registration or crop marks, select their check boxes in the Print Options panel. If you typed a title in the Creator Information tab of the Image Information dialog box, you can select to print it. If there is no Creator Information, the file name of the image will be used.1ãC bE 1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿšbE ÿÿÿÿµE S,1E µE ' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Enter the Number of Copieso>bE $F 1Å0€3…©$F `F ôH Step 6: Enter the Number of CopiesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')<µE `F * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a FileP%$F °F + &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Enter the Number of Copies Ö`F ŒG 6 :€­€€€ €æP­˜q€‰€‚ÿIf your printer supports multiple copies, then you can print more than one copy of a file at a time. If your printer does not support multiple copies, the Number of Copies Spin Control will be greyed out. 8ë°F ôH M h€Û€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚ÿYou can type the number of copies into the spin control, or you can use the arrow buttons to set the value. To scroll to a higher or lower value, point at the appropriate button and press and hold the primary mouse button. 1ŒG %I 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿª%I ÿÿÿÿrI M&ôH rI ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 7: Select the OK Buttoni8%I ÛI 1Kƒÿÿÿÿ«ÛI J 1L Step 7: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')<rI J * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting a FileJÛI aJ + &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 7: Select the OK ButtonĐJ %K 4 6€!€€ïÚV¯ €‰€‚ÿWhen you're ready to print, click the OK button. One of two things will happen, depending on the setting of the Print to File check box: ÀaJ 1L L f€…€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ%—·€‰€‚ÿIf the option is off, the Paint Shop Pro will send the image to the printer. If the option is on, Paint Shop Pro will open the Print to File dialog box. For more help, press . 1%K bL 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¬bL ¥L ÞL C1L ¥L ' €8€° €‚ÿPreviewing a Printed File9bL ÞL * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1¥L M 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ­M ÿÿÿÿYM J#ÞL YM ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Previewing a Printed File],M ¶M 1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ®¶M üM ‹‚ Previewing a Printed FileSaveMark(`SubWin')FYM üM * $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPreviewing a Printed FileÒ¢¶M ÎN 0 .€E€€æ¯ïā€‰€‚ÿTo view the active image as it will appear when printed, select Print Preview from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Image Print Preview Window. :üM O % €*€" œ€‚ÿPrinting the Image°}ÎN žO 3 6€ú€€ïØV¯ €‰€‚ÿThe Print button closes the Image Print Preview Window and opens the Print dialog box. See Step 3 of Printing a File. ?O € % €4€" œ€‚ÿChanging the Page SetupžO € YM ÿËžO  4 6€—€€ï÷Ѭô €‰€‚ÿThe Setup button closes the Image Print Preview Window and opens the Page Setup dialog box. When you close the Page Setup dialog box, Paint Shop Pro will return to the Image Print Preview Window. B € M % €:€" œ€‚ÿChanging the MagnificationŠ‚  ó $ €€€‚ÿThe Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons magnify and reduce the image. You can also change the magnification by clicking on the image. :M -‚ % €*€" œ€‚ÿClosing the Window^;ó ‹‚ # €v€€‚ÿThe Close button closes the Image Print Preview Window. 1-‚ Œ‚ 1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¯ÿÿÿÿŒ‚ ₠&‹‚ ₠# €€€‚ÿ1Œ‚ ƒ 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ°ƒ Pƒ ‰ƒ =₠Pƒ ' €,€° €‚ÿOpening Image Files9ƒ ‰ƒ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1Pƒ ºƒ 1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ±ºƒ ÿÿÿÿ„ M&‰ƒ „ ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Opening Image Files Overview`/ºƒ g„ 1»ÿÿÿÿ²g„ ׄ a‡ Opening Image Files OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')@„ §„ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿOpening Image Files0g„ ׄ , (€ €€†"€~‚ÿJ§„ !… + &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOpening Image Files OverviewŠWׄ «… 3 6€®€€ï‰JÀ€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro supports a wide range of file formats. You can open image files: ¶Ë!… a‡ ë €£€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïa)!S€‰€‚†"€ƒïF3Wv€‰€‚†"€ƒÌ$AL(`Browser - Opening Image Files')€‰€‚†"€ƒï·Bg„€‰€‚†"€ƒï'}™€‰€‚†"€ƒïÈ 6Š€‰€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog BoxUsing the Most-Recently Used ListUsing the BrowserUsing My Computer or the Windows ExplorerUsing Drag-and-DropUsing the Run Dialog Box1«… ’‡ 1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ³’‡ ÿÿÿÿ܇ J#a‡ ܇ ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Open Dialog Box],’‡ 9ˆ 1JŽ9ˆ ©ˆ zŒ Using the Open Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')@܇ yˆ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿOpening Image Files09ˆ ©ˆ , (€ €€†"€‚ÿGyˆ ðˆ + &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog Box’c©ˆ ‚‰ / .€Æ€€æY'ª€‰€‚ÿThe Open dialog box is a standard Windows File Open dialog box with a few special features. g#ðˆ é‰ D X€H€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï/I£~ €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions A‚‰ *Š % €8€" œ€‚ÿViewing Image Informationb"é‰ Œ‹ @ N€E€€æÅgš(€‰€ï3×p€‰€‚ÿThe Image Information group box displays basic image data for the selected file. It also displays a small preview of the image if the Show Preview check box is selected. To see more information, click the Details button. Paint Shop Pro will open the File Information dialog box. D*Š Ћ % €>€" œ€‚ÿBrowsing the Selected FolderªwŒ‹ zŒ 3 6€î€€ïIv¯ €‰€‚ÿTo browse the selected folder's image files, click the Browse button. Paint Shop Pro will activate the Browser. 1Ћ «Œ 1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿµ«Œ ÿÿÿÿýŒ R+zŒ ýŒ ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Most-Recently Used Liste4«Œ b 1ύ¶b ҍ xÁ Using the Most-Recently Used ListSaveMark(`SubWin')@ýŒ ¢ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿOpening Image Files0b ҍ , (€ €€†"€€‚ÿO$¢ !Ž + &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Most-Recently Used ListÄҍ 0À ? L€‹€€ïҠ€‚‡"€‚‚ÿThe Most-Recently Used List contains the names of the files that have been opened most recently by Paint Shop Pro. The list appears at the bottom of the File menu, just above the "Exit" selection. The number of files that can appear on the list is controlled by the Recent File Listing option.If you have just installed Paint Shop Pro, the list will be empty. You select a file from the list by clicking on i!Ž 0À ýŒ t. One of two things will happen: Hè!Ž xÁ ` Ž€Õ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïE/U倉€‚†"€ƒïêKO+€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the file in a new image window. If you selected a meta or vector file, a Photo-CD file, or a RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information. 10À ©Á 1‹ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ·©Á ÿÿÿÿ Z3xÁ  ' €f€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using My Computer or the Windows Explorerm<©Á p 1ïJZƒžp à žÅ Using My Computer or the Windows ExplorerSaveMark(`SubWin')@ °Â * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿOpening Image Files0p à , (€ €€†"€‚ÿW,°Â 7à + &€X€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing My Computer or the Windows Explorerïà VÄ 0 .€ß€€怷À€‰€‚ÿIf the file's extension is associated with Paint Shop Pro, you can open the file by double-clicking on it. Associated file types use the Paint Shop Pro image file icon. When you double-click the file, one of two things will happen: Hè7à žÅ ` Ž€Õ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïE/U倉€‚†"€ƒïêKO+€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the file in a new image window. If you selected a meta or vector file, a Photo-CD file, or a RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information. 1VÄ ÏÅ 1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¹ÏÅ ÿÿÿÿÆ DžÅ Æ ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using Drag-and-DropW&ÏÅ jÆ 1dš…ºjÆ ÚÆ Ê Using Drag-and-DropSaveMark(`SubWin')@Æ ªÆ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿOpening Image Files0jÆ ÚÆ , (€ €€†"€‚‚ÿAªÆ Ç + &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing Drag-and-Dropš„ÚÆ ÃÇ $ € €€‚ÿYou can open image files by "dragging" them from My Computer or the Windows Explorer and "dropping" them on any of the following:ԂÇ —È R r€ €RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ€€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPaint Shop Pro's Main WindowPaint Shop Pro's executable file (PSP.EXE)A shortcut to Paint Shop Pro's executable file 4ÃÇ ËÈ % €€" œ€‚ÿStep-by-Stepܲ—È §É * "€e€€€€‚ÿThe steps show here walk you through dragging-and-dropping files to the Main Window. The process for dragging-and-dropping to PSP.EXE or a shortcut is essentially the same. f"ËÈ Ê D X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïŠ»Kt €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions1§É >Ê 1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ»>Ê ÿÿÿÿ‡Ê I" Ê ‡Ê ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Run Dialog Box\+>Ê ãÊ 1xZƒÿÿÿÿŒãÊ SË šÍ Using the Run Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')@‡Ê #Ë * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿOpening Image Files0ãÊ SË , (€ €€†"€ƒ‚ÿF#Ë ™Ë + &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Run Dialog Box¹•SË RÌ $ €+€€‚ÿYou can add filenames to the command line after the Paint Shop Pro executable filename in Windows' Run dialog box. One of two things will happen: Hè™Ë šÍ ` Ž€Õ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïE/U倉€‚†"€ƒïêKO+€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the file in a new image window. If you selected a meta or vector file, a Photo-CD file, or a RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information. 1RÌ ËÍ 1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿœËÍ Î HÎ CšÍ Î ' €8€° €‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog Box:ËÍ HÎ * $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1Î yÎ 1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŸyÎ ÿÿÿÿÌÎ S,HÎ ÌÎ ' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Access the Open Dialog Boxo>yÎ ;Ï 1Šÿÿÿÿ’¿;Ï Ï Step 1: Access the Open Dialog BoxDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')FÌÎ Ï * $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog BoxP%;Ï ÑÏ + &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Access the Open Dialog Boxh9Ï E/ .€r€€æY'ª€‰€‚ÿÑÏ EÌÎ There are two ways to access the Open dialog box: œfÑÏ W ~€Ð€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæûK'ª€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿYou can choose Open from the File menu. You can click the Open button in the Toolbar. 1E31‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÀ3ÿÿÿÿ„Q*„' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the File's Folderm<3ñ1¢§‡Áñ7šStep 2: Select the File's FolderEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')F„7* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog BoxN#ñ…+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the File's FolderW47Ü# €h€€‚ÿYou select a folder using the following controls:ÌQ…š{ ƀš€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï€Œß€‰€‚†"€ƒïè]=€‰€‚†"€ƒïwñª}€‰€‚ÿLook In Drop Down BoxUp One Level ButtonContents List Box 1ÜÙ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÂÙÿÿÿÿ&M&š&' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the File Typei8ُ1’çÏիStep 3: Select the File TypeEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')F&Õ* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog BoxJ+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the File TypeqBՐ/ .€„€€æŽktA€‰€‚ÿYou select the file type from the File Type Drop Down Box. Ê«Q p€•€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚ÿ1Click on the drop down box. Paint Shop Pro will open it. 2Click on the file type that you want to select. If the file type isn't visible, use the scrollbar to move through the list. 1Ü1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÄÜÿÿÿÿ$H!«$' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Filed3܈1XúňÎõStep 4: Select the FileEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')F$Î* $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog BoxEˆ+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the FileâŠÎõ< F€M€€æv\Q€‰€攞Öۀ‰€‚ÿClick on the file that you want to select in the Contents List Box. If the file list is too long to fit in the box, use the scrollbars to move through it. 1& 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÆ& ÿÿÿÿ„ ^7õ„ ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Check the File Information (Optional)zI& þ 1³çÇþ D Æ Step 5: Check the File Information (Optional)EB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')F„ D * $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog Box[0þ Ÿ + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Check the File Information (Optional) qD ? / .€â€€æÅgš(€‰€‚ÿThe Image Information group box displays basic image data for the selected file. To see more information: ‡>Ÿ Æ I `€}€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒï3×p€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click on the Details button. Paint Shop Pro will open the File Information dialog box, which lists various facts about the selected file. A preview of the file is displayed in this dialog box if the Show Preview check box is selected. 2When you're done reviewing the information, click the OK button. 1? ÷ 1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÈ÷ ÿÿÿÿF O(Æ F ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the Open Buttonk:÷ ± 1_úÿÿÿÿɱ ÷ 1@Step 6: Select the Open ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')FF ÷ * $€8€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Open Dialog BoxK ± B+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Click the Open Button›x÷ Ý# €ð€€‚ÿTo open the Browser, click the Browse button. To open the file, click the Open button. One of two things will happen:HèB1@` Ž€Õ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïE/U倉€‚†"€ƒïêKO+€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the file in a new image window. If you selected a meta or vector file, a Photo-CD file, or a RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box Ý1@F requesting additional information. 1Ýb@1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÊb@Ÿ@Ù@=1@Ÿ@' €,€° €‚ÿUsing Drag-and-Drop:b@Ù@* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1Ÿ@ A1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿË AÿÿÿÿWAM&Ù@WA' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Position the Windowsi8 AÀA1Lÿÿÿÿ‚ÌÀABDStep 1: Position the WindowsDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@WAB* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Drag-and-DropJÀAJB+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Position the WindowsÑ]BDt ¶€Á€RŒ¬Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïânSk€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ€ €æW<¢€‰€€ €‚ÿPosition the My Computer or Windows Explorer window and the Paint Shop Pro Main Window so that you can see them both. The My Computer or Windows Explorer window should be "on top" since you will use it to "grab" the file. Only a small part of the Paint Shop Pro Main Window - in fact, just the Titlebar - needs to be visible. 1JBLD1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÍLDÿÿÿÿ’DFD’D' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Find the Fileb1LDôD1 L€ÂÎôD4EFStep 2: Find the FileEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@’D4E* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Drag-and-DropCôDwE+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Find the File™v4EF# €ì€€‚ÿFind the file in My Computer or the Windows Explorer. For further assistance, see the application's documentation. 1wEAF1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÏAFÿÿÿÿ‡FFF‡F' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Grab the Fileb1AFéF1‚mƒÐéF)G HStep 3: Grab the FileEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@‡F)G* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Drag-and-DropCéFlG+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Grab the File¡])G HD X€º€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚ÿ1Point at the file with your mouse. 2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 1lG>H1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÑ>Hÿÿÿÿ„HF H„H' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Drag the Fileb1>HæH1ô„ÒæH&IéIStep 4: Drag the FileEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@„H&I* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Drag-and-DropCæHiI+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Drag the File€M&IéI3 6€š€€ïânSk€‰€‚ÿDrag the file to the Paint Shop Pro Main Window by moving your mouse. 1iIJ1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÓJÿÿÿÿ`JFéI`J' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Drop the Fileb1JÂJ1µmƒÿÿÿÿÔÂJK†MStep 5: Drop the FileEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')@`JK* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Drag-and-DropCÂJEK+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Drop the FileùÅK>L4 6€‹€€ï‰JÀ€‰€‚ÿYou drop the file by releasing the mouse button. The Paint Shop Pro Main Window will move to the foreground, and if Paint Shop Pro recognizes the file format, one of two things will happen: HèEK†M` Ž€Õ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïE/U倉€‚†"€ƒïêKO+€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the file in a new image window. If you selected a meta or vector file, a Photo-CD file, or a RAW file, Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box requesting additional information. 1>L·M1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÕÿÿÿÿ·MÝM&†MÝM# €€€‚ÿ1·MN1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÖNLN…N>ÝMLN' €.€° €‚ÿPainting and Drawing9N…N* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1LN¶N1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ׶NÿÿÿÿON'…NO' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting and Drawing Overviewa0¶NeO15ÿÿÿÿÞØeOÖOæƒPainting and Drawing OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')AOŠO* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0eOÖO, (€ €€†"€„‚ÿK ŠO-€+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÖO-€OÿPainting and Drawing OverviewÆiÖOó] ˆ€Ó€€Ì!AL(`Painting and Drawing Tools')€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚‚‚ÿPaint Shop Pro contains several painting and drawing tools on its Tool palette. These range from standard paint brushes to photo retouching tools to the Text tool. To use a tool, you first set its options on the Control palette and select its colors from the Color palette or the image.To hide and display the Tool palette, do one of the following:î¢-€á‚L f€K€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPress .Click the Hide/View Tool Palette button on the toolbar.From the View menu, choose Toolbars, and select or clear the "Tool Palette" check box.(ó ƒ% €€‘€€‚ÿݹá‚æƒ$ €s€€‚ÿBecause many tools will operate or have the desired effect only on grey scale or 24-bit images, you may need to increase the color (bit) depth of your image before using these tools.1 ƒ„1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÙ„ÿÿÿÿR„;æƒR„' €(€° €‚ÿTOPIC: PaintbrushN„ „1×4†ÔÚ „…·‡PaintbrushSaveMark(`SubWin')AR„á„* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0 „…, (€ €€†"€…‚ÿ8 á„I…+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPaintbrush>…‡†$ €5€€‚ÿUse the Paintbrush to paint freehand or make straight brush strokes. The Paintbrush configuration options -- shape, size, opacity, density, hardness, and step -- are displayed on the Brush Tip tab of the Control palette. The Tool Controls tab displays the Paper Texture options. 0šI…·‡– ú€=€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï–5 €‚†"€ƒïðÀ‘Õ€‰€‚†"€ƒïÝ€‰€‚†"€ƒïÝüðŽ€‰€‚ÿSetting the Paintbrush OptionsPainting with the PaintbrushPainting Straight Lines with the PaintbrushCreating a Custom Brush1‡†è‡1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÛè‡ÿÿÿÿ$ˆ<·‡$ˆ' €*€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Clone BrushOè‡sˆ1äÞ¢Üsˆäˆ—ŒClone BrushSaveMark(`SubWin')A$ˆŽˆ* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0sˆäˆ, (€ €€†"€†‚ÿ9Žˆ‰+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿClone Brush³yäˆЊ: B€õ€€æÓ7.‰€‰€‚‡"€‚ÿUse the Clone brush to copy part of an image to another location. You can use it to copy within an image, between layers, or between two images of the same color depth. The Clone brush configuration options, which control how it copies and applies color, are displayed on the Control palette. The Clone brush can be used only on a 24-bit color or a grey scale image.£D‰s‹_ Ž€Œ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï«Ë™€‰€‚†"€ƒï©aÀ€‰€‚ÿSetting the Clone Brush OptionsUsing the Clone Brush/ Њ¢‹% €€" œ€‚ÿExampleõÂs‹—Œ3 4€…€€€ €€ €€‚ÿIf you have a photograph with a flaw against a multi-toned or multicolored background - such as skin, cloth, or water - you can use the Clone brush to copy the background over the flaw. 1¢‹Ȍ1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÝȌÿÿÿÿ?—Œ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color ReplacerR!ȌY1¿Ô€ÞYʍPÀColor ReplacerSaveMark(`SubWin')Aš* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0Yʍ, (€ €€†"€‡‚ÿ<šŽ+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColor ReplacerõÑʍûŽ$ €£€€‚ÿYou use the Color Replacer to replace one color in an image with another. The Color Replacer configuration options, which control how it recognizes and replaces color, are displayed on the Control palette. I³ŽPÀ– ú€o€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï·Œ/€‰€‚†"€ƒïÇ8ø€‰€‚†"€ƒï§>¶Ó€‰€‚†"€ƒïdK€‰€‚ÿSetting the Color Replacer OptionsReplacing All Occurrences of a ColorPainting with the ColoûŽPÀr ReplacerPainting Straight Lines with the Color Replacer1ûŽÀ1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ߁ÀÿÿÿÿŸÀ=PÀŸÀ' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Retouch ToolPÀÁ1.¢w‚àÁÁ|ÄRetouch ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')AŸÀOÁ* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0ÁÁ, (€ €€†"€ˆ‚ÿ:OÁ¹Á+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRetouch ToolÆ¡ÁÃ% €C€€‚‚ÿYou use the Retouch tool to apply photo retouching effects to an image. The Retouch tool configuration options, which determine which effect is applied and how, are displayed on the Control palette. There are several Retouch modes, many of which apply the same effects as the Adjust Color commands. Use the Retouch tool when you want to paint with the effect rather than apply it to the entire image or selection.ý‚¹Á|Ä{ Ā €PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïòÐŽœ€‰€‚†"€ƒï€ð³€‰€‚†"€ƒï}²z›€‰€‚ÿSetting the Retouch Tool OptionsPainting with the Retouch ToolPainting Straight Lines with the Retouch Tool1íÄ1hÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿá­ÄÿÿÿÿäÄ7|ÄäÄ' € €° €‚ÿTOPIC: EraserJ­Ä.Å1€°„â.ÅŸÅqÈEraserSaveMark(`SubWin')AäÄoÅ* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0.ÅŸÅ, (€ €€†"€‰‚ÿ4 oÅÓÅ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEraserŽŸÅ‡Ç% €€€‚‚ÿUse the Eraser to replace colors in an image with the background color or with a transparency. Erasing any layer other than the background replaces color with transparency. use the Eraser to remove the effect of your last action. Erasing the background replaces the existing color with the foreground or background color. The Eraser’s configuration options are displayed on the Control palette. êpÓÅqÈz Āæ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï"€‚†"€ƒïôFŒZ€‰€‚†"€ƒï¡a:S€‰€‚ÿSetting the Eraser OptionsPainting with the EraserPainting Straight Lines with the Eraser1‡Ç¢È1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿã¢ÈÿÿÿÿÛÈ9qÈÛÈ' €$€° €‚ÿTOPIC: AirbrushL¢È'É1$w‚ †ä'ɘɋËAirbrushSaveMark(`SubWin')AÛÈhÉ* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0'ɘÉ, (€ €€†"€Š‚ÿ6 hÉÎÉ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAirbrushÍ©˜É›Ê$ €S€€‚ÿThe Airbrush simulates painting with an airbrush or spray can. Its configuration options, which determine how it applies color, are displayed on the Control palette. ðvÎÉ‹Ëz Āò€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï&i;ö€‰€‚†"€ƒïL5Œ2€‰€‚†"€ƒïyœø€‰€‚ÿSetting the Airbrush OptionsPainting with the AirbrushPainting Straight Lines with the Airbrush1›ÊŒË1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿåŒËÿÿÿÿöË:‹ËöË' €&€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Fill ToolMŒËCÌ1Ü°„æCÌŽÌ_ÏFill ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')AöË„Ì* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0CÌŽÌ, (€ €€†"€‹‚ÿ=„ÌñÌ+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿFlood Fill ToolÜžŽÌÍÍ$ €q€€‚ÿUse the Flood Fill tool to fill an area with a solid color, pattern, or gradient. This tool has a number of configuration options that control how it recognizes and replaces color. ’ÆñÌ_ÏÌ f™€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï¥t`Í€‰€‚†"€ƒï¬L Š€‰€‚†"€ƒïã²€‰€‚†"€ƒïU°ö±€‰€‚†"€ƒï–í±©€‰€‚†"€ƒïsª€‰€‚ÿSetting the Standard OptionsPattern Style OptionsLinear Gradient Style OptionsNon-Linear Gradient Style OptionsSolid Color Fill OptionsUsing the Fill Tool1Í͐Ï1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿçÏÿÿÿÿ :_Ï ' €&€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Text ToolÏ _ÏMÏY1Ì †8èYÊeText ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')A š* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0YÊ, (€ €€†"€Œ‚ÿ7 š+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿText ToolþÚÊÿ$ €µ€€‚ÿYou use the Text tool to add text to an image. The Text tool works a little differently than the other painting and drawing tools. The options are not presented on the Control Palette, but in a separate dialog box. f"eD X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïúσÔ€‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions1ÿ–1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿé–ÿÿÿÿÐ:eÐ' €&€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Line ToolM–1Ÿ+êŽüLine ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')AÐ^* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0Ž, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ7 ^Å+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLine ToolzŽb# €ô€€‚ÿUse the Line tool to draw straight lines and Bezier curves. You change the Line tool's options on the Control palette. š;Åü_ Ž€z€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïꊀ‰€‚†"€ƒïÌČM€‰€‚ÿSetting the Line OptionsUsing the Line Tool1b-1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿë-ÿÿÿÿh;üh' €(€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Shape ToolN-¶1ï8˜…ì¶'åShape ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')Ah÷* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0¶', (€ €€†"€Ž‚ÿ8 ÷_+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿShape ToolåÁ'D$ €ƒ€€‚ÿYou use the Shape tool to draw a rectangle, square, ellipse, or circle. The shapes can be outlined or filled in. The Shape tool’s configuration options are displayed on the Control palette. ¡B_å_ Ž€ˆ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï;Tv²€‰€‚†"€ƒï¹ while by dragging any of the 4 corner handles. Apply a skew/shear effect by pressing while by dragging any of the 4 center handles. Distort (move the corner) by pressing + while dragging any of the 4 corner handles. ÿÉÇgB6 :€“€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿAs the cursor moves over a handle, a rectangle shaped like the distortion appears. 6To apply the Deformation, either click the Apply button on the Tool Controls tab or double-click the image.(hAB% €€‘€€‚ÿNgBÝB1AÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿðÝBC*IDeformToolSaveMark(`SubWin')=BC* $€&€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿDeformation ToolIÝBcC+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Deform Dialog BoxC CŠC# €@€€‚ÿTo use the Deform dialog box:{cC!E] ˆ€=€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæLSj€æwœ%;€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1To deform a selection, make the selection and float it.2Double-click the Deform tool on the Tool palette. The Deformation Settings dialog box opens.3The boxes under the X control the horizontal distortion; the boxes under the Y control the vertical distortion:TŠCuGS t€ €RŒ‘€b†,Æ؀†"€‚†"€‚†"€‚†"€‚ÿ Position determines the X and Y coordinates of the left-most corner point. Scale controls the horizontal and vertical resizing. Shear controls the offset of a side. Enter positive values to shear to the right or downward; negative values to shearing to the left or upward. At .5, moves 50% of its length. Perspective controls the length of a side to its opposite. Enter a positive number to shorten a side; a negative number to lengthen a side. At .5, one side is half the length of the opposing side. À‹!E5H5 8€€RŒ‘€b†,Æ؀†"€‚ÿ Angle is the rotation around the center point. Clockwise rotation is measured from 0 to 360; counter-clockwise rotation from 360 to 0.õ¶uG*I? L€m€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ€‚ÿ4After entering the values, click OK to close the dialog box.5To apply the Deformation, either click the Apply button on the Tool Controls tab or double-click the image.15H[I1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿñ[Iÿÿÿÿ˜I=*I˜I' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Picture TubeP[IèI1+ƈòèIYJENPicture TubeSaveMark(`SubWin')A˜I)J* $€.€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPainting and Drawing0èIYJ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ;)J”J+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPicture Tubesž’YJLM& €%€€‚‚‚ÿPaint Shop Pro’s Picture Tube tool lets you paint with a variety of objects without having to draw them. Use one of the Picture Tubes included with the program or create your own. Each Picture Tube displays a variety of objects or an object in a variety of settings.The Paint Shop Pro Picture Tubes are saved as ".tub" files in the Tubes folder of the program. If you use the Browser to view them, you can see that the objects are arranged in rows and columns. These rows are called cells. When you paint with a Picture Tube, you can control which object appears by changing the settings in the Selection Mode box of the Picture Tube Options dialog box.(”JtM% €€‘€€‚ÿÑjLMENg ž€Ú€€†"€ƒçnž5f€‰€‚†"€ƒçd†—€‰€‚†"€ƒç-~¹#€‰€‚ÿSetting the Picture Tube OptionsPainting with a Picture TubeCreating a Picture TubePtM•N1« ˜…Äó•NÏNJ‡Picture TubeSaveMark(`SubWin'):ENÏN* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPicture TubesN#•NO+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Picture Tube OptionsF#ÏNcO# €F€€‚ÿTo set the Picture Tube options:ŽO}Z ‚€i€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€€ €‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ÿ1Activate the Picture Tube tool by clicking its button on the TcO}ENool palette. 2On the Control palette, click the Tool Controls tab, if necessary, to bring it to the front.3Select a Picture Tube from the Tube drop-down list.4Drag the slider to select the Picture Tube size. You can reduce and enlarge it from 10% to 250% of its original size.5Click the Options button. The Picture Tube Options dialog box opens.ÖcO˜ƒE X€­€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ6The Cell Arrangement panel shows the arrangement of Picture Tube cells in the Picture Tube file. Use the default settings for Paint Shop Pro Picture Tubes.7In the Placement Options panel, select Random or Continuous placement mode to control whether the Picture Tubes appear in the image at random or equal intervals. 8Type a step size. As you decrease the step size, the distance between the intervals at which the tubes appear in the image decreases.1Ô}Ʌ] ˆ€±€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿ9Paint Shop Pro selects the cells (images) it paints based on the mode you choose from the Selection Mode list:Random mode randomly selects images in the tube.The Incremental mode selects the first image in the tube and repeats once it has selected all the images.The Angular mode selects images based on the direction you drag the cursor as you paint.The Pressure Mode uses pressure from a pressure sensitive pad to determine which image to select.Y˜ƒ"‡G \€'€Pä:„O€d€†"€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿThe Velocity mode selects images based on the speed you drag the cursor as you paint.10If you want these settings to become the new default settings for the tube, select the "Save as default for this Picture Tube" check box.11Click OK to close the dialog box.(ɅJ‡% €€‘€€‚ÿP"‡š‡1Žƈôš‡ԇWŠPicture TubeSaveMark(`SubWin'):J‡ԇ* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPicture TubesJš‡ˆ+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting with a Picture TubeC ԇaˆ# €@€€‚ÿTo paint with a Picture Tube:Îzˆ/ŠT v€õ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Select the layer on which you will paint the Picture Tubes.2Click the Picture Tube tool on the Tool palette.3Select the options from the Control palette.4Position the cursor where you want to begin painting.5Click and drag the cursor to paint the Picture Tube. If you have chosen a Selection Mode option other than Random, move the cursor accordingly.(aˆWŠ% €€‘€€‚ÿP/Š§Š1ç Äÿÿÿÿõ§ŠáŠžÅPicture TubeSaveMark(`SubWin'):WŠáŠ* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPicture TubesE§Š&‹+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Picture Tube¿›áŠå‹$ €7€€‚ÿTo create your own Picture Tubes, you create a grid of cells and fill each cell with an image. The cells can be any size. To create a Picture Tube file: È&‹ïB R€‘€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ÿ1In the File menu, point to Preferences, and choose General Program Preferences. The General Program Preferences dialog box opens.2If necessary, click the Rulers and Units tab to bring it to the front.3In the Grid panel on the right side of the tab, type Horizontal and Vertical Spacing values in pixels. The values you enter become the length and height of the Picture Tube cell. Your images can be no larger than the cell size you select.%ãå‹ ÀB R€Ç€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ4Click OK to close the dialog box.5From the File menu, choose New. The New dialog box opens.6In the Image Dimensions panel, type values for the width and height that are multiples of the cell horizontal and vertical spacing. The number you type determines the total cells you can fill with images. For example, if the grid spacing is 100 pixels, you could create an image of 400 x 300 pixels. With an image this size, you will have 12 cells (4 acrosï ÀWŠs and three down).*ÓïJÂW |€§€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ7Select Transparent for the Background Color.8Click OK. A new image with visible grid lines appears in the workspace.9If the grid is not visible, choose Grid from the View menu.10Create the images of the Picture Tube. Place one image in each grid square. Each square with the image becomes a Picture Tube cell.11After you have finished, open the File menu, point to Export, and choose Picture Tube. The Export Picture Tube dialog box opens.-â ÀwÄK d€Å€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ12In the Cell Arrangement panel, enter the number of image cells you created across and down the image file.13In the Placement Options panel, select a Placement Mode. The mode can be changed when you use the Picture Tube.14Type the pixel width of the Picture Tube cell in the Step Size box.15To use a Selection Mode other than Random, select it from the list. For more information on Selection and Placement modes, see "Setting the Picture Tube Options," above.'èJžÅ? L€Ñ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ€€‚ÿ16Type a name for the Picture Tube file.17Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro saves the file in the ".tub" format in the Tubes folder of the program and adds the file to the list of Picture Tubes on the Control palette.1wÄÏÅ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿöÏÅÆ<Æ4 žÅÆ' €€° €‚ÿPaintbrush9ÏÅ<Æ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ÆmÆ1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ÷mÆÿÿÿÿŒÆO(<ÆŒÆ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Paintbrush Optionsb1mÆÇ1âÿÿÿÿTŠøÇ…Ç6ÎSetting the Paintbrush OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')7 ŒÆUÇ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPaintbrush0Ç…Ç, (€ €€†"€‘‚ÿL!UÇÑÇ+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Paintbrush Options |…ÇÞÉ‘ ð€ù€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæÙz€‰€€æp3gW‰€æ‰Çf³€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÎ2þ³€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Paintbrush button on the Tool palette. If the Control palette is visible, its Brush Tip tab will display the Paintbrush's style controls. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now. 3Use the Shape drop down box to select a brush shape. The choices are round, square, vertical, horizontal, right slash, and left slash.€ÑÇôÌr ²€I€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€æÇÜT€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒ€€ƒ€‚€ƒ€€ƒ€‚ÿ4Select a brush size in pixels by moving the Size slider. 5Set the opacity of the paint by moving the Opacity slider. 6Set the density of the paint by moving the Density slider. 7Set the hardness of the brush edge by moving the Hardness slider.8Set the size of the brush step by moving the Step slider. Step controls the spacing of the discrete drops of paint, or how frequently the brush tip touches the image during a stroke. It is a percentage of the diameter of the brush tip. As the step decreases, the brush tip touches the surface more frequently. Its outline becomes less noticeable, and the strokes appear smoother and more dense. BúÞÉ6ÎH ^€õ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ÿ9Click the Tool Controls tab to bring it to the front.10Use the Paper Texture drop down box to select a surface type. The textures simulate a variety of surfaces and make it look as though you were painting on paper with that texture.1ôÌgÎ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿùgÎÿÿÿÿŽÎM&6ÎŽÎ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting with the Paintbrush`/gÎÏ1á„Ö úÏ€ÏFPainting with the PaintbrushSaveMark(`SubWin')<ŽÎPÏ- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Paintbrush0Ï€Ï, (€ €€†"€’‚ÿJPÏÊÏ+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting with the Paintbrush‰\€Ï_- *€º€€‡"€‚‚ÿ If yoÊÏ_ŽÎur image has more than one layer, select the appropriate layer before you paint.jÊÏsª "Õ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÙz€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use for painting. 2If you want to paint within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply color within the selection. 3Click the Paintbrush button on the Tool palette and set the options.4Position the cursor where you want to start painting. 5Press and hold the: Òz_EX €€ø€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to apply the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to apply the background color. ÅsF< F€‹€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ6Drag the mouse to apply color.7To end a paint stroke, release the mouse button. Each time you release the mouse button, you "lift" your brush from the canvas, ending the paint stroke. 1Ew1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿûwÿÿÿÿÉR+FÉ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Drawing Lines with the Paintbrushe4w.1ÝTŠ  ü.šF Drawing Lines with the PaintbrushSaveMark(`SubWin')<Éj- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Paintbrush0.š, (€ €€†"€“‚ÿY.jó+ &€\€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting Straight Lines with the Paintbrush‰\š|- *€º€€‡"€‚‚ÿ If your image has more than one layer, select the appropriate layer before you paint.K›óÇ° .7€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæÙz€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use for painting. 2If you want to paint within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply color within the selection. 3Click the Paintbrush button on the Tool palette. 4Click the image where you want to start the line. 5Press and hold the key. 6Click where you want to end the line segment. Use the: Òz|™ X €€ø€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to apply the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to apply the background color. ­~ÇF / .€ü€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ7You can continue adding line segments by clicking with either mouse button. When you're done, release the key. [*™ ¡ 1ŒÖ ÿÿÿÿý¡  wBCreating a Custom BrushSaveMark(`SubWin')<F Ý - *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Paintbrush0¡  , (€ €€†"€”‚ÿEÝ R + &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Custom Brush% w $ €€€‚ÿYou can create your own custom brushes to use with any image. They can be made from selections with a width and height of up to 255 by 255 pixels. The brush will be square or rectangular depending on the shape of your selection. To create a custom brush:ŸR ’] ˆ€}€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Make a selection of the area you want to transform into a brush.2Click any brush button on the Tool palette to activate the Brush Tip tab.3On the Control palette, click the Brush Tip tab to bring it to the front.4Click the Custom Brush button.5Choose Custom from the drop-down menu. The Custom Brush dialog box opens.6To save the brush in a folder other than the Paint Shop Pro Brushes folder, do one of following:ã¢w uA P€I€P‘€^„O€€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿType the pathname in the Folder box.Click the Browse button. When the Browse for Folder dialog box opens, navigate to the folder, select it, and click OK.謒i@< F€Y€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ7Click the Create button. The new brush thumbnail appears in the dialog boui@F x. Paint Shop Pro saves the brush in the selected folder when it creates it.8Click OK.(u‘@% €€‘€€‚ÿAi@Ò@% €8€" œ€‚ÿEditing Your Custom BrushŒi‘@^A# €Ò€€‚ÿWhen you create a brush, you set the default step value in the Edit Brush box. To edit a custom brush:ÔÒ@wBE X€©€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Edit button in the Custom Brush dialog box. The Custom Brush Edit box opens.2Drag the slider or type a value to set the step size.3Click OK to close the dialog box and save this value.1^AšB1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿþšBÞBC6wBÞB' €€° €‚ÿClone Brush 9šBC* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ÞBHC1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿHCÿÿÿÿ˜CP)C˜C' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Clone Brush Optionsc2HCûC1E ÿÿÿÿ׉ ûCcDwNSetting the Clone Brush OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')8˜C3D* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿClone Brush0ûCcD, (€ €€†"€•‚ÿM"3D°D+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Clone Brush OptionsRÁcDG‘ ð€ƒ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæÔeñi€‰€æp3gW€‰€æ"ý1j€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÓ7.‰€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Clone brush button on the Tool palette. If the Control palette is visible, it will display the Clone brush's options. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now. 3Use the Clone Mode drop down box on the Tool Controls tab to select the clone mode that you want to use. The clone mode controls the behavior of the source area when you stop copying and then resume copying somewhere else: аDIB R€¥€RŒŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿIn aligned mode, the source area moves accordingly. The source area each time you release the mouse. The source area is the reference point for the cloning. When you release and then re-click the mouse, the brush clones the image relative to the distance from the source area.In non-aligned mode, the source area does not move when you release the mouse. The brush (and the cloning) return to source area each time you release and then re-click the mouse. °G!K] ˆ€a€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÓ7.‰€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4Use the Paper Texture drop down box to select a surface type. The Paper Texture options simulate a variety of surface textures on the target area.5Select the "Sample Merged" check box to clone all visible data rather than just one layer. If the check box is not selected, only the data on the active layer when the source point was defined will be cloned. 6Click the Brush Tip tab to bring it to the front./šIPM‡ ܀Q€PÈ:„3€H€ƒƒ€æ-/e‰€‰€æÎ2þ³€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæÇÜT€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ€€‚€ƒ€€ƒ€‚ÿ7Use the Shape drop down box to select a brush shape. The choices are round, square, vertical, horizontal, right slash, and left slash.8Select a brush size in pixels by moving the Size slider. 9Set the opacity of the paint by moving the Opacity slider. 10Set the density of the paint by moving the Density slider. 11Set the hardness of the brush edge by moving the Hardness slider.'õ!KwN2 2€ë€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ€ÿ12Set the size of the brush step by moving the Step slider. Step controls the spacing of the discrete drops of paint, or how frequently the brush tip touches the image during a stroke. It is a percentage of the diameter of the brush tip. 1PMšN1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿšNñNIwNñN* $€>€PÈ:„3€H€‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Clone BrushY(šNJO1Ž£ ÿÿÿÿJO²O†Using the Clone BrushSaveMark(`SubWin')8ñN‚O* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿClone Brush0JO²O, (€ €€†"€–‚ÿC‚O €+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Clone Brush²O €ñNU²O€, (€¬€€‡"€‚ÿ When using two images, make sure they are of equal color depth before you begin.iÀ €ö‚© €PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÔeñi€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæès–'€‰€æÓ7.‰€‰€‚ÿ1If you want to copy into a specific layer or area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply color within the selection or on the layer. 2Click the Clone brush button on the Tool palette. 3Position the cursor over the part of the image that you want to copy. 4Either + click or click with the secondary mouse button. Your computer will beep to indicate that you have selected the source area. ³€…i  €g€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæÓ7.‰€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÊ €‰€æÇÜT€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Move the cursor to where you will start copying. The target area can be within the same image, or in another image of the same color depth. 6Press and hold the primary mouse button. Crosshairs will appear over the source area. The crosshairs indicate which pixel you are copying. Paint Shop Pro will start copying to the target area. 7Move the mouse to copy color from the source area to the target area. ôšö‚†L f€Q€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒï«Ë™€‰€‚ÿ8When you're done copying, release the mouse button. 9To resume copying, start over at step 5. Where the source area will be depends on the clone mode. 1…7†1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ7†o†š†8†o†' €"€° €‚ÿColor Replacer97†š†* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1o†ن1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿنÿÿÿÿ,‡S,š†,‡' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Color Replacer Optionsf5ن’‡1kÿÿÿÿ€ !’‡ý‡7Setting the Color Replacer OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin');,‡͇* $€"€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿColor Replacer0’‡ý‡, (€ €€†"€—‚ÿP%͇Mˆ+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Color Replacer Optionshý‡[ŠŠ Ñ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ a+õ€‰€æp3gW€‰€攏à䀉€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÎ2þ³€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Color Replacer button on the Tool palette. If the Control Palette is visible, it will display the Color Replacer's options. 2If the Control Palette isn't visible, display it now. 3Use the Shape Drop Down Box to select a brush shape. 4 Use the Size slider to set the Color Replacer's width in pixels.(ÅMˆƒŒc ”€‹€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ€€‚€ƒ€ƒ€€‚€ƒ€€ƒ€‚ÿ5Set the opacity of the paint by moving the Opacity slider. 6Set the density of the paint by moving the Density slider. 7Set the hardness of the brush edge by moving the Hardness slider.8Set the size of the brush step by moving the Step slider. Step controls the spacing of the discrete drops of paint, or how frequently the brush tip touches the image during a stroke. It is a percentage of the diameter of the brush tip. ‡*[Š ] ˆ€U€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæüCހ‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ÿ9Click the Tool Controls tab to bring it to the front.10Use the Tolerance Spin Control to set the color tolerance. The tolerance setting determines how close a color must be to the target color in order to be replaced. The scale is 0 to 200, with 0 being no tolerance (a perfect color match), and 100 being a tolerance of roughly half the spectrum. 11Use the Paper Texture drop down box to select a surface type. The textures simulate a variety of surfaces and make it look as though you were painting on paper with that texture.-ƒŒ7* $€€PÈ:„3€H€‚ÿ1 h1†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿhÿÿÿÿœU.7œ' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Replacing All Occurrences of a Colorh7h1À1œ!ł!1À¡ÀpÄReplacing All Occuœ1Àœrrences of a ColorSaveMark(`SubWin')@œqÀ- *€&€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Color Replacer01À¡À, (€ €€†"€˜‚ÿR'qÀóÀ+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿReplacing All Occurrences of a Color s¡Àþ˜ þ€ç€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ a+õ€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use. The Color Replacer can replace the background color with the foreground color or vice-versa. 2If you want to replace colors within a specific area or layer, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only replace colors within the selection or layer. 3Click the Color Replacer button on the Tool palette. g5óÀeÃ2 4€j€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4Double-click anywhere in the image. Use the: ²þÂpÄY €€i€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to replace the background color with the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to replace the foreground color with the background color. 1eáÄ1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¡ÄÿÿÿÿòÄQ*pÄòÄ' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting with the Color Replacerd3¡ÄVÅ1l€ !’†! VÅÆÅËPainting with the Color ReplacerSaveMark(`SubWin')@òÄ–Å- *€&€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Color Replacer0VÅÆÅ, (€ €€†"€™‚ÿN#–ÅÆ+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting with the Color Replacer(ÆÅ<Ș þ€!€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ a+õ€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use. The Color Replacer can replace the background color with the foreground color or vice-versa. 2If you want to replace color within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only replace color within the selection. 3Click the Color Replacer button on the Tool palette and configure its options on the Control palette. ™^ÆÕÈ; F€Œ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4Place the cursor where you want to start replacing a color. 5Press and hold the: ²<ÈàÉY €€i€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to replace the background color with the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to replace the foreground color with the background color. mDÕÈMÊ) "€ˆ€Ȅ3€H€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will replace the appropriate color at the cursor. Ž|àÉË8 @€ø€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ6Drag the mouse to replace the color where the brush touches it.7Release the mouse button to end a brush stroke. 1MÊ2Ë1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ 2Ëÿÿÿÿ‰ËW0ˉË' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting Lines with the Color Replaceri82ËòË1œł!ÿÿÿÿ òËbÌwDrawing Lines with the Color ReplacerSaveMark(`SubWin')@‰Ë2Ì- *€&€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Color Replacer0òËbÌ, (€ €€†"€š‚ÿ]22Ì¿Ì+ &€d€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting Straight Lines with the Color Replacer)ˆbÌèΡ €PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ a+õ€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use for making s straight line. 2If you want to draw within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only replace colors within the selection. 3Click the Color Replacer button on the Tool palette and configure its options on the Control palette.4Click where you want to start making straight brush strokes. ˆ¿Ì³ÏE X€ €PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Press and hold the key. 6Position the cursor where you want to end the first line segment. 7Click with the: ²èÎÊY €€i€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæè³ÏʉËs–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to replace the background color with the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to replace the foreground color with the background color. ­~³Ïw/ .€ü€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ8You can continue adding line segments by clicking with either mouse button. When you're done, release the key. 1Êš1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ šß7wß' € €° €‚ÿRetouch Tool 9š* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ßI1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ IÿÿÿÿšQ*š' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Retouch Tool Optionsd3Iþ1sÿÿÿÿ²"þg© Setting the Retouch Tool OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')9š7* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿRetouch Tool0þg, (€ €€†"€›‚ÿN#7µ+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Retouch Tool OptionsÍg‚² 27€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ§ö%„€‰€æp3gW€‰€æ×f+6€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ[üix€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æüCހ‰€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Retouch button on the Tool palette. If the Control Palette is visible, it will display the Retouch tool's options. 2If the Control Palette isn't visible, display it now. 3On the Tool Controls tab, use the Retouch Mode drop down box to select the effect that you want to apply. 4Use the Paper Texture drop down box to select a surface type. The Paper Texture options simulate a variety of surface textures. Use the Size spin control to set the Retouch tool's size in pixels. ‰.µ [ „€]€TŒÈ:„7€H€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÎ2þ³€‰€‚ÿ5Select the "Sample Merged" check box to apply the retouch affect to the image as a whole. If the check box is not selected, only the data on the active layer will be affected.6Click the Brush Tip tab to bring it to the front7Use the Shape drop down box to select a brush shape.žC‚© [ „€‡€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæt6b뀉€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚‚ÿ8Select a brush size by dragging the Size slider.9Drag the Opacity slider to set the tool's opacity. 10Set the hardness of the brush edge by dragging the Hardness slider.11Set the size of the brush step by sliding the Step slider. For best results in the Smudge and Push modes, set the Step to 1.1 Ú 1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÚ ÿÿÿÿ) O(© ) ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting with the Retouch Toolb1Ú ‹ 1áÇ"‰"‹ ô €Painting with the Retouch ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')9) Ä * $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿRetouch Tool0‹ ô , (€ €€†"€œ‚ÿL!Ä @ + &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting with the Retouch ToolF™ô † ­ (3€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒï¿7˜}€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ§ö%„€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÊ €‰€‚ÿ1If you want to apply the effect within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply the effect within the selection. 2It's generally a good idea to zoom in on the part of the image that you want to retouch. 3Click the Retouch button on the Tool palette. 4Press and hold the primary mouse button. Paint Shop Pro will apply the effect at the cursor. Ò@ €L f€¥€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïòÐŽœ€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Drag the mouse to apply the retouch effect. If the effect isn't applying fast enough, increase the opacity setting and start over at Step 3. 6Release the mouse button to end the Retouch stroke.1† Õ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÕÿÿÿÿ3^7€3' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting Straight Lines with the Retouch Toolg6Õš1ó²"ÿÿÿÿš@®CDrawing Lines with the Retouch ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')93Ó* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿRetouch Tool0š@, (€ €€†"€‚ÿÓ@3[0Ój@+ &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting Straight Lines with the Retouch Tool{@†B¡ ÷€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒï¿7˜}€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ§ö%„€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1If you want to apply the effect within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply the effect within the selection. 2It's generally a good idea to zoom in on the part of the image that you want to retouch. 3Click the Retouch button in the Tool palette and configure its options.4Click where you want to start retouching. (ãj@®CE X€Ç€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Press and hold the key. 6Click where you want to end the first line segment. 7You can continue applying the effect in line segments by clicking on the image. When you're done, release the key. 1†BßC1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿßCDID1 ®CD' €€° €‚ÿEraser 9ßCID* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1DzD1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿzDÿÿÿÿÅDK$IDÅD' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Eraser Options^-zD#E1`ÿÿÿÿŒ‡"#E†EµKSetting the Eraser OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')3 ÅDVE* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEraser0#E†E, (€ €€†"€ž‚ÿHVEÎE+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Eraser OptionsUŠ†E#H¯ ,M€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæÍ&(€‰€æp3gW€‰€æ÷ÈHª€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÎ2þ³€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Eraser button on the Tool palette. If the Control palette is visible, it will display the Eraser's options. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now. 3If necessary, click the Brush Tip tab on the Control palette to bring it forward 4Use the Shape Drop Down Box to select a brush shape. 5Use the Size slider to set the Eraser's size in pixels. V ÎEyJK d€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ6Use the Opacity slider to set the brush's opacity. The opacity setting determines how much of the effect will be removed. The scale is 1 to 100, with 1 leaving the effect almost as is, and 100 removing all of the effect. 7Set the density of the Eraser by dragging the Density slider.8Set the hardness of the edge by dragging the Hardness slider.9Set the size of the Eraser step by moving the Step slider. At 100%, the brush shape is clearly defined; as the step decreases, the strokes appear smoother.<ó#HµKI `€ç€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚‚ÿ10If you want to select a paper texture, bring the Tool Controls tab to the front by clicking it.11Use the Paper Texture drop down box to select a surface type. The Paper Texture options simulate a variety of surface textures.1yJæK1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿæKÿÿÿÿ/LI"µK/L' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting with the Eraser\+æK‹L1˂">‰"‹LîL×NPainting with the EraserSaveMark(`SubWin')3 /LŸL* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEraser0‹LîL, (€ €€†"€Ÿ‚ÿFŸL4M+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting with the Eraser£(îL×N{ ĀQ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæÍ&(€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæÊ €‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Eraser button on the Tool palette and set its options on the Control palette.2Place the cursor where you want to start erasing. 3Press and hold the primary mouse button. 4Drag the mouse to erase.5Release the mouse button to end the Eraser stroke.14MO1‰ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿOÿÿÿÿ`OX1×N`O' €b€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting Straight Lines with the Erasera0OÁO1dŒ‡"ÿÿÿÿÁO<€o‚Drawing Lines with the EraserSaveMark(`SubWin')3 `O €* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿEraserÁO €`O0ÁO<€, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿU* €‘€+ &€T€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting Straight Lines with the EraserÞo<€o‚o ¬€ß€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæÍ&(€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Eraser button on the Tool palette and configure its options on the Control palette.2Click where you want to start erasing. 3Press and hold the key. 4Click where you want to end the first line segment. 5You can continue erasing in line segments by clicking on the image. When you're done, release the key. 1‘€ ‚1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ‚ӂ ƒ3 o‚ӂ' €€° €‚ÿAirbrush 9 ‚ ƒ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ӂ=ƒ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ=ƒÿÿÿÿŠƒM& ƒŠƒ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Airbrush Options`/=ƒêƒ1Íÿÿÿÿ5#êƒO„ë‰Setting the Airbrush OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')5 Šƒ„* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿAirbrush0êƒO„, (€ €€†"€¡‚ÿJ„™„+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Airbrush OptionsIšO„↯ ,5€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒææ€‰€æp3gW€‰€æuhÑo€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÎ2þ³€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Airbrush button on the Tool palette. If the Control Palette is visible, it will display the Airbrush's options. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now. 3If necessary, click the Brush Tip tab to bring it to the front.4Use the Shape drop down box to select a brush shape. 5Use the Size slider to set the Airbrush's size in pixels. @Ý™„"‰c ”€»€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæt6b뀉€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ6Set the opacity by dragging the Opacity slider.7Set the density of the paint by dragging the Density slider. 8Set the hardness of the brush edge by dragging the Hardness slider.9Set the size of the brush step by sliding the Step slider. At 100%, the brush shape is clearly defined; as the step decreases, the strokes appear smoother and more dense.10If you want to select a paper texture, bring the Tool Controls tab to the front by clicking it.Ɍâ†ë‰= H€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚‚ÿ11Use the Paper Texture drop down box to select a surface type. The Paper Texture options simulate a variety of surface textures.1"‰Š1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŠÿÿÿÿgŠK$ë‰gŠ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting with the Airbrush^-ŠŊ1Rß#€#Ŋ/‹PPainting with the AirbrushSaveMark(`SubWin'): gŠÿŠ- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Airbrush0Ŋ/‹, (€ €€†"€¢‚ÿHÿŠw‹+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPainting with the AirbrushùO/‹pª "Ÿ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒææ€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to paint with. 2If you want to paint within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply color within the selection. 3Click the Airbrush button on the Tool palette. 4Position the cursor where you want to start painting. 5Press and hold the: Òzw‹BŽX €€ø€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to apply the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to apply the background color. Y0p›Ž) "€`€Ȅ3€H€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will add color at the cursor. µzBŽP; F€ô€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ6Drag the mouse to apply color to the rest of the image.7When you're done painting, release the mouse button. 1›Ž1‹ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÀZ3P À' €f€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Painting Straight Lines with the Airbrush ÀPc2oÀ1€5#ÿÿÿÿ oÀÙÀLÅDrawing Lines with the AirbrushSaveMark(`SubWin'): À©À- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Airbrush0oÀÙÀ, (€ €€†"€£‚ÿM"©À&Á+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDrawing Lines with the Airbrush jÙÀ1á Õ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒææ€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use for painting. 2If you want to paint within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only replace colors within the selection. 3Click the Airbrush button on the Tool palette and set its options on the Control palette.4Click the image where you want to start painting lines. œd&ÁÍÃ8 @€È€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ5Press and hold the key. 6Click where you want to end the line segment. Use the: Òz1ßÄX €€ø€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to apply the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to apply the background color. ­~ÍÃLÅ/ .€ü€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ7You can continue adding line segments by clicking with either mouse button. When you're done, release the key. 1ŸÄ}Å1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ!}űÅêÅ4 LűÅ' €€° €‚ÿFill Tool 9}ÅêÅ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1±ÅÆ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ"ÆÿÿÿÿhÆM&êÅhÆ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Standard Options`/ÆÈÆ1<ÿÿÿÿ6‰##ÈÆ.Ç9ÏSetting the Standard OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')6 hÆþÆ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFill Tool0ÈÆ.Ç, (€ €€†"€€‚ÿJþÆxÇ+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Standard Optionsgš.ÇßÉ¿ LQ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæÞ»0/€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ3AL(`Fill Tool - additional configuration options')€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Flood Fill button on the Tool palette. If the Control palette is visible, the Tool Controls tab will display the tool's options. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now and bring the Tool Controls tab to the front.3Use the Fill Style drop down box to select the type of fill that you want to perform. 4Every fill style has additional configuration options. ŽjxÇ“ÊJ d€Ô€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ5Use the Match Mode drop down box to select a method for determining which pixels to fill: ,µßÉ¿Ëw Œ€s€PـVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï`^ÁG €‰€‚†"€ƒï`^ÁG €‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿRGB Value method selects matching RGB valuesHue Method selects matching hue valuesBrightness Method selects matching luminance valuesNone overwrites all pixels7Ñ“ÊöÍf š€£€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæüCހ‰€æÇÜT€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæüCހ€€‰€‚ÿ6Use the Tolerance spin control to set the fill tolerance. The fill tolerance setting determines how close the color of a pixel must be to the color of the selected pixel in order to be overwritten. The spin control uses a scale of 0 to 200, with 0 being no tolerance (only pixels with a perfect match will be filled), and 200 being total tolerance (all pixels will be filled). 7Use the Opacity spin control to set the opacity of the fill.C ¿Ë9Ï6 :€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒƒ‚ÿ8Select the "Sample Merged" check box to have the Match Mode selection use to the entire image. Leave the check box blank to limit it to the active layer.9Click the Options button to open the Fill Flood Options dialog box, where you configure each fill style.1öÍjÏ1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ$jÏÿÿÿÿ°ÏF9Ï°Ï' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Pattern Style OptionsY(jÏ1˜>ƒ#q$%{âPattern Style OptionsSaveMark(°Ï°Ï`SubWin')6 °ÏK* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFill Tool0{, (€ €€†"€¥‚ÿBKœ+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPattern Fill Optionsä{Ï. *€Ë€€‡"€‚‚ÿ Pattern Fills can only be performed on 24-bit color or on grey scale images.The pattern fill style requires that you select a pattern source. When you use the fill tool, the fill area is covered with the selected pattern. …ßœTŠ ¿€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ÿ1You can use an entire image or part of an image as a pattern source. If the image that you want to use isn't open, open it now. 2If you want to use part of the image as the pattern source, select it now. 3Click the Control palette’s Options button. Paint Shop Pro will open the Flood Fill Options dialog box. 4Use the New Pattern Source drop down box to select the image that you want to use. You can use the current selection or any open image.Ž_Ïâ/ .€Ÿ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ5Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and save the new pattern. 1T1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ&ÿÿÿÿ`M&â`' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Linear Gradient Fill Optionsa0Á1®6‰# $'Á'€ Linear Gradient Style OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')6 `÷* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFill Tool0Á', (€ €€†"€Š‚ÿJ÷q+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLinear Gradient Fill Optionsçž'X/ ,€s€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ Linear Gradient Fills can only be performed on 24-bit color or on grey scale images.The Linear Gradient from one color to another in any one direction. To set the fill options: GðqŸW |€á€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ2á«Y€‰€‚€ƒƒ€€‚ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Select foreground and background colors for the gradient.2Click the Control palette's Options button. Paint Shop Pro will open the Gradient Fill Options box. 3Select a blend mode.4Set the blend direction. You can: u4X A P€m€PـVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿUse the Direction control. Click anywhere in the circle, or use the mouse to drag the control's needle. The display box at right will show an example of the selected fill. Use the Degrees text box. Double-click in the text box to access it, then type in the number of degrees. The range is 0 to 360. aŸ€ / .€Â€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ5Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and save the angle setting. 1 Õ 1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ(Õ ÿÿÿÿ' R+€ ' ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Non-Linear Gradient Style Optionse4Õ Œ 1[q$b€$)Œ ò ANon-Linear Gradient Style OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')6 '  * $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFill Tool0Œ ò , (€ €€†"€§‚ÿN# @ + &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿNon-Linear Gradient Fill Options²„ò ò . *€ €€‡"€‚‚ÿ Non-linear Gradient Fills can only be performed on 24-bit color or on grey scale images.The rectangular, sunburst, and radial gradient fill styles require that you set the gradient fill's origin. The origin is the point from which the gradient fill disperses or radiates. The foreground color will appear at the gradient's origin, and the background color will appear at its edges. „@ ‚@f š€=€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæÛ%†€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæÔ|/€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæÔ|/€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Control palette's Options button. Paint Shop Pro will open the Gradient Fill Origin options box. 2Use the Vertical slider or the Vertical text box to set the distance between the top edge of the fill area and the gradient origin. The distance is measured as a percentage of the fill area's height. 3Use the Horizontal slider or the Horizontal text box to set the distance between the lefò ‚@' t edge of the fill area and the gradient origin. The distance is measured as a percentage of the fill area's width. ‘bò A/ .€Ä€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ4Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and save the origin setting. W&‚@jA1Ä $$*jAÐAcCSolid Color OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')6 A A* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFill Tool0jAÐA, (€ €€†"€š‚ÿE AB+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSolid Color Fill OptionNóÐAcC[ „€ç€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒçows€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚‚ÿ1Select a foreground or background fill color.2Click the Options button on the Tool Controls tab. The Flood Fill Options dialog box opens. 3Select a blend mode.4Click OK to close the dialog box and save the settings.1B”C1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ+”CÿÿÿÿØCDcCØC' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Fill ToolW&”C/D1jb€$ÿÿÿÿ,/DšDÓHUsing the Fill ToolSaveMark(`SubWin');ØCjD- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Fill Tool0/DšD, (€ €€†"€©‚ÿAjDÛD+ &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Fill Tool2„šD G® * €PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæp3gW€‰€ïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to fill with, if you haven’t already done so.2Select the layer to be covered with the fill.3If you want to fill within a specific area, select it now. Paint Shop Pro will only apply color within the selection. 4If the Tool palette isn't visible, display it now. 5Click the Flood Fill button in the Tool palette. …JÛD’G; F€”€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ6Position the cursor where you want to fill. 7Click with the: Aè GÓHY €€Õ€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to fill with the foreground color or to start the gradient with the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to fill with the background color or to start the gradient with the background color. 1’GI1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ-I7IpI3 ÓH7I' €€° €‚ÿText Tool9IpI* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More17I¡I1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ.¡IÿÿÿÿóIR+pIóI' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Text Tool: Steps 1 to 5e4¡IXJ1ÿÿÿÿü%/XJÃJªUsing the Text Tool: Steps 1 to 5SaveMark(`SubWin');óI“J- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Text Tool0XJÃJ, (€ €€†"€ª‚ÿO$“JK+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Text Tool: Steps 1 to 5D ÃJVL$ €A€€‚ÿWhen adding text to an image, you can create it as a standard or floating selection. For a floating selection, you determine the color before adding the text—the current foreground color becomes the text color. For a standard selection, the text is the color of the area it appears in.SÅK©NŽ ꀋ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ”—”©€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæôY€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚ÿ1If you want the text to appear as a color, select the one you want to use now. 2Click the Text button on the Tool palette. 3Click the image where you want the text to appear. Paint Shop Pro will open the Add Text dialog box. 4There are three font properties: Name (typeface), Style, and Size. Set each property by clicking on an entry in the appropriate list box. Use the scrollbars to move through the lists. w9VL O> L€r€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ„Û׀‰€‚ÿ5Set the three text effect check box options: q©N‘O_#Ž€$l$Œ€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ$€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ€‚ÿ€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ‚ÿÿÿEffectResult‰/ O&€Z#„€^l$Œ€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿStrikeoutPlaces a‘O&€óI line through the text. s,‘O™€G#^€Xl$Œ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿUnderlinePlaces a line under the text. ê¢&€ƒH#^€El$Œ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿAnti-aliasSoftens jagged character edges by using shades of the text's color. Only available for 256 color grey scale and for color depths greater than 256. '™€ª$ €€j€‚ÿ1ƒہ1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ0ہÿÿÿÿ-‚R+ª-‚' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Text Tool: Steps 6 to 9e4ہ’‚1|Ą$ÿÿÿÿ1’‚ý‚HˆUsing the Text Tool: Steps 6 to 9SaveMark(`SubWin');-‚͂- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Text Tool0’‚ý‚, (€ €€†"€«‚ÿO$͂Lƒ+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Text Tool: Steps 6 to 9ü«ý‚H…Q p€W€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ„Û׀‰€‚ÿ6Click an alignment option in the Alignment group box. The alignment determines how multiple lines of text align with each other. The text is always centered horizontally and vertically on the point you click in the image.7Type the text you want to add into the large text box labeled "Enter Text Here." You access the text by clicking in it or by pressing  + . 8Set the Floating check box option. ®=Lƒö†q °€€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÁù§€‰€ï¹æž€‰€‚†"€ƒï¹æž€‰€‚ÿIf you select the option, the text will appear in the foreground color, and will be in a floating selection. If you leave the check box blank, the text will be created as a standard selection. The selection will contain the colors that appear in the image at the place where the text was created. RH…Hˆ= H€-€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚‡"€‚ÿ9Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and add the text to the image. The text will be selected. You can move the text by dragging its selection. To add the text to an existing selection, hold down the key while clicking the OK button.1ö†yˆ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ2yˆ¬ˆåˆ3 Hˆ¬ˆ' €€° €‚ÿLine Tool9yˆåˆ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1¬ˆ‰1xÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ3‰ÿÿÿÿ]‰G åˆ]‰' €@€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Line WidthZ)‰·‰1 ÿÿÿÿ©%4·‰ŠøŒSetting the Line WidthSaveMark(`SubWin')6 ]‰í‰* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLine Tool0·‰Š, (€ €€†"€¬‚ÿFí‰cŠ+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Line Options•òŠøŒ£ å€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ±¥B€‰€æp3gW€‰€æ7›ò“€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæüCހ‰€æÇÜT€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Line button on the Tool palette. If the Control palette is visible, it will display the Line tool's options. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now. 3Select Normal or Bezier in the Line Type box.4Use the Width spin control to set the line's width in pixels. 5If you want the lines to be antialiased, select the Antialias check box. If not, leave the check box empty. Antialiasing makes the edges of lines appear smoother.1cŠ)1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ5)ÿÿÿÿmDøŒm' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Line ToolW&)č1M n%ÿÿÿÿ6č/ŽÇUsing the Line ToolSaveMark(`SubWin');mÿ- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Line Tool0č/Ž, (€ €€†"€­‚ÿAÿpŽ+ &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Line Toolˆ/ŽŒÀˆ ހ€PÈ:„3€H€‚€€‚‚ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ±¥B€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿThe Line tool can draw straight lines and Bezier curves.Straight LinesTo draw straight lines:1Select the colors that you want to draw with. 2Click the Line button on the Tool palette. 3Position the cursor where you want the line to pŽŒÀmstart. 4To draw the line at fixed angles in increments of 45°, press and hold the key. 5Press and hold the: ÒzpŽ^ÁX €€ø€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to apply the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to apply the background color. 厌ÀCÃW |€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚‚€€‚‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ6Drag the cursor to where you want the line to end. Paint Shop Pro will draw a light line between the starting point and the cursor. 7Release the mouse button. Paint Shop Pro will draw a line of the selected width and color between the two points. Bezier CurvesTo draw Bezier curves:1Position the cursor on the image where you want the line to begin.2Press and hold the: Òz^ÁÄX €€ø€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to apply the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to apply the background color. ÓCÃ$Å< F€§€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ3Drag the cursor to where you want to end the line, and release the mouse. A light line appears as you drag.4Create the curve by clicking the mouse away from the line and dragging to shape the curve.CÄgÆA P€ €P£€^ˆ$l¢Æ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo create a semi-circular curve, click the mouse where you want to position the top of the curve and drag to shape it. Click again when it is positioned.To create an "S" shaped curve, click and drag once on one side of the line and once on the other. n$ÅÇ2 4€Ü€PÈ:„%€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Click a second time to set the curve shape and apply the appropriate color at the selected line width.1gÆ8Ç1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ78ÇmÇŠÇ5ÇmÇ' €€° €‚ÿShape Tool 98ÇŠÇ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1mÇ×Ç1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ8×Çÿÿÿÿ&ÈO(ŠÇ&È' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Setting the Shape Tool Optionsb1×LjÈ1 ÿÿÿÿˆ%9ˆÈïÈËÌSetting the Shape Tool OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')7 &È¿È* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿShape Tool0ˆÈïÈ, (€ €€†"€®‚ÿL!¿È;É+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSetting the Shape Tool OptionsCïÈ~ËŠ ;€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæº/QҀ‰€æp3gW€‰€æh}Ûs€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒïi= ¶€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæüCހ‰€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿ1Click the Shape button on the Tool palette. If the Control palette is visible, it will display the Shape tool's options. 2If the Control palette isn't visible, display it now. 3Use the Shape drop down box to select a shape to draw. Select square, rectangle, circle, or ellipse. 4 Use the Line spin control to set the width of the shape's boundary line in pixels.M;ÉËÌH ^€ €PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Use the Style drop down box to select whether the shape is outlined or filled. 6If you want the lines to be antialiased, select the "Antialias" check box. If not, leave the check box empty. Antialiasing makes the edges of lines appear smoother.1~ËüÌ1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ:üÌÿÿÿÿAÍEËÌAÍ' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Shape ToolX'üÌ™Í1Ã…%ÿÿÿÿ;™ÍΔUsing the Shape ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')<AÍÕÍ- *€€ˆˆ„€:€€‚ÿ Shape Tool0™ÍÎ, (€ €€†"€¯‚ÿBÕÍGÎ+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Shape Tool¬*Î ‚ ҀU€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæº/QҀ‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ „7o€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the colors that you want to use for drawing. 2Click the Shape button on the Tool palette. 3Point the cursor's crosshairs at any corner of the square or rectangle that you want to draw and the center point for the circle or ellipse.4Press and hold the: GÎ AÍ݄GÎéY €€ €PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to draw using the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to draw using the background color. «o ”< F€ß€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ5Drag the cursor to create the shape. To draw a rectangle or a square, drag from one corner to the opposite corner. To draw a circle or an ellipse, drag from the center outward. As you move the cursor, an outline of the shape appears.6When the outline is the size you want, release the mouse button. The shape appears configured with the selected options.1éÅ1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ<ÿÿÿÿÅë&”ë# €€€‚ÿ1Å1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ=UŽ9ëU' €$€° €‚ÿTroubleshooting9Ž* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1U¿1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ>¿ÿÿÿÿI"Ž' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Troubleshooting Overview\+¿d1¢ÿÿÿÿ~&?dÐATroubleshooting OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')< * $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTroubleshooting0dÐ, (€ €€†"€°‚ÿF + &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿTroubleshooting Overview+ÐA* "€€€€!€‚ÿThis section contains answers to the most common technical support questions. Refer to the README.DOC file in your Paint Shop Pro folder to see if there are any additional questions and answers that were not available when this help file was published.1r1hÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ@rÿÿÿÿ©7A©' € €° €‚ÿTOPIC: ColorsJró1ç ;&i&Aó_ŒBColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')<©/* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTroubleshooting0ó_, (€ €€†"€±‚ÿ4 /“+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿColors}O_ . *€¡€€‡"€‚‚ÿIf your video card supports higher color resolutions, installing a video driver that supports more colors should improve your image display quality. To determine your current display resolution, choose About Paint Shop Pro from the Help menu, and then click the System Info button at the bottom of the screen. In the System Information list, scroll to the Video Driver Information section. Look at the line marked "Number of Colors." It shows the number of colors that your display supports. For help changing your video driver, consult the documentation that came with your video card.E “U % €@€" œ€‚ÿColors in an image are wrong.? ” $ €7€€‚ÿWhen Windows is running a 256 color display driver, it reserves 20 colors for its own use. This lowers an image’s palette to 236 colors (256 - 20 = 236) plus the 20 fixed Windows colors. If the color in the image is not in the palette, it is replaced by the nearest color that is.CU × % €<€" œ€‚ÿImage is grainy or mottled. å” à $ €Ë€€‚ÿIf your images are mottled or grainy, your video card or driver probably does not support enough colors to show the image correctly. For help changing your video driver, consult the documentation that came with the video card.(×  % €€‘€€‚ÿ™uà ¡$ €ë€€‚ÿThe graininess is caused by dithering, a technique for simulating colors that are missing from an image file’s palette. Paint Shop Pro maintains the original, un-dithered image in memory. If you edit the image, the change is applied to the original and a new dithered image is created. This allows you to work with images that are beyond the limits of your video system.b= % €z€" œ€‚ÿWallpaper colors change as different images are displayed.Ï«¡Þ@$ €W€€‚ÿWhen Windows is running a 256 color display driver, it reserves 20 colors for its own use. This lowers an image’s palette to 236 colors (256 - 20 = 236) that Paint Shop Pro can optimize to display an image. Paint ShoÞ@©p Pro alters the common palette that is being used by the wallpaper, and for that matter, the entire screen. Once Paint Shop Pro or the offending image is closed, the wallpaper’s colors will return to normal.d?BA% €~€" œ€‚ÿNo preferences are available for setting transparent colors.JÞ@ŒB0 .€5€€çÄǘ€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro 5 includes a new way to create a transparent background. Instead of assigning preferences for certain file types (i.e., GIF and PNG), you assign a transparent value to a color in the image palette. See the Working with Colors help topic for more information.1BAœB1hÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿBœBÿÿÿÿôB7ŒBôB' € €° €‚ÿTOPIC: MemoryJœB>C16~&ª„&C>CªC¯KMemorySaveMark(`SubWin')<ôBzC* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTroubleshooting0>CªC, (€ €€†"€²‚ÿ4 zCÞC+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMemoryR-ªC0D% €Z€" œ€‚ÿEditing image causes memory error message.úÞCNE$ €õ€€‚ÿDepending on its size and resolution, an image may require substantial amounts of memory to be displayed, and even more memory to be edited. The following example shows how the memory requirements of an image escalate as its color depth increases.·90DF~#̀rRJiŠ‘€€Ôq˜€‚ÿ€€Ôq˜‚ÿ€ €Ôq˜‚ÿ€8€Ôq˜‚ÿ€T€Ôq˜‚ÿÿÿHeightWidthBits/PixelDisplay (KB)Max Edit (KB)¡NEŠF‡#ހ4RJiŠ‘€€ q˜ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€(€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿ8006001 59 176”F:Gy#€6RJiŠ‘€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€ €ÔqŒ‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€(€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿ8006008 4691,406–ŠFÐGy#€:RJiŠ‘€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€ €ÔqŒ‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€,€ÔqŒ‚ÿÿÿ800600241,4064,219':G÷G$ €€j€‚ÿ¢ÐG™H# €þ€€‚ÿAdding layers also increases the image’s memory requirements. Here’s what happens when layers are added to the 24-bit image:(÷GÁH% €€‘€€‚ÿ€$™HeI€#ЀH©Mçj7?&?&€€Ôq˜€‚ÿ€€Ôq˜‚ÿ€ €Ôq˜‚ÿ€€Ôq˜‚ÿ€*€Ôq˜‚ÿÿÿDisplay (MB)Max Edit (MB)ÜÁHAJœ#J>©Mçj7?&?&€€ q˜ÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€ € qŒÿ€€Ôq4Œ5Ȃö‚ÿ€"€ q4Œ5Ȃöÿ€$€Ôq$ŒÖ‚ÿ€0€ q$ŒÖÿ€2€Ôq$Œä‚ÿÿÿ2 layers3.2 9.6 ÑeIKµ#:8©Mçj7?&?&€€ q$Œäÿ€€ÔqŒ€‚ÿ€€ÔqŒ‚ÿ€ € qŒÿ€€Ôq$ŒÈ‚ÿ€"€ q$ŒÈÿ€$€Ôq$ŒÖ‚ÿ€,€ q$ŒÖÿ€.€Ôq$Œä‚ÿÿÿ3 layers5 15 wAJ¯K& €î€€‚‚‚‚ÿRemember that editing an image may require up to three times the amount of memory required to display the image. 1KàK1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿDàKÿÿÿÿL;¯KL' €(€° €‚ÿTOPIC: OperationsNàKiL1i&oMEiLÕL>ŒOperationsSaveMark(`SubWin')<L¥L* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTroubleshooting0iLÕL, (€ €€†"€³‚ÿ8 ¥L M+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOperationsG"ÕLTM% €D€" œ€‚ÿSome functions are unavailable.T1 MšM# €b€€‚ÿFunctions can be unavailable for two reasons: BTMêM& €8€2 ºœ€‚ÿInsufficient Color Depth !ðšM O1 0€á€º€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿSome functions create new pixel values that may not exist in the original image. Only 24-bits-per-pixel images and 8-bits-per-pixel grey scale images have the required internal structure to hold any and all of these new pixel values.I#êMTO& €F€2 ºœ€‚ÿNo Selection in the Active Image¡} O €$ €ú€º€‚ÿSome functions require a selection. If the active image does not contain a selection, the function will not be available. TO €Lb=TOn€% €z€" œ€‚ÿProgram becomes unstable when attempting to print images. úÔ €h‚& €©€€‚‚‚ÿYou will be unable to print an image if your Windows temporary folder does not have enough room to hold the image file. Something may terminate: it could be Windows or it could be Paint Shop Pro. We at Jasc Software firmly believe that it is a bad idea to use a RAM drive as your Windows temporary folder. The allocated memory goes to waste, and it constrains the size of your temporary folder. For more help, contact your hardware support provider or personnel. fAn€΂% €‚€" œ€‚ÿCan't use scanner: Acquire and Select Source are unavailable. 9÷h‚…B R€ï€€€"€€#€€$€ç˜c–选€‚ÿIf the "Acquire" and "Select Source" selections on the File Menu are unavailable, Paint Shop Pro could not find a copy of TWAIN_32.DLL on your system. Check to see if TWAIN_32.DLL is installed in your Windows folder. If it isn't, try reinstalling your device software. Make sure you turn on any options that pertain to TWAIN drivers. If TWAIN_32.DLL is still missing, contact the device manufacturer. For more information on TWAIN-compliant devices, see the Creating Image Files help topic.&΂-…# €€€‚ÿfA…“…% €‚€" œ€‚ÿCertain file types launch Paint Shop Pro, while others do not.U%-…è‡0 .€K€€ç2+€‰€‚ÿIf a file’s extension is associated with Paint Shop Pro, you can open the file by double-clicking the filename in Windows Explorer. If Paint Shop Pro is not running, double-clicking the filename will also start, or launch, the program. Associated file types use the Paint Shop Pro image file icon. To select file types to be associated with Paint Shop Pro, set the File Associations preferences. If you are not sure which file types to associate with Paint Shop Pro, you can accept the default settings of the File Associations dialog box.(“…ˆ% €€‘€€‚ÿ>è‡Nˆ% €2€" œ€‚ÿMasks are not visible.îˆ`‰$ €Ý€€‚ÿIf you create a mask and it is not visible on the screen, click the View menu and make sure View Masks is checked. If it is not checked, click it to turn View Masks on. To turn off View Masks, click it again to remove the check mark.(Nˆˆ‰% €€‘€€‚ÿ>`‰Ɖ% €2€" œ€‚ÿMask cannot be edited.àŒˆ‰ŠŠ$ €y€€‚ÿIf you are trying to edit a mask and do not see the expected results, you may be editing the image instead of the mask. Choose Edit from the Mask menu and then try making your changes.N)ƉôŠ% €R€" œ€‚ÿPainting produces no apparent results.J#ŠŠ>Œ' €G€€‚‚‚‚ÿMake sure the current layer is not obscured by another layer by clicking the Layers menu. The current layer is indicated by a check mark. If you are using a pressure-sensitive tablet, make sure it is operating properly. Consult the user’s manual for your tablet for more information.1ôŠoŒ1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿFÿÿÿÿoŒ•Œ&>Œ•Œ# €€€‚ÿ1oŒƌ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿGƌûŒ45•ŒûŒ' €€° €‚ÿUsing Masks9ƌ4* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1ûŒe1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿHeÿÿÿÿ€?4€' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Masks OverviewR!eö1òÿÿÿÿ€'Iö^Ž+ÀMasks OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')8€.Ž* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0ö^Ž, (€ €€†"€Ž‚ÿ<.ŽšŽ+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMasks Overview…`^Ž+À% €Á€€‚‚ÿMasks enable you to hide and reveal parts of a layer and to apply special effects with precision. Masks can be created from selections, from images, from the luminance values of images, and from scratch. They can cover a layer completely or with varying levels of opacity. Because they are grey scale, masks can also bešŽ+À€ saved into alpha channels. 1šŽ\À1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿJ\ÀÿÿÿÿšÀ>+ÀšÀ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: CompatibilityQ \ÀëÀ1  'ô'KëÀSÁ.ÄCompatibilitySaveMark(`SubWin')8šÀ#Á* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0ëÀSÁ, (€ €€†"€µ‚ÿ;#ÁŽÁ+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCompatibility;SÁÉÁ% €,€" œ€‚ÿWith Other Featurese‡ŽÁ.ÄÞ Š€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒÌ&AL(`Painting and Drawing with Masks')€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒÌ!AL(`Color Functions with Masks')€‰€‚†"€ƒÌ"AL(`Image Processing with Masks')€‰€‚ÿMany of the Painting and Drawing Tools work with masks. Use them to edit the mask or change the unmasked area of the layer. You can load a selection as a mask.You can use the Color Functions to alter the unmasked area of an image. Many Image Processing features work with masks. You can either link the mask so it moves with a layer or move the layer independently.1ÉÁ_Ä1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿL_ÄÿÿÿÿŸÄ@.ÄŸÄ' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating a MaskS"_ÄòÄ1¶€'؂'MòÄZÅßÆCreating a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')8ŸÄ*Å* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0òÄZÅ, (€ €€†"€¶‚ÿ=*Å—Å+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a MaskL)ZÅãÅ# €R€€‚ÿThere are four ways to create a mask: üg—ÅßÆ• ú€Ö€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïæÁp*€‰€‚†"€ƒï`xÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒïÂK‰€‚†"€ƒï+/þ€‰€‚ÿFrom an imageFrom a selectionFrom a channelFrom the entire image or layer1ãÅÇ1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿNÇÿÿÿÿbÇR+ßÆbÇ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Viewing an Image Through Its Maske4ÇÇÇ1ûô'0„'OÇÇ/ÈùÉViewing an Image Through Its MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')8bÇÿÇ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0ÇÇ/È, (€ €€†"€·‚ÿ<ÿÇkÈ+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿViewing a MaskŠ‚/ÈÉ$ €€€‚ÿChoose the View Mask command from the View menu to see the mask using a ruby overlay. A check mark appears next to the command.è˜kÈùÉP n€5€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒï‡|ÑÀ‰€‚ÿTo return to normal viewing, choose View Mask again. Paint Shop Pro will remove the check mark. To view the mask alone, see Editing a Mask. 1É*Ê1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿP*ÊÿÿÿÿiÊ?ùÉiÊ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Editing a MaskR!*Ê»Ê1ì؂'(Q»Ê#Ë Editing a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')8iÊóÊ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0»Ê#Ë, (€ €€†"€ž‚ÿ<óÊ_Ë+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEditing a Mask|M#ËÛÌ/ ,€€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ Remember to choose the Edit command from the Masks menu before painting so that you edit the mask, not the image. When you edit a mask you change either the areas or the level of masking. For example, painting over an object to mask it changes the area, while making a Gradient Fill edits the level of masking. To edit a mask:__Ë:ÎE X€5€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose the View Mask command from the Mask menu to see the mask using the ruby overlay. A check mark appears next to the command.2Choose the Edit command from the Mask menu. A check mark appears next to the command.3Use the painting tools to alter the masked area:‹KÛÌÅÎ@ P€š€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPaint with white to remove masking.Paint with black to add masking.ó·:ΞÏ< F€o€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ4Paint with lighter and darker greys to add various levels of masking.5After you have finished editing the mask, choose Edit from the Mask menu. The check mark disappears.&ÅÎ # €€€‚ÿžÏ iÊ1žÏ=1‡ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿR=ÿÿÿÿ~A ~' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Inverting a MaskT#=Ò1u0„'.(SÒ:~Inverting a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')8~ * $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0Ò:, (€ €€†"€¹‚ÿ> x+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿInverting a MaskÕ:~1 0€«€€æ¶Ø&0€‰€‚‚ÿInverting a mask reverses its transparency: what is black becomes white, and what is white becomes black. Greys are assigned their mirror transparency. To invert a mask, choose Invert from the Masks menu. 1x¯1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿT¯ÿÿÿÿï@~ï' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Deleting a MaskS"¯B1<(º(UBªµ Deleting a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')8ïz* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0Bª, (€ €€†"€º‚ÿ=zç+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDeleting a Mask[7ªB$ €o€€‚ÿDeleting a mask from the layer and deleting it from the alpha channel are two separate functions. When deleting a mask from the layer, you can remove it or merge it into the image. Merging it makes it into a permanent part of the image. Deleting a mask from a layer does not delete it from the alpha channel.Dç†% €>€" œ€‚ÿDeleting a Mask from a LayerD!BÊ# €B€€‚ÿTo delete a mask from a layer:öœ†À9 @€{€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Delete from the Masks menu. You will be prompted to merge the mask with the layer.2Click No to remove the mask from the layer. Click Yes to merge the mask into the layer.(Êè% €€‘€€‚ÿN)À6% €R€" œ€‚ÿDeleting a Mask from the Alpha ChannelM*èƒ# €T€€‚ÿTo delete a mask from an alpha channel: ž6 T v€q€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Choose Load From Alpha Channel from the Masks menu. The Load From Alpha dialog box opens.2Select the image containing the mask to be deleted from the "Available Documents" list.3Select the mask to be deleted from the Available Alpha Masks list. The preview displays the selected mask.4Click the Delete button.5At the prompt message, click the Yes button. Paint Shop Pro closes the dialog box and deletes the mask.&ƒµ # €€€‚ÿ1 æ 1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿVæ ÿÿÿÿ/ I"µ / ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Saving and Loading Masks\+æ ‹ 1¿.(ÿÿÿÿW‹ ó Saving and Loading MasksSaveMark(`SubWin')8/ à * $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing Masks0‹ ó , (€ €€†"€»‚ÿFà 9 + &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSaving and Loading MasksV3ó  # €f€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro lets you save a mask in two ways:Ëk9 Z ` €Ú€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïø/Ú€‰€‚†"€ƒïÁê©£€‰€‚‚ÿAs a file on your disk drive with the ".msk" extensionAs an alpha channel within the imageE Ÿ& €?€€‚‚‚ÿWhen you save a selection in the ".msk" format on your disk drive, you save it as a separate file that Paint Shop Pro can later load as an image or mask.An alpha channel is a 256 grey scale channel that saves mask and selection information. When you save a mask as an alpha channel, you save it as a grey scale bitmap within the image. An advantage of the ".psp" format is that its files can hold alpha channels within the image. The ".tif" and ".tga" file formats can hold only one alpha channel; almost all the others will not hold any.M)Z ì$ €R€€‚‚ÿYou can load a previously saved mask:•6Ÿ_ Ž€p€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïݖvc€‰€‚†"€ƒï ™†²€‰€‚ÿFrom a Disk DriveFrom an Alpha Channel1ì²1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿX² @E@B @' €6€° €‚ÿSaving and Loading Masks² @9²E@* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1 @v@1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿYv@ÿÿÿÿŽ@>E@Ž@' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Saving a MaskQ v@A1ÿÿÿÿ7‚(ZAzAgDSaving a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')EŽ@JA* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSaving and Loading Masks0AzA, (€ €€†"€Œ‚ÿCJAœA+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSaving a Mask to DiskŠ‚zAcB$ €€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro has a mask file format, ".msk," that it uses to save a mask to the disk drive. To save a mask to the disk drive:×TœA:Dƒ Ԁ©€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒædGn€‰€‚€%ƒ€ƒï‘OŽ3€‰€ïy–ì³€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Choose Save to Disk from the Masks menu. The Save Mask Channel dialog box opens.2Select or create the folder in which you want to save your mask.3Type a file name for the mask in the File Name box.4Click OK.5The Save Mask Channel dialog box closes, and Paint Shop Pro saves the mask as a ".msk" file.-cBgD* $€€PÈ:„3€H€‚ÿQ :DžD1&€(`…([žD-EISaving a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')EgDýD* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSaving and Loading Masks0žD-E, (€ €€†"€œ‚ÿP%ýD}E+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSaving a Mask to the Alpha ChannelI&-EÆE# €L€€‚ÿTo save a mask to an alpha channel: €}EÐGf š€I€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæúÏz€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæ.Ãm€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Choose Save to Alpha Channel from the Masks menu. The Save to Alpha dialog box opens. The current image name appears in "Available Documents," and the Preview box displays its thumbnail.2In the Available Alpha Channels list, click the New Channel selection. 3When the New Channel box opens, type a name for this mask.4Click OK. The mask is saved to the alpha channel, and both boxes close.4ÆEI3 4€€€‡"€€€‚ÿ After you have saved the mask, it still appears in the image. To remove it, choose Delete from the Masks menu and, when prompted, do not merge it into the layer. Although the mask no longer affects the image, it is still in the image’s alpha channel.1ÐG5I1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ\5IÿÿÿÿtI?ItI' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Loading a MaskR!5IÆI1«7‚([‡(]ÆI;JµLLoading a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')EtI J* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSaving and Loading Masks0ÆI;J, (€ €€†"€Ÿ‚ÿH JƒJ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLoading a Mask from a Disk2Ÿ;JµLt ¶€}€Pä:„O€d€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæíd€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒï€Œß€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿTo load a mask from the hard disk of your computer:1Click the layer button of the layer on which you want to place the mask.2From the Masks menu, choose Load from Disk. The Load Mask Channel dialog box opens.3Select the file's folder. Masks are saved in the “.msk” format.4Click to highlight the file. Its name appears in the File Name box.5Click Open. The dialog box closes, and the mask loads into the image.R!ƒJM1 `…(ÿÿÿÿ^M|M9‚Loading a MaskSaveMark(`SubWin')EµLLM* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSaving and Loading Masks0M|M, (€ €€†"€¿‚ÿS(LMÏM+ &€P€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLoading a Mask from the Alpha Channel,|MûN& € €€‚‚‚ÿSelections and masks are both saved to alpha channels, so you can load a mask as a selection. You can load a selection or mask from the alpha channel of the current active image or any other image open in the workspace.To load a mask from the alpha channel:Ž4ÏM•Z ‚€i€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒæ¡žðª€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1If the image contains more than a background layer, select the layer on which you want to place the mask.2From the Masks menu, choose Load From Alpha Channel. TûN•µLhe Load From Alpha dialog box opens.3To load a mask from the active image, leave the current image name in "Available Documents." To load a mask from another image, highlight its file name.4In the Available Alpha Masks list, click the selection or mask you want to load. A preview of it appears to the right of the list. You can view any selection or mask by clicking its name.€uûN9‚/ .€ê€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚ÿ5After you have chosen a mask or selection, click OK. The dialog box closes, and the mask loads into the image.1•j‚1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ_j‚£‚܂99‚£‚' €$€° €‚ÿCreating a Mask9j‚܂* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1£‚ ƒ1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ` ƒÿÿÿÿ\ƒO(܂\ƒ' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating a Mask from a Channela0 ƒœƒ1ÿÿÿÿ:)aœƒ)„ý†Creating a Mask from a ChanelSaveMark(`SubWin')<\ƒùƒ* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask0œƒ)„, (€ €€†"€À‚ÿL!ùƒu„+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Mask from a ChannelÍ©)„B…$ €S€€‚ÿWhen you split an image into its RGB, HSL, or CMYK channels, each channel becomes an image from which you can create a mask. To create a mask from an image’s channel:»lu„ý†O l€Ù€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚‚ÿ1Split the image into channels using the Channel Splitting command in the Colors menu.2Create a selection from one of the images by choosing the Select All command from the Selections menu.3Choose the Save to Alpha command in the Selections menu.4Name and save the split channel image selection.You can now load this channel image as a mask.1B….‡1‡ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿb.‡ÿÿÿÿ„‡V/ý†„‡' €^€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating a Mask from the Entire Imagei8.‡í‡1ÌŸ)ƒ)cí‡YˆôŠCreating a Mask from the Entire ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')<„‡)ˆ* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask0í‡Yˆ, (€ €€†"€Á‚ÿ\1)ˆµˆ+ &€b€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Mask from the Entire Image or LayerçÁYˆœ‰& €ƒ€€‚‚‚ÿAt times you will want to apply a mask to the entire image and then edit it to alter areas. To mask the entire image, Open the Masks menu, choose New, and then choose Hide All or Show All:XµˆôŠA P€3€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿWith Hide All, the entire layer is masked. You can then edit the mask to remove any area you want uncovered (unmasked).With Show All, a mask is created but the entire area is the non-masked part of it. You can then edit the mask to add any area you want covered (masked).1œ‰%‹1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿd%‹ÿÿÿÿs‹N'ôŠs‹' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating a Mask From an Imagea0%‹ԋ1‡:)ˆ)eԋ@Œ–Creating a Mask From an ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')<s‹Œ* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask0ԋ@Œ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿK Œ‹Œ+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an Image¥@Œ0$ €€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro creates a mask from an image by copying it into a grey scale bitmap. The original source image is not altered. f"‹Œ–D X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÞ/ €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions10Ǎ1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿfǍÿÿÿÿŽQ*–Ž' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Creating a Mask From a Selectiond3Ǎ|Ž1éƒ)ÿÿÿÿg|ŽèŽŸÁCreating a Mask From a SelectionSaveMark(`SubWin')<ŽžŽ* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask0|ŽèŽ, (€ €€†"€ÂÿN#žŽ6+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Mask From a SelectionÏ èŽÀ/ ,€C€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ When you create a mask from a selection, the area selected remains a selection until you chose the Select None command.To create a mask from a selecti6ÀŽon:Út6ëÀf œ€è€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒÌ!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Make a selection.2In the Masks menu, choose New, and then choose Hide Selection or Show Selection. ŽtÀŸÁ@ P€ì€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿWith Hide Selection, the selection is masked.With Show Selection, everything except the selection is masked.1ëÀÐÁ1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿhÐÁÂRÂG ŸÁÂ' €@€° €‚ÿCreating a Mask From an Image;ÐÁRÂ* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps21ƒÂ1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿiƒÂÿÿÿÿÌÂI"RÂÌÂ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select the Layere4ƒÂ1Ã1Ïÿÿÿÿæ)j1Ã{ÃÄStep 1: Select the LayerDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J ÌÂ{Ã* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an ImageF1ÃÁÃ+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select the LayerX5{ÃÄ# €j€€‚ÿSelect the layer to which you are adding the mask.1ÁÃJÄ1‘ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿkJÄÿÿÿÿªÄ`9ĪÄ' €r€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Open the Add Mask From Image Dialog Box|KJÄ&Å1)=)΂)l&ÅpÅhÆStep 2: Open the Add Mask From Image Dialog BoxEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J ªÄpÅ* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an Image]2&ÅÍÅ+ &€d€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Open the Add Mask From Image Dialog Box›lpÅhÆ/ .€Ø€€æäªaÀ‰€‚ÿIn the Masks menu, choose New, and then choose From Image. The Add Mask From Image dialog box. opens.1ÍÅ™Æ1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿm™ÆÿÿÿÿêÆQ*hÆêÆ' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Source WIndowm<™ÆWÇ1Mæ)âƒ)nWÇ¡ÇœÈStep 3: Select the Source WindowEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J êÆ¡Ç* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an ImageN#WÇïÇ+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the Source WindowΪ¡ÇœÈ$ €U€€‚ÿSelect the source window from the drop-down list. The source window is the image from which you will create the mask. It can be any image window open in the workspace.1ïÇîÈ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿoîÈÿÿÿÿ<ÉN'œÈ<É' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Mask Valuej9îÈŠÉ1[΂)ͅ)pŠÉðÉÌStep 4: Select the Mask ValueEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J <ÉðÉ* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an ImageK ŠÉ;Ê+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Mask Value^ðÉŒÊ# €Œ€€‚ÿIn the Create Mask From panel, select the value Paint Shop Pro will use to create the mask:^;ÊÌ@ N€A€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿWith Source Luminance, the luminance value of the pixel color determines the degree of masking. The lighter colors produce less masking. With Any Non-zero Value, there is no gradation to the masking. Pixels with color are completely masked; pixels without color have no masking.1ŒÊKÌ1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿqKÌÿÿÿÿŸÌT-ÌŸÌ' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Set the Inverse Mask Optionp?KÌÍ1 âƒ)‡)rÍYÍÈÎStep 5: Set the Inverse Mask OptionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J ŸÌYÍ* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an ImageQ&ͪÍ+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Set the Inverse Mask OptionÙYÍÈÎE X€³€RŒäVˆ,džØ€ƒæ„Û׀‰€æ¶Ø&0€‰€‚ÿIf you want to invert the mask, select the Invert Mask Data check box. Inverting a mask reverses it transparency: black becomes white, white becomes black, and greys are assigned their mirror transparency.1ªÍùÎ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿsùÎÿÿÿÿFÏM&ÈÎFÏ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the OK Buttoni8ùίÏ1Oͅ)ÿÿÿÿt¯Ï $Step 6: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')J FÏ * $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿCreating a Mask From an Image¯Ï FÏI¯ÏU+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Click the OK ButtonÏ« $$ €W€€‚ÿClick the OK button. Paint Shop Pro creates a mask. On the Layer palette, an asterisk appears on the masked layer’s button to indicate that the layer has been modified.1UU1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿuÿÿÿÿU{&${# €€€‚ÿ1U¬1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿv¬ç ;{ç' €(€° €‚ÿUsing the Browser9¬ * $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1çQ1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿwQÿÿÿÿ’A ’' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Browser OverviewT#Qæ1ùÿÿÿÿô*xæTBrowser OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')>’$* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0æT, (€ €€†"€Ăÿ>$’+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿBrowser OverviewÒ®Td$ €]€€‚ÿThe Paint Shop Pro Browser is a tree-based Browser similar to the Windows Explorer. It is a visual file system that makes image file management easier and more intuitive. (’Œ% €€‘€€‚ÿ¹”dE% €)€€‚‚ÿWhen you select a folder using the Browser, Paint Shop Pro displays small preview buttons, called thumbnails, of the images within this folder. You can open, move, rename, and delete files using these thumbnails. You can even add layers to an image. Drag a thumbnail over an active image; when you release the mouse button, Paint Shop Pro adds the layers from the thumbnail’s image to the open image.×]Œz ĀÀ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï¥P‹€‰€‚†"€ƒïàõÑ€‰€‚†"€ƒï0<ý〉€‚ÿStarting the BrowserClosing the BrowserSetting the Browser Preferences1EM1rÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿyMÿÿÿÿŽAŽ' €4€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Changing FoldersT#Mâ1Z *Æ*zâPy Changing FoldersSaveMark(`SubWin')>Ž * $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0âP, (€ €€†"€łÿ> Ž+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿChanging Folders`=Pî# €z€€‚ÿTo select a new folder to browse, do one of the following:‹JŽy A P€™€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick the folder in the left side of the Browser window.Choose New Folder from the File menu to open the Browse for Folder navigation box. Use the navigation box to find the new folder. Click this folder, and then click the OK button. The navigation box closes, and the Browser displays the contents of the selectd folder.1îª 1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ{ª ÿÿÿÿî Dy î ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Managing ThumbnailsW&ª E 1}ô*Ÿ*|E ³ ÿManaging ThumbnailsSaveMark(`SubWin')>î ƒ * $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0E ³ , (€ €€†"€ƂÿAƒ ô + &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿManaging Thumbnailsº³ ® ; F€þ€€æqí%„€‰€æÒ©n€‰€‚ÿIf Paint Shop Pro finds image files in the selected folder, it fills the Browser Window with image file thumbnails. –6ô D ` €p€R”äVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïª €‰€‚†"€ƒïÌÕ(€‰€‚ÿSorting ThumbnailsSelecting ThumbnailsÕZ® { ƀº€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïœ!É€‰€‚†"€ƒï!!Š €‰€‚†"€ƒï± “뀉€‚ÿUpdating ThumbnailsPrinting ThumbnailsPreviewing Printed ThumbnailsDD ]% €>€" œ€‚ÿAdjusting the Browser Window¢ÿ# €þ€€‚ÿTo resize the Browser window so that it accommodates the current thumbnails, select Fit to Thumbnails from the Window menu. 1]01oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ}0ÿÿÿÿn>ÿn' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Opening FilesQ 0¿1“Æ*‚*~¿<@žDOpening FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')>n @* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser¿ @n0¿<@, (€ €€†"€ǂÿ; @w@+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOpening Files=<@Ž@% €0€" œ€‚ÿOpening a Single FileX5w@ A# €j€€‚ÿThere are three quick ways to load a single file: fÿŽ@rBg œ€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€ïêKO+€‰€‚ÿDrag its thumbnail into the Paint Shop Pro workspace.Double-click its thumbnail. Click on its thumbnail with the secondary mouse button, then choose Open in PSP from the pop-up menu. Paint Shop Pro may open a format-specific dialog box.> A°B% €2€" œ€‚ÿOpening Multiple FilesžSrBNCK f€Š€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïÌÕ(€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the files that you want to open. 2Do one of the following: Ìq°BD[ †€è€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒïânSk€‰€‚ÿSelect Open Image from the ImageFile menu. Press . Drag the thumbnails into the Workspace. „BNCžDB T€„€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒïêKO+€‰€‚ÿ3Paint Shop Pro may open format-specific dialog boxes. 1DÏD1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÏDÿÿÿÿ E>žD E' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Copying FilesQ ÏD^E1JŸ*ž…*€^EÌEåICopying FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')> EœE* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0^EÌE, (€ €€†"€Ȃÿ;œEF+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCopying Files²„ÌE¹F. *€ €€‡"€‚‚ÿ You can copy one or several files using the following method.To copy an image file from the current folder to another folder: EúFþGK d€õ€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ÿ1Open the Browser by choosing Browser from the File menu or by clicking the Browser button on the toolbar.2Navigate to the folder containing the image you want to copy.3Highlight the file’s thumbnail. 4Do either of the following:«k¹F©H@ P€Ú€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Copy from the ImageFile menu.Right-click the thumbnail and choose Copy from the pop-up menu.ÑþG¿IE X€£€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ The Browse for Folder navigation box opens.5Scroll to the folder in which you want to place the copy.6Click OK. The navigation box closes, and the image file is copied to the selected folder.&©HåI# €€€‚ÿ1¿IJ1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿJÿÿÿÿUJ?åIUJ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Deleting FilesR!J§J1s‚*î‡*‚§JKWNDeleting FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')>UJåJ* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0§JK, (€ €€†"€ɂÿ<åJQK+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDeleting FilesR/K£K# €^€€‚ÿTo delete an image file using the thumbnail:KýQKîLN j€û€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Open the Browser by choosing Browser from the File menu or by clicking the Browser button on the toolbar.2Navigate to the folder containing the image you want to delete.3Highlight the file’s thumbnail. 4Do either of the following:¯o£KM@ P€â€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Delete from the ImageFile menu.Right-click the thumbnail and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.ºsîLWNG ^€æ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæì)J€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ A message prompting you to confirm your action will appear.5Click Yes to delete the selected file.1MˆN1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿƒˆNÿÿÿÿÅN=WNÅN' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Moving FilesPˆNO1@ž…*5+„OƒOgƒMoving FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')>ÅNSO* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0OƒO, (€ €€†"€ʂÿ:SOœO+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMoving FilesŽ…ƒO}€/ ,€ €€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ You can move one œO}€ÅNor several files using the following method.To move an image file from the current folder to another folder: DùœOÁK d€ó€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Open the Browser by choosing Browser from the File menu or by clicking the Browser button on the toolbar.2Navigate to the folder containing the image you want to move.3Highlight the file’s thumbnail.4Do either of the following:«k}€l‚@ P€Ú€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Move from the ImageFile menu.Right-click the thumbnail and choose Move from the pop-up menu.û¶ÁgƒE X€m€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ The Browse for Folder navigation box opens.5Navigate to and highlight the new folder.6Click OK. The navigation box closes and the file moves to the selected folder.1l‚˜ƒ1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ…˜ƒÿÿÿÿ؃@gƒ؃' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Renaming a FileS"˜ƒ+„1>î‡*S+†+„™„ŠˆRenaming a FileSaveMark(`SubWin')>؃i„* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0+„™„, (€ €€†"€˂ÿ=i„ք+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRenaming a File7™„ …# €(€€‚ÿTo rename a file:HúքU†N j€õ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Open the Browser by choosing Browser from the File menu or clicking the Browser button on the toolbar.2Navigate to the folder containing the image you want to rename.3Highlight the file’s thumbnail. 4Do either of the following:¯o …‡@ P€â€PŸ€Vˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Rename from the ImageFile menu.Right-click the thumbnail and choose Rename from the pop-up menu.¢NU†ŠˆT v€€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒæJ%D€‰€‚€&ƒ€€ƒ€€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ The Rename File dialog box opens.5Type the new name. The file name can be up to 255 characters long, including the file extension. The Browser does not automatically add the extension. If you want the file name to include an extension, add it to the name. 6Click the OK button. The file displays the new name. 1‡׈1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‡׈ÿÿÿÿ$‰M&Šˆ$‰' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Viewing a File's Information`/׈„‰1Ú5+ÿÿÿÿˆ„‰ò‰›ŒViewing a File's InformationSaveMark(`SubWin')>$‰‰* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Browser0„‰ò‰, (€ €€†"€̂ÿJ‰<Š+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿViewing a File's InformationlHò‰šŠ$ €€€‚ÿTo view more information about a thumbnail, do one of the following:ӏ<Š{‹D V€#€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚‚ÿRight-click the thumbnail, and choose Information from the pop-up menu.Click the thumbnail, and choose Info from the ImageFile menu. Ꚋ›Œ6 :€Õ€€ï3×p€‰€‚‚‚ÿThe File Information dialog box opens. It lists the file’s format, compression method, size, bit depth, and other information. When you're done viewing the data, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box. 1{‹̌1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‰̌B<›Œ' €*€° €‚ÿSorting Thumbnails:̌B* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1s1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŠsÿÿÿÿʍW0Bʍ' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select Sort From the File MenuuDs?Ž1‘ÿÿÿÿ2€+‹?Ž~Ž˜ÀStep 1: Select "Sort" From the File MenuDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')?ʍ~Ž* $€*€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSorting ThumbnailsT)?ŽҎ+ &€R€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select Sort From the File Menuºi~Ž˜ÀQ p€Õ€€æˆkۀ‰€‚‚‡"€€€ïœ!É€‰€‚ÿChoose Sort from the File menu. The Thumbnail Sort dialog box opens. There are two criteria groups, the Primary Sort and the Secondary Sort.Sorting thumbnails is a one-time operation. The thumbnails will not remҎ˜Àʍain sorted if you add new images, or change the properties of the existing files. New images are always added to the end of the list. 1ҎÉÀ1ŠÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŒÉÀÿÿÿÿ"ÁY2˜À"Á' €d€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the Primary Sort CriteriauDÉÀ—Á1£+§+—ÁÖÁ­ÃStep 2: Select the Primary Sort CriteriaEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')?"ÁÖÁ* $€*€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSorting ThumbnailsV+—Á,Â+ &€V€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the Primary Sort CriteriaC ÖÁoÂ# €@€€‚ÿTo set the primary criteria: >á,­Ã] ˆ€Ã€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ$ªç󀉀‚€ƒ€ƒæY=µµ€‰€æŠ“€‰€‚ÿ1Click on an option in the Sort Order group box. You can sort the images in ascending or descending order. 2Click on a sort attribute in the File Attributes group box or the Image Attributes group box. 1oÂÞÃ1ŒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŽÞÃÿÿÿÿ9Ä[4­Ã9Ä' €h€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Secondary Sort CriteriawFÞðÄ12€+҄+°ÄïÄÏÈStep 3: Select the Secondary Sort CriteriaEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')?9ÄïÄ* $€*€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSorting ThumbnailsX-°ÄGÅ+ &€Z€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the Secondary Sort CriteriaM*ïÄ”Å# €T€€‚ÿTo select the secondary sort criteria: nùGÅÈu ž€ó€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæòD=$€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ^_*_€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ·\€‰€æŠ“€‰€‚ÿ1Click on the Secondary Sort tab. 2Click on an option in the Sort Order group box. You can sort the images in ascending or descending order, or you can select "No sort" to turn off the secondary sort criteria. When you choose "No sort", the file attributes options and image attributes options will be grayed out. 3If you choose ascending or descending order in the previous step, click a sort attribute in the File Attributes group box or the Image Attributes group box. ͟”ÅÏÈ. *€A€ä€‡"€‚ÿThe attribute that you selected for the primary sort will be greyed out. Selecting the same attribute for both criteria would be redundant or conflicting. 1ÈÉ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÉÿÿÿÿMÉM&ÏÈMÉ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the OK Buttoni8ɶÉ1+§+ÿÿÿÿ‘¶ÉõÉïÊStep 4: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')?MÉõÉ* $€*€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSorting ThumbnailsJ¶É?Ê+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the OK Button°ŒõÉïÊ$ €€€‚ÿClick on the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and sort the thumbnails using the order and criteria that you selected. 1?Ê Ë1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ’ ËaË›ËAïÊaË' €4€° €‚ÿUpdating the Thumbnails: Ë›Ë* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More21aËÌË1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ“ÌËÿÿÿÿÌD›ËÌ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Updating ThumbnailsW&ÌËgÌ1²ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ”ģÌ(ÎUpdating ThumbnailsSaveMark(`SubWin')@̧Ì* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUpdating Thumbnails¥gÌLÍ$ €€€‚ÿTo update the thumbnail images for the current folder, choose Update Thumbnails from the File menu. Updating does two things: ܛ§Ì(ÎA P€;€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿRevises the thumbnail images to reflect any changes to the files.Adds and removes thumbnails to match the current contents of the selected folder. 1LÍYÎ1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ•YΖÎÐÎ=(ΖÎ' €,€° €‚ÿPrinting Thumbnails:YÎÐÎ* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1–ÎÏ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ–ÏÿÿÿÿNÏM&ÐÎNÏ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Check the Page Setupi8Ï·Ï1'ÿÿÿÿ±,—·Ï ôStep 1: Check the Page SetupDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@NÏ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting Thumbnails·Ï NÏJ·ÏV+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Check the Page Setupžk ô3 6€Ö€€ï÷Ѭô €‰€‚ÿThe page setup settings determine the paper source and the placement of the thumbnails on the page. 1V%1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ˜%ÿÿÿÿsN'ôs' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the Thumbnailsj9%Ý1óY‡+[,™ÝßStep 2: Select the ThumbnailsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@s* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsK Ýh+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the ThumbnailswCß4 8€†€€ïÌÕ(€‰€‚‚ÿIf you want to print specific thumbnails, select them now. 1h1‰ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿšÿÿÿÿhX1ßh' €b€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select Print From the File MenuvEÞ1è±,‘,›ÞÕStep 3: Select "Print" From the File MenuEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@h* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsR'Þp+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Access the Print Dialog Box rCâ/ .€†€€æ&{Ëـ‰€‚ÿThe are three ways to access the Print dialog box. You can: ópÕd –€%€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæþQóò€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚‚ÿChoose Print From the File menu. Click the Print button in the Toolbar. Click the Print button in the Print Preview window.1â1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿœÿÿÿÿQK$ÕQ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Printerg6ž1Æ[,Ç,žø Step 4: Select the PrinterEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@Qø* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsHž@+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the PrinterAø0 .€#€€æ¯À€‰€‚ÿYou select the printer from the Printer drop down box. The drop down box lists all of the output devices that are available to your system. For example, in addition to the available printers, it will also include any fax software that is installed on your computer. »@ Q p€w€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚ÿ1Click on the drop down box to open it2Click on the printer that you want to select. If the list is too long to fit in the box, use the scrollbar to scroll through it. 1Ÿ 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿžŸ ÿÿÿÿ ^7  ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Set the Printer Properties (Optional)zIŸ – 1ž‘,,Ÿ– Ö C Step 5: Set the Printer Properties (Optional)EB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@ Ö * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting Thumbnails[0– 1 + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Set the Printer Properties (Optional)ÝÖ C 5 8€»€€ï$!Š €‰€‚‚ÿIf you want to change the selected printer's properties, click the Properties button. Paint Shop Pro will open the properties dialog box for the selected printer. For help using the dialog box, try pressing . 11 t 1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ t ÿÿÿÿË W0C Ë ' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Set the Print to File CheckboxsBt > 11Ç,€,¡> ~ ~Step 6: Set the Print to File CheckboxEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@Ë ~ * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsT)> Ò + &€R€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Set the Print to File Checkbox²‚~ „0 .€€€æM€_`€‰€‚ÿThe Print to File check box determines if the output is sent to the selected printer or to a printer file. If you want to: úºÒ ~@ N€y€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿSend the output to the selected printer, make sure that the check box is empty. Send the output to a print file, mark the check box. You will be prompted for the filename later. 1„¯1€ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¢¯ÿÿÿÿ @O(~ @' €P€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 7: Select the Print Range¯ @~k:¯w@1ô,w,£w@·@zBStep 7: Select the Print RangeEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@ @·@* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsL!w@A+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 7: Select the Print RangeÔ€·@×A0 .€I€€æ'ms€‰€‚ÿYou can print all of the thumbnails, a range of pages, or just the selected thumbnails. You select an option by clicking on it in the Print Range group nox. £oAzB4 8€à€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚ÿIf you select Pages, enter the first and last pages to print in the text boxes labeled "from:" and "to:". 1×A«B1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ€«BÿÿÿÿþBS,zBþB' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 8: Enter the Number of Copieso>«BmC1œ€,™ƒ,¥mC­C9FStep 8: Enter the Number of CopiesEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')@þB­C* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsP%mCýC+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 8: Enter the Number of CopiesÔ­CE0 .€©€€æP­˜q€‰€‚ÿIf your printer supports multiple copies, then you can print more than one copy of a file at a time. If your printer does not support multiple copies, the Number of Copies spin control will be greyed out. 8ëýC9FM h€Û€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚ÿYou can type the number of copies into the spin control, or you can use the arrow buttons to set the value. To scroll to a higher or lower value, point at the appropriate button and press and hold the primary mouse button. 1EjF1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŠjFÿÿÿÿ·FM&9F·F' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 9: Select the OK Buttoni8jF G1Vw,ÿÿÿÿ§ G`G…IStep 9: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')@·F`G* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPrinting ThumbnailsJ GªG+ &€>€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 9: Select the OK ButtonĐ`GnH4 6€!€€ï&!Š €‰€‚ÿWhen you're ready to print, click the OK button. One of two things will happen, depending on the setting of the Print to File check box: ˪G…IL f€›€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ%—·€‰€‚ÿIf the option is off, the Paint Shop Pro will send the image thumbnails to the printer. If the option is on, Paint Shop Pro will open the Print to File dialog box. For more help, press . 1nH¶I1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿš¶IýI6JG …IýI' €@€° €‚ÿPreviewing Printed Thumbnails9¶I6J* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ýIgJ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ©gJÿÿÿÿµJN'6JµJ' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Previewing Printed Thumbnailsa0gJK1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿªK`K»Previewing Printed ThumbnailsSaveMark(`SubWin')J µJ`K* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPreviewing Printed ThumbnailsÕ£K5L2 2€G€€‚‚æTŒÿ€‰€‚ÿUse the Print Preview to see how the thumbnails will look when printed. Choose Print Preview from the File menu to open the Browser Print Preview window. (`K]L% €€‘€€‚ÿJ'5L§L# €N€€‚ÿThe window contains several buttons:4]LÛL% €€" œ€‚ÿPrint buttonœ~§L˜M? N€ü€€æ&{Ëـ‰€ï$!Š €‰€‚ÿClick to close the Browser Print Preview window and open the Print dialog box. See Step 4 of "Printing Thumbnails".H#ÛLàM% €F€" œ€‚ÿNext Page and Prev Page Buttons ¬ˆ˜MŒN$ €€€‚ÿThese buttons will be accessible if the thumbnails cover more than one page. Click to move forward and back by one page respectively.CàMÏN% €<€" œ€‚ÿTwo Page / One Page Button \9ŒN+O# €r€€‚ÿClick to switch the display between two pages and one.DÏNoO% €>€" œ€‚ÿZoom In and Zoom Out buttons‚_+O €# €Ÿ€€‚ÿClick to change the magnification level. You can also zoom in and out by clicking the image.oO €µJ4oO@€% €€" œ€‚ÿSetup buttonïº €/5 8€u€€ï÷Ѭô €‰€‚‚ÿClick to close the Print Preview window and open the Page Setup dialog box. When you close the Page Setup dialog box, Paint Shop Pro returns to the Browser Print Preview window. 4@€c% €€" œ€‚ÿClose ButtonX4/»$ €h€€‚‚ÿClick to close the Browser Print Preview window.1cì1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ«ì%‚^‚9»%‚' €$€° €‚ÿSelecting Files9ì^‚* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1%‚‚1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¬‚ÿÿÿÿȂ9^‚Ȃ' €$€° €‚ÿTOPIC: OverviewL‚ƒ1úÿÿÿÿT-­ƒ€ƒI…OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')<ȂPƒ* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting Files0ƒ€ƒ, (€ €€†"€͂ÿ6 Pƒ¶ƒ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOverviewh9€ƒ„/ .€r€€æÒ©n€‰€‚ÿYou select files by selecting thumbnails. You can:+”¶ƒI…— ü€1€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïùÎóh€‰€‚†"€ƒï“(õ|€‰€‚†"€ƒï]³šS€‰€‚†"€ƒïÖS!Œ€‰€‚ÿSelect specific filesSelect files by propertySearch for files by filenameSelect all of the files in the current folder1„z…1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ®z…ÿÿÿÿÅI"I…Å' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Selecting Specific Files\+z…†1#?--¯†‹†}ŠSelecting Specific FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')<Å[†* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting Files0†‹†, (€ €€†"€΂ÿF[†ц+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting Specific Files€u‹†u‡/ .€ê€€æÒ©n€‰€‚ÿYou can select a single thumbnail, a sequential group of thumbnails, or a non-sequential group of thumbnails. 8ц­‡% €&€" œ€‚ÿSingle Thumbnail­~u‡Zˆ/ .€ü€€攞Öۀ‰€‚ÿYou select a single thumbnail by clicking it. Use the scrollbars to view any thumbnails that aren't currently visible. =­‡—ˆ% €0€" œ€‚ÿSequential Thumbnailsâ Zˆy‰B R€A€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the first thumbnail in the sequence that you want to select. 2Press and hold the key. 3Click the last thumbnail in the sequence. A—ˆº‰% €8€" œ€‚ÿNon-Sequential ThumbnailsÊy‰}Š9 @€€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Press and hold the key. 2Click the thumbnails that you want to select. Clicking a selected thumbnail will deselect it. 1º‰®Š1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ°®ŠÿÿÿÿúŠL%}ŠúŠ' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Selecting Files By Property_.®ŠY‹1áT-1-±Y‹ŋuŽSelecting Files By PropertySaveMark(`SubWin')<úŠ•‹* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting Files0Y‹ŋ, (€ €€†"€ςÿI•‹Œ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting Files By Property‘nŋŸŒ# €Ü€€‚ÿYou can select thumbnails that have a specific filename, file extension, width, height, or bits-per-pixel. Ö`ŒuŽv º€Á€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæôo”F€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ-/e‰€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒï‘ €‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Select from the File menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Select dialog box. 2Use the Select Based On drop down box to choose a file property to search by. 3Type the property's setting into the Equal To text box. 4Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will select the thumbnails that match the file characteristic.1ŸŒŠŽ1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ²ŠŽÿÿÿÿìŽFuŽìŽ' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Searching By FilenameY(ŠŽE1ü-̀-³E±.ÁSearching By FilenameSaveMark(`SubWin')<쎁* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting Files0E±, (€ €€†"€ЂÿC À+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSearching By Filename± À쎌Œ±ÈÀ0 .€€€æ»i/€‰€‚ÿYou can use the Find dialog box to search for files by filename. You access the dialog box by choosing File Name from the Find menu. f" À.ÁD X€F€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï-µ¬ €‰€‚ÿStep-by-Step Instructions1ÈÀ_Á1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŽ_Áÿÿÿÿ£ÁD.Á£Á' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Selecting All FilesW&_ÁúÁ11-ÿÿÿÿµúÁfÂ=ÃSelecting All FilesSaveMark(`SubWin')<£Á6Â* $€$€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting Files0úÁfÂ, (€ €€†"€тÿA6§Â+ &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting All Files–^fÂ=Ã8 @€Œ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Press . 2Press  + . The Browser will highlight every thumbnail. 1§ÂnÃ1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¶nûÃõÃM%=ûÃ( €J€° €ƒ‚ÿSelecting Files:Property Settings:nÃõÃ* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More21»Ã&Ä1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ·&ÄÿÿÿÿhÄBõÃhÄ' €6€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Property SettingsU$&ÄœÄ1©ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿžœÄûÄsÈProperty SettingsSaveMark(`SubWin')>hÄûÄ* $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿProperty Settings‰œÄ„Ås#¶€,‰Z€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ$€€ÔqVˆˆŽŽ€‚ÿ€€ qVˆˆŽŽÿ €€ÔqvˆˆŽŽŽ‚ÿÿÿPropertySetting²WûÄ6Æ[#†€®‰Z€€ qvˆˆŽŽŽÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿFilename Enter the file's name, including the extension, or any portion thereof. ‹D„ÅÁÆG#^€ˆ‰Z€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿExtension Enter the file's extension, without the period (".").ƒ06ÆDÇS#v€`‰Z€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ.€€Ôq2ŒœŽæÇÜT€‰€‚ÿÿÿWidth Enter an image's width in pixels.u.ÁƹÇG#^€\‰Z€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿHeight Enter an image's height in pixels.“LDÇLÈG#^€˜‰Z€€Ôq2ŒœŽ€‚ÿ€"€Ôq2ŒœŽ‚ÿÿÿBits Per PixelEnter the number of bits recorded per pixel in an image. '¹ÇsÈ$ €€j€‚ÿ1LÈ€È1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ¹€ÈõÈ0ÉQ)sÈõÈ( €R€° €ƒ‚ÿSelecting Files:Searching By Filename;€È0É* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps21õÈaÉ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿºaÉÿÿÿÿ¿É^70É¿É' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select "File Name" From the Find MenuzIaÉ9Ê1îÿÿÿÿ,„-»9Ê{Ê8ËStep 1: Select "File Name" From the Find MenuDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')B¿É{Ê* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSearching By FilenameY.9ÊÔÊ+ &€\€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select File Name From the Find Menud5{Ê8Ë/ .€j€€æ»i/€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro will open the Find dialog box. 1ÔÊiË1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŒiËÿÿÿÿ·ËN'8Ë·Ë' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Enter the Search Textj9iË!Ì1Šƒ-§…-œ!ÌcÌ2ÎStep 2: Enter the Search TextEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')B·ËcÌ* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSearching By FilenameK !Ì®Ì+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Enter the Search TextžcÌpÍ$ €=€€‚ÿType all or part of the file's name into the text box. The Browser will highlight the first file it finds that has the search string anywhere in its name. / ®ÌŸÍ% €€" œ€‚ÿExample“ppÍ2Î# €à€€‚ÿIf you enter "bird", Paint Shop Pro will highlight the first thumbnail with a filename that contains "bird". 1ŸÍcÎ1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŸcÎÿÿÿÿµÎR+2εÎ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Set the Match Case Optionn=cÎ#Ï1×,„-Ð.¿#ÏeϲStep 3: Set the Match Case OptionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')BµÎeÏ* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSearching By FilenameO$#ÏŽÏ+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Set the Match Case OptionþÎeÏŸ0 .€€€æ„Û׀‰€‚ÿIf you want the search to bŽÏŸµÎe case-sensitive, fill in the check box labeled "Match case". In a case-sensitive search, Paint Shop Pro highlights only those files with the same case as the search text. / ŽÏí% €€" œ€‚ÿExampleŘŸ²- (€1€€€€€ ‚ÿIn a case-sensitive search for "bird", Paint Shop Pro will not highlight files that contain "Bird", or "BIRD", or any other combination of cases. 1íã1†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÀãÿÿÿÿ8U.²8' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Find First Buttonq@ã©1š§…-×.Á©ëTStep 4: Select the Find First ButtonEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')B8ë* $€0€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSearching By FilenameR'©=+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Find First Button›xëØ# €ð€€‚ÿClick on the Find First button. The Browser will search for the text that you entered. One of two things will happen:| =T\ †€E€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï-µ¬ €‰€‚†"€ƒæóÃ2' €.€° €‚ÿStarting and Exiting9ôk* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More12œ1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÅœÿÿÿÿáEká' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Starting the BrowserX'œ9 1–ÿÿÿÿE.Æ9 ¶  Starting the BrowserSaveMark(`SubWin')M#ᆠ* $€F€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿStarting and Closing the Browser09 ¶ , (€ €€†"€҂ÿB† ø + &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStarting the Browser#϶  T v€Ÿ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€€ƒæY'ª€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÒ©n€‰€‚ÿ1Choose Browse from the File menu, or click the Browse button in the Open dialog box. Paint Shop Pro will open the Browser. 2If you open the Browser from the File menu, use the left side of the Browser window to navigate to a folder. When you click a folder, the right side of the window will display thumbnails of the images it contains. If you open the Browser from the Open dialog box, the Browser automatically goes to the selected folder.1ø L 1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÇL ÿÿÿÿ D  ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Closing the BrowserW&L ç 1Œ.ÿÿÿÿÈç d ¿Closing the BrowserSaveMark(`SubWin')M# 4 * $€F€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿStarting and Closing the Browser0ç d , (€ €€†"€ӂÿA4 ¥ + &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿClosing the BrowserD!d é # €B€€‚ÿTo exit the Browser, you can: ֊¥ ¿L f€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæRf¶³€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick on the Browser window's Close button. Click on the Browser window to activate it, then choose Close from the File menu. 1é ð1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÉÿÿÿÿð&¿# €€€‚ÿ1ðG1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÊG„œ=„' €,€° €‚ÿWorking with Colors9Gœ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1„ @1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿË @ÿÿÿÿX@œ @œL%œX@' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Selecting the Active Colors_. @·@1>ÿÿÿÿ†.Ì·@'A4HSelecting the Active ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')@X@÷@* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Colors0·@'A, (€ €€†"€ԂÿI÷@pA+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting the Active Colors‡;'A÷BL f€w€€ÌAL(`Selecting Active Colors')€‰€‚ÿThere are two active colors, the foreground color and the background color. You use the active colors with a wide variety of tools and functions. To reverse the foreground and background colors, click the color switcher in the Active Colors panel of the Color palette. You can select the active colors from: wpAD• ú€ö€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÁù§€‰€‚†"€ƒïOÌ­§€‰€‚†"€ƒïOµ€n€‰€‚†"€ƒï– Ub€‰€‚ÿThe Color PaletteThe Color Dialog BoxThe Select Color from Palette Dialog BoxThe Image Ý÷BH' €»€€‚‚‚‚ÿWhen you select an active color from the Color palette’s Select Color panel, Paint Shop Pro chooses the color in the panel that is closest to the image’s available colors. If the image has 16 million colors, the new color will match the color in the panel. To select specific hue, saturation, and lightness, use the Color dialog box. Click either the foreground or background color box to access it. When an image has 256 or fewer colors (sometimes referred to as a paletted image), its colors are contained in an image palette. You can change a color in the palette but not increase the number of colors. When you pick a color from the Select Color panel, you are limited to the colors in the palette. Paint Shop Pro uses the color from the palette that is the closest match to the color you picked. You may find it easier to select colors directly from the palette. To do this, click either the foreground or background color box to access the Select Color from Palette dialog box.-D4H* $€€PäVˆ,džØ€‚ÿ1HeH1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÍeHÿÿÿÿ«HF4H«H' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Working with PalettesY(eHI1Ý%€.ˆ.ÎItI LWorking with PalettesSaveMark(`SubWin')@«HDI* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Colors0ItI, (€ €€†"€ՂÿCDI·I+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿWorking with PalettesI%tIK$ €K€€‚ÿIf an image has fewer than 256 colors, it contains an image palette. You can edit this palette, save it, and load it into other color images. You can also make any palette color or the background color transparent. This makes producing transparent GIFs and other web images an easy process. †·I Lš €PäVˆ,džØ€‚†"€ƒï°)Iv€‰€‚‚†"€ƒïF2e€‰€‚‚†"€ƒïà¶q"€‰€‚‚†"€ƒï²ìÜ€‰€‚ÿEditing an Image PaletteSaving an Image PaletteLoading an Image PaletteAssigning a Transparent Color1KQL1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÏQLÿÿÿÿœLK$ LœL' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Counting an Image's Colors^-QLúL1—†./ÐúLjM<„Counting an Image's ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')@œL:M* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Colors0úLjM, (€ €€†"€ւÿH:M²M+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCounting an Image's Colors·“jMiO$ €'€€‚ÿColor depth, also called pixel depth, refers to the amount of color information available to each pixel in an image. An image with a color depth of 1-bit can display only two colors. Paint Shop Pro uses black and white when reducing an image to 1-bit. As the color depth increases, more colors are available. To find out how many colors are actually used in the active image, do one of the following:…D²Mú€A P€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Count Colors Used from the Colors menu. Paint Shop Pro will display the numbiOú€œLer of colors in a message box. When you're done with the message, click the OK button. Choose Image Information from the View menu. In the Image panel, the information is displayed in both bits per pixel and maximum number of colors.-iO'* $€€Pä:„O€d€‚ÿãú€7‚- (€É€€‡"€‚ÿIf the image has more than one layer, Paint Shop Pro counts the colors on the selected layer when you choose the Count Colors Used command. To find color depth on multi-layered images, choose the Image Information command.-'d‚* $€€Pä:„O€d€‚ÿI&7‚­‚# €L€€‚ÿTo view color depth of the monitor:Dd‚<„K d€‰€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Choose About Paint Shop Pro from the Help menu. The splash screen appears.2Click the System Info button. The System Information list box opens.3Scroll to the Video Driver Information section, where the color depth is listed.4If you need to adjust your monitor settings, consult the Windows online Help.1­‚m„1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÑm„ÿÿÿÿ¿„R+<„¿„' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Increasing an Image's Color Depthe4m„$…1ˆ.’/Ò$…”…ò‡Increasing an Image's Color DepthSaveMark(`SubWin')@¿„d…* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Colors0$…”…, (€ €€†"€ׂÿO$d…ã…+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿIncreasing an Image's Color Depthk<”…N‡/ ,€{€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ Color depth adjustments can only be performed on an image with a single layer.To increase the number of available colors in the active image, you select the new color depth from the Increase Color Depth submenu of the Colors menu. How many selections are available depends on the image's current color depth. €lã…ò‡8 @€Ø€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Increase Color Depth from the Colors menu. 2Select the color depth that you want to use. 1N‡#ˆ1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÓ#ˆÿÿÿÿuˆR+ò‡uˆ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Decreasing an Image's Color Depthe4#ˆڈ1/ÿÿÿÿÔڈJ‰ Decreasing an Image's Color DepthSaveMark(`SubWin')@uˆ‰* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Colors0ڈJ‰, (€ €€†"€؂ÿO$‰™‰+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDecreasing an Image's Color Depthc4J‰ü‹/ ,€k€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ Color depth adjustments can only be performed on an image with a single layer.Paint Shop Pro offers a choice of reduction methods and palettes to decrease an image’s color depth. Whenever the color depth (pixel depth) of an image is lower than 24-bits, Paint Shop Pro automatically generates a palette for the image. It then uses this palette to color the image. There are up to six different menu selections for decreasing an image's color depth. How many selections are available depends on the image's current color depth. For help reducing an image to: $t™‰ ° 0ò€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÐwY €‰€‚†"€ƒïÙs ® €‰€‚†"€ƒï”£sL €‰€‚†"€ƒïV øX €‰€‚†"€ƒï;E€ø €‰€‚ÿTwo colorsSixteen colors256 colors32K or 64K colorsX Colors (Between 2 and 256)1ü‹Q1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÕQšӍI" š' €D€° €‚ÿUsing the Jasc Color Dialog Box9QӍ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1šŽ1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÖŽÿÿÿÿAŽ=ӍAŽ' €,€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Basic ColorsPŽ‘Ž1 ÿÿÿÿC/בŽ YÂBasic ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')L"AŽݎ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Jasc Color Dialog Box0‘Ž , (€ €€†"€قÿM"ݎZ+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting from the Basic Colors€Z æÀ& €µ€€‚‚‚ÿForty-eight basic colors are preset and cannot be modified. The first column displays the three primary additive and three primZæÀAŽary subtractive colors. The last column displays six lightness levels (grey levels). In between are the additive and subtractive primaries at increasing lightness levels from left to right.To select a basic color: s.ZYÂE X€]€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ&ŸOJ€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Click the color’s square in the upper-left corner of Color dialog box. The selected color, its RGB and HSL values, and its HTML code appear in the Current Color panel.2Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new color appears in the appropriate box of the Active Color panel.1æÀŠÂ1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿØŠÂÿÿÿÿÆÂ<YÂÆÂ' €*€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Color WheelOŠÂÃ1;Æ/ž…/ÙÑÛÈColor WheelSaveMark(`SubWin')L"ÆÂaÃ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Jasc Color Dialog Box0ÑÃ, (€ €€†"€ڂÿL!aÃÝÃ+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting from the Color WheelsD‘ÃPÄ/ .€ˆ€€æ»äuk€‰€‚ÿSelecting a color from the Color wheel is a two step process:ÅÝÃQÆ< F€‹€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Color Wheel or drag the selection ring to select a hue. As the dropper moves around the wheel, the values in the Current Color panel update. This panel displays the RGB and HSL values, the color, and its HTML number. The HTML number appears a text format that you can copy and paste directly into your HTML code.2Adjust the saturation and lightness of the hue using the Saturation/Lightness box inside the Color wheel. To do this:$óPÄuÈ1 0€ç€Pµ€:„O€ƀƒ‚ƒ‚ƒ‚ÿa)Click anywhere in the Saturation/Lightness box or drag the selection ring to change the saturation and lightness. The saturation increases as you move from the left to the right. The lightness increases as you move from the top to the bottom.b) The selected color, its RGB and HSL values, and its HTML code (in the Current Color panel) update as you move the Dropper.c) Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new color appears in the appropriate box of the Active Color panel.&QÆ›È# €€€‚ÿ1uÈÌÈ1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÚÌÈÿÿÿÿÉ;›ÈÉ' €(€° €‚ÿTOPIC: From ImageU$ÌÈ\É1«C/ц/Û\ÉØÉRËColors from ImageSaveMark(`SubWin')L"ÉšÉ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Jasc Color Dialog Box0\ÉØÉ, (€ €€†"€ۂÿFšÉÊ+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting From the Image×ØÉ%Ë0 .€¯€€æ-;¿€‰€‚ÿTo select a color from the image while the Color dialog box is open, move the Dropper over the image and click. The selected color, its RGB and HSL values, and its HTML code appear in the Current Color panel.-ÊRË* $€€PÈ:„3€H€‚ÿ1%˃Ë1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ܃ËÿÿÿÿÁË>RËÁË' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Custom ColorsQ ƒËÌ1)ž…/ÿÿÿÿÝÌŽÌ’Custom ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')L"ÁË^Ì* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Jasc Color Dialog Box0ÌŽÌ, (€ €€†"€܂ÿE^ÌÓÌ+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a Custom ColorÞºŽÌ±Í$ €u€€‚ÿThere are sixteen custom color squares that you can fill with colors of your choice. Fill an empty square or replace a Custom Color square with a new color. To select a custom color: ë²ÓÌœÎ9 @€e€Pä:„O€d€ƒƒ€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Select a color by left-clicking the Color Wheel, the Saturation/Lightness box, the Current Color box, the Old Color box, or a Basic color.2Do either of the following:‘^±Í-Ï3 6€Ÿ€P䈄O€¢€†"€‚ÿ Right-click and drag the cursor to any Custom Color square and release the mouse button.V#œÎƒÏ3 6€H€P䈄O€€†"€‚ÿ Click the Add Custom button.°~-Ï?2 4€ü€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚ÿ3Click the OK button. The dialog box closes and the new color appears ƒÏ?ÁËin the appropriate box of the Active Color panel.&ƒÏe# €€€‚ÿ-?’* $€€PÈ:„3€H€‚ÿ1eÃ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÞÃHL%’' €J€° €‚ÿUsing the Windows Color Dialog Box9ÃH* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1y1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿßyÿÿÿÿ·>H·' €.€° €‚ÿ TOPIC: Basic ColorsPy1ªÿÿÿÿy0à†ÿBasic ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')O%·V* $€J€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Windows Color Dialog Box0†, (€ €€†"€݂ÿ:VÀ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿBasic ColorsŠg†J# €Î€€‚ÿThere are forty-eight basic colors that are preset and cannot be modified. To select a basic color: µqÀÿD X€â€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæK‰œå€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the color's square in the upper-left corner of the Color dialog box. 2Click the OK button. 1J01oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿá0ÿÿÿÿn>ÿn' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Custom ColorsQ 0¿1aQ0Ä0â¿>nCustom ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')O%n* $€J€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Windows Color Dialog Box0¿>, (€ €€†"€ނÿ;y+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCustom Colorsa>>Ú# €|€€‚ÿThere are sixteen custom colors. To select a custom color: Ÿgyy8 @€Î€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the color's square in the lower-left corner of the dialog box. 2Click the OK button. ?Úž% €4€" œ€‚ÿChanging a Custom ColorŠ‚y^$ €€€‚ÿYou change a custom color by highlighting it, selecting a full spectrum color, then selecting the Add to Custom Colors button. ²žn^ Š€e€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæK‰œå€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒï<‡³ó€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the custom color's square in the lower-left corner of the Color dialog box. 2Select a full spectrum color. 3Click the Add to Custom Colors button. 1^Ÿ1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿãŸÿÿÿÿäEnä' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Full Spectrum ColorsX'Ÿ< 1@y0ÿÿÿÿä< » Ê Full Spectrum ColorsSaveMark(`SubWin')O%ä‹ * $€J€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Windows Color Dialog Box0< » , (€ €€†"€߂ÿB‹ ý + &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿFull Spectrum ColorsF!» C % €B€" œ€‚ÿCrosshair and Pointer ControlslIý ¯ # €’€€‚ÿYou select a full spectrum color by clicking or dragging two controls:ÑyC € X €€ö€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæú„œ€‰€‚†"€ƒæú„œ€‰€‚ÿThe Crosshair Control in the large color spectrum boxThe Pointer Control in the smaller Color Ribbon box.߯ C $ €?€€‚ÿThe controls affect the contents of the Color/Solid Display box. The Crosshair control sets the hue and saturation; the Pointer control sets the luminance. ?€ ‚ % €4€" œ€‚ÿSolid/Color Display Box÷C  $ €ï€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro selects the hue in the Color side of the Color/Solid display box. If the two sides display different colors and you prefer the hue in the Solid side, double-click the Solid side. It will change to match the hue in the Solid side.-‚ Ê * $€€PÈ:„3€H€‚ÿ1 û 1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿåû @yEÊ @' €<€° €‚ÿSelecting the Active Colors9û y* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1@ª1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿæªÿÿÿÿ÷M&y÷' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Select Color Panel`/ªW1²ÿÿÿÿK‚0çWÏYCUsing the Select Color PanelSaveMark(`SubWin')H÷Ÿ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting the Active Colors0WÏ, (€ €€†"€à‚ÿFŸ!@+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsingÏ!@÷ the Color Palette“XÏŽ@; F€°€€æñY €‰€æg؝€‰€‚ÿTo select an active color using the Select Color Panel on the Color palette: Aó!@õAN j€ç€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ-;¿€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Place the cursor over the Select Color panel. The cursor changes into the Dropper, and the color underneath appears in the current color information area.2Move the cursor over the color you want to select.3Click with the: Ô|Ž@ÉBX €€ü€PـVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿPrimary mouse button to select the foreground color. Secondary mouse button to select the background color. [õAYC5 :€¶€ä„O€d€æw"ØP€‰€‚ÿThe selected color appears in the appropriate color box in the Active Colors Panel. 1ÉBŠC1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿèŠCÿÿÿÿØCN'YCØC' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Active Colors Panela0ŠC9D1«ð0Ȅ0é9D±D+HUsing the Active Colors PanelSaveMark(`SubWin')HØCD* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting the Active Colors09D±D, (€ €€†"€á‚ÿM"DþD+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Jasc Color Dialog Box[±DYF< F€?€€æ&ŸOJ€‰€çÖʺ΀‰€‚ÿIn a 24-bit image (one with 16 million colors), clicking the foreground or background color box opens the Jasc Color dialog box or the Windows Color dialog box, depending on the preferences setting. Select a color from your system’s entire color spectrum in either dialog box.ˉþD$GB R€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚‚ÿClick the foreground color box to select a new foreground color.Click the background color box to select a new background color.ŠYF+H} Ȁ€‚Ê€†"€çáK€€‰€‚†"€çåÖ+€‰€‚†"€ç|sɀ‰€‚†"€çN™[±€‰€‚ÿ Selecting from the Basic Colors Selecting from the Color Wheel Selecting from the Image Creating a Custom Colora0$GŒH1îK‚0¥‡0êŒHIÁLUsing the Active Colors PanelSaveMark(`SubWin')H+HÔH* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿSelecting the Active Colors0ŒHI, (€ €€†"€â‚ÿP%ÔHTI+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Windows Color Dialog BoxNâI¢Kl Š€Å€€çOÌ­§€‰€æK‰œå€‰€çªÏ{1Wÿÿÿÿ2ú{ÇíStep 1: Select Two Color ReductionDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L" Ç* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Two ColorsP%{+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select Two Color ReductionÖŠÇí0 .€M€€æ°&³[€‰€‚ÿChoose Decrease Color Depth from the Colors menu, then choose 2 Colors. Paint Shop Pro will open the two colors version of the Decrease Color Depth dialog box.11†ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿûÿÿÿÿsU.ís' €\€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the Palette Componentq@ä1Ø2k2üä0×Step 2: Select the Palette ComponentEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"s0* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Two ColorsR'ä‚+ &€N€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the Palette ComponentÿÃ0< F€‡€€æÇÜT€‰€æ,ʀ‰€‚ÿThe Palette Component determines which color value (or luminance) is used to set pixels to black or white. You select a component by clicking on it in the Palette Component group box. V‚×A P€/€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿFor most images, the grey value yields the best results. If an image contains mostly red, green, or blue, then selecting the dominant color component may be the best choice. For example, images with mostly flesh tones often reduce better using the red color component. 11…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿýÿÿÿÿ\T-×\' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Reduction Methodp?Ì1÷2&2þÌÞ Step 3: Select the Reduction MethodEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"\* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Two ColorsQ&Ìi+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the Reduction Method˛40 .€7€€æbAÊœ€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides three methods for reducing an image to two colors. You select a method by clicking on it in the Reduction Method group box. <ip% €.€" œ€‚ÿNearest Color Method÷Ç4g 0 .€€€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿEach pixel is treated independently: any difference between the original color and black or white is ignored, so there is no dithering. This method yields stark, simple, high-contrast images. =p€ % €0€" œ€‚ÿOrdered Dither Methodá±g … 0 .€c€€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿShading is achieved by patterned intermingling of pixels. Best suited to certain print mediums. Images often appear "hashed", or composed of dots, x-shapes, and crosses. >€ à % €2€" œ€‚ÿError Diffusion Methodç… Þ 4 6€Ï€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿUses intermingling of pixels to maintain shading. You must also select one of three algorithms: Floyd-Steinberg, Burkes, or Stucki. Each algorithm gives slightly different results. You select an algorithm by clicking on it. 1à  1‰ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ÿÿÿÿg X1Þ g ' €b€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select Palette Weighting OptiontC Û 1 k2î2Û ' Step 4: Select Palette Weighting OptionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"g ' * $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Two ColorsU*Û | + &€T€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select Palette Weighting Option‡V' 1 0€­€€‚æ¥ý¹€‰€‚ÿWeighting the palette sets the image's current colors closer to black and white. This results in less dithering, and therefore less shading and sharper edges. Conversely, a non-weighted palette yields more dithering, and therefore more shading and softer edges. You select an option by clicking on it in the Palette Weight group box. 1| 41~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ4ÿÿÿÿM&' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Select the OK Buttoni84 @1A&2ÿÿÿÿ @X@hAStep 5: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext') @L"X@* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Two ColorsI @¡@+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Click the OK ButtonÇ£X@hA$ €G€€‚ÿWhen you have finished selecting the color reduction options, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and reduce the image's color depth. 1¡@™A1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ™AæA BM&hAæA' €L€° €‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen Colors:™A B* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1æAQB1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿQBÿÿÿÿ¯B^7 B¯B' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)zIQB)C1|ÿÿÿÿvƒ2)CyCÄEStep 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)DB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')P&¯ByC* $€L€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen Colors[0)CÔC+ &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)ð yCÄEP n€A€€‚Ì!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ÿAn image's less common colors can be eliminated when you reduce color depth. The uncommon colors are often esthetically significant, providing the image's contrast, or emphasizing its subject. Their elimination by a color reduction algorithm can harm or even ruin an image's composition. To emphasize the significance of a specific color or colors, select an area that contains the colors you want to boost. 1ÔCõE1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿõEÿÿÿÿLFW0ÄELF' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select Sixteen Color ReductionsBõE¿F1`P2”„2¿FG>HStep 2: Select Sixteen Color ReductionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')P&LFG* $€L€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen ColorsT)¿FcG+ &€R€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Choose Sixteen Color ReductionÛ«G>H0 .€W€€橗 †€‰€‚ÿChoose Decrease Color Depth from the Colors menu, then choose 16 Colors. Paint Shop Pro will open the sixteen colors version of the Decrease Color Depth dialog box.1cGoH1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿoHÿÿÿÿºHK$>HºH' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Paletteg6oH!I1Kvƒ2Q‡2 !IqI‹LStep 3: Select the PaletteEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')P&ºHqI* $€L€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen ColorsH!I¹I+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Select the PalettezqIVJ# €ô€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro offers two types of 16 color palettes. You select a palette by clicking on it in the Palette group box. 驹I?K@ N€W€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿAn optimized palette contains the sixteen best colors for recreating the active image. The Windows palette contains the sixteen standard colors used by Windows. L(VJ‹L$ €Q€€‚ÿIf you will be using the image for display under Windows (as part of an application, in a multimedia presentation, etc.), or if you want to create multiple images with the same palette, use the Windows palette. If not, choose the optimized palette, because it will yield better image quality. 1?KŒL1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ŒLÿÿÿÿMT-‹LM' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Reduction Methodp?ŒL€M1甄2G3 €MÐḾStep 4: Select the Reduction MethodEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')P&MÐM* $€L€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen ColorsQ&€M!N+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Reduction MethodϟÐMðN0 .€?€€拇Π€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides three methods for reducing an image to sixteen colors. You select a method by clicking on it in the Reduction Method group box. <!N,O% €.€" œ€‚ÿNearest Color Method¬ˆðNØO$ €€€‚ÿAs the name implies, the nearest color method changes each color in the image to the color in the palette that is the closest match. =,O!€% €0€" œ€‚ÿOrØO!€Mdered Dither MethodÕØO&0 .€«€€æÇÜT€‰€‚ÿShading is achieved by patterned intermingling of pixels. Best suited to certain print mediums. Images often appear "hashed", or composed of dots, x-shapes, and crosses. Only available for Windows palette. >!€d% €2€" œ€‚ÿError Diffusion Methodh5&́3 6€j€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿUses non-patterned, pixel-to-pixel dithering. 1dý1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ ýÿÿÿÿH‚K$́H‚' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Select the Optionsg6ý¯‚1ÙQ‡2@3 ¯‚ÿ‚§…Step 5: Select the OptionsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')P&H‚ÿ‚* $€L€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen ColorsH¯‚Gƒ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Select the OptionsŽ_ÿ‚Ճ/ .€Ÿ€€æM3Ÿ€‰€‚ÿThere are two options. You select an option by clicking on it in the Options group box. ;Gƒ„% €,€" œ€‚ÿBoost Marked ColorsšՃՄ$ €C€€‚ÿSets the factor by which the colors in the selection are boosted. Only available for an optimized palette. Enter the boost factor into the option's text box. =„…% €0€" œ€‚ÿReduce Color Bleeding•bՄ§…3 6€Ä€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿReduces the amount of left-to-right color bleeding that occurs when using Error Diffusion. 1…؅1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ؅ÿÿÿÿ%†M&§…%†' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the OK Buttoni8؅Ž†1AG3ÿÿÿÿŽ†ކî‡Step 6: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')P&%†ކ* $€L€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to Sixteen ColorsIŽ†'‡+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Click the OK Buttonǣކî‡$ €G€€‚ÿWhen you have finished selecting the color reduction options, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and reduce the image's color depth. 1'‡ˆ1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿˆhˆ¢ˆI"î‡hˆ' €D€° €‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 Colors:ˆ¢ˆ* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1hˆӈ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿӈÿÿÿÿ1‰^7¢ˆ1‰' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)zIӈ«‰1|ÿÿÿÿ®3«‰÷‰BŒStep 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)DB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"1‰÷‰* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 Colors[0«‰RŠ+ &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)ð ÷‰BŒP n€A€€‚Ì!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ÿAn image's less common colors can be eliminated when you reduce color depth. The uncommon colors are often esthetically significant, providing the image's contrast, or emphasizing its subject. Their elimination by a color reduction algorithm can harm or even ruin an image's composition. To emphasize the significance of a specific color or colors, select an area that contains the colors you want to boost. 1RŠsŒ1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿsŒÿÿÿÿƌS,BŒƌ' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select 256 Color Reductiono>sŒ51Y3Á35©ŽStep 2: Select 256 Color ReductionEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"ƌ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 ColorsP%5э+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Choose 256 Color ReductionØš©Ž0 .€Q€€æuÆ8€‰€‚ÿChoose Decrease Color Depth from the Colors menu, then choose 256 Colors. Paint Shop Pro will open the 256 colors version of the Decrease Color Depth dialog box.1эڎ1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿڎÿÿÿÿ%K$©Ž%' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the Paletteg6ڎŒ1c®3‚3Œ؏¡ÂStep 3: Select the PaletteEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"%؏* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 ColorsHŒ,À+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€؏,À%‚ÿStep 3: Select the Palettež{؏ÊÀ# €ö€€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro offers two types of 256 color palettes. You select a palette by clicking on it in the Palette group box. Á,ÀËÁ@ N€‡€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿAn optimized palette contains the 256 best colors for recreating the active image. The standard palette covers the full color spectrum and includes the sixteen standard Windows colors. Ö²ÊÀ¡Â$ €e€€‚ÿIf you want to create multiple images with the same palette, select the standard palette. Otherwise, choose the optimized palette, because it will yield better image quality. 1ËÁÒÂ1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÒÂÿÿÿÿ&ÃT-¡Â&Ã' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Reduction Methodp?Ò–Ã1&Á3…3–ÃâÃ×ÇStep 4: Select the Reduction MethodEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"&ÃâÃ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 ColorsQ&–Ã3Ä+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Reduction Method˛âÃþÄ0 .€7€€拇Π€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides three methods for reducing an image to 256 colors. You select a method by clicking on it in the Reduction Method group box. <3Ä:Å% €.€" œ€‚ÿNearest Color Method¬ˆþÄæÅ$ €€€‚ÿAs the name implies, the nearest color method changes each color in the image to the color in the palette that is the closest match. =:Å#Æ% €0€" œ€‚ÿOrdered Dither MethodÚæÅ1Ç4 6€µ€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿShading is achieved by patterned intermingling of pixels. Best suited to certain print mediums. Images often appear "hashed", or composed of dots, x-shapes, and crosses. Only available for the standard palette. >#ÆoÇ% €2€" œ€‚ÿError Diffusion Methodh51Ç×Ç3 6€j€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿUses non-patterned, pixel-to-pixel dithering. 1oÇÈ1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÈÿÿÿÿSÈK$×ÇSÈ' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Select the Optionsg6ȺÈ1;‚3ˆ3ºÈÉÍStep 5: Select the OptionsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')L"SÈÉ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 ColorsHºÈNÉ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Select the OptionsaÉÞÉ/ .€Â€€橗ĩ€‰€‚ÿThere are three options. You select an option by clicking on it in the Options group box. ;NÉÊ% €,€" œ€‚ÿBoost Marked Colorsæ²ÞÉÿÊ4 6€e€€ï”£sL €‰€‚ÿSets the factor by which the colors in the selection are boosted (see Step 1). Only available for an optimized palette. Enter the boost factor into the option's text box. >Ê=Ë% €2€" œ€‚ÿInclude Windows ColorsÝÿÊ>Ì$ €»€€‚ÿAdds the sixteen standard Windows colors to an optimized palette. (Standard palette contains the Windows colors by default.) Select this option if you will be using the image under Windows running a 256 color display. ==Ë{Ì% €0€" œ€‚ÿReduce Color Bleeding•b>ÌÍ3 6€Ä€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿReduces the amount of left-to-right color bleeding that occurs when using Error Diffusion. 1{ÌAÍ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿAÍÿÿÿÿŽÍM&ÍŽÍ' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the OK Buttoni8AÍ÷Í1A…3ÿÿÿÿ÷ÍCÎSÏStep 6: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')L"ŽÍCÎ* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 256 ColorsI÷ÍŒÎ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Click the OK ButtonÇ£CÎSÏ$ €G€€‚ÿWhen you have finished selecting the color reduction options, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and reduce the image's color depth. 1ŒÎ„Ï1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ„ÏÔÏP)SÏÔÏ' €R€° €‚ÿReducing an Image to 32K or 64K Colors:„Ï* $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWÔÏSÏindow:Steps1ÔÏK1‹ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿKÿÿÿÿ¥Z3¥' €f€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select 32K or 64K Color ReductionvEK1:ÿÿÿÿ#4nwStep 1: Select 32K or 64K Color ReductionDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')S)¥n* $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 32K or 64K ColorsW,Å+ &€X€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Choose 32K or 64K Color Reduction²lnwF Z€Ý€€‡"€‚‚‡"€‚‚æ†{…€‰€‚ÿ A 32K or 64K color image is treated by Paint Shop Pro as a 16 million color image. Operations performed after the conversion may result in images that are no longer 32K or 16K colors.Images of 32K and 64K color depth (15 bits-per-pixel and 16 bits-per-pixel respectively) are handled in memory as 16 million color images (24 bits-per-pixel). The Statusbar will indicate that images in these formats can support 16 million colors. Choose Decrease Color Depth from the Colors menu, then choose 32K Colors or 64K Colors. Paint Shop Pro will open the appropriate version of the Decrease Color Depth dialog box.1Åš1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ šÿÿÿÿüT-wü' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select the Reduction Methodp?šl1à34%4!l¿nStep 2: Select the Reduction MethodEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')S)ü¿* $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 32K or 64K ColorsQ&l+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the Reduction MethodР¿à0 .€A€€æ€>€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides two methods for reducing an image to 32K or 64K colors. You select a method by clicking on it in the Reduction Method group box. <% €.€" œ€‚ÿNearest Color Method¬ˆàÈ$ €€€‚ÿAs the name implies, the nearest color method changes each color in the image to the color in the palette that is the closest match. >% €2€" œ€‚ÿError Diffusion Methodh5Èn3 6€j€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿUses non-patterned, pixel-to-pixel dithering. 1Ÿ1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ"ŸÿÿÿÿìM&nì' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Select the OK Buttoni8ŸU 1A#4ÿÿÿÿ#U š ž Step 3: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')S)ìš * $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to 32K or 64K ColorsIU ñ + &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Click the OK ButtonÇ£š ž $ €G€€‚ÿWhen you have finished selecting the color reduction options, click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and reduce the image's color depth. 1ñ é 1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ$é A { X1ž A ' €b€° €‚ÿReducing an Image to Between 16 and 257 Colors:é { * $€ €˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps1A ¬ 1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ%¬ ÿÿÿÿ ^7{  ' €n€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)zI¬ „ 1|ÿÿÿÿ¢4&„ Î Step 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)DB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J Î * $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to X Colors[0„ ) + &€`€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select the Colors to Boost (Optional)ð Î P n€A€€‚Ì!AL(`Selecting Part of an Image')€‰€‚ÿAn image's less common colors can be eliminated when you reduce color depth. The uncommon colors are often esthetically significant, providing the image's contrast, or emphasizing its subject. Their elimination by a color reduction algorithm can harm or even ruin an image's composition. To emphasize the significance of a specific color or colors, select an area that contains the colors you want to boost. 1) J1ƒÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ'JÿÿÿÿœR+œ' €V€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Select X Colors Reductionn=J@1T‡44(@`@ƒAStep 2: Select X Colors ReductionEB(`btnPrev');EB(œ@œ`btnNext')J œ`@* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to X ColorsO$@¯@+ &€H€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Choose X Colors ReductionÔ€`@ƒA0 .€I€€æ9÷þ̀‰€‚ÿChoose Decrease Color Depth from the Colors menu, then choose X Colors. Paint Shop Pro will open the X colors version of the Decrease Color Depth dialog box.1¯@ŽA1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ)ŽAÿÿÿÿBS,ƒAB' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 3: Enter the Number of Colorso>ŽAvB1 ¢4tƒ4*vBÁB0EStep 3: Enter the Number of ColorsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')K!BÁB* $€B€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to X ColorsP%vBC+ &€J€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 3: Enter the Number of ColorsíÁB0E2 2€Û€€æw/р‰€‚‚‚ÿType the number of colors that you want the image to contain into the Number of Colors Text Box. Double-click in the text box to access it. You can choose any number from 2 to 256. When the total number of colors is 16 or below, the resulting color depth will be 4 bits per pixel. Whe the number of colors is 17 or higher, the depth will be 8 bits per pixel. The number selected is the TOTAL number of colors in the resulting image regardless of the Include Windows Colors setting.1CaE1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ+aEÿÿÿÿµET-0EµE' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 4: Select the Reduction Methodp?aE%F1ׁ4b…4,%FoFIStep 4: Select the Reduction MethodEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J µEoF* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to X ColorsQ&%FÀF+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 4: Select the Reduction MethodǗoF‡G0 .€/€€æX‡ì €‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides two methods for reducing an image to X colors. You select a method by clicking on it in the Reduction Method group box. <ÀFÃG% €.€" œ€‚ÿNearest Color Method¬ˆ‡GoH$ €€€‚ÿAs the name implies, the nearest color method changes each color in the image to the color in the palette that is the closest match. >ÃG­H% €2€" œ€‚ÿError Diffusion Methodh5oHI3 6€j€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿUses non-patterned, pixel-to-pixel dithering. 1­HFI1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ-FIÿÿÿÿ‘IK$I‘I' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 5: Select the Optionsg6FIøI1tƒ44ˆ4.øIBJ"NStep 5: Select the OptionsEB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')J ‘IBJ* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to X ColorsHøIŠJ+ &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 5: Select the OptionsaBJK/ .€Â€€橗ĩ€‰€‚ÿThere are three options. You select an option by clicking on it in the Options group box. ;ŠJUK% €,€" œ€‚ÿBoost Marked Colorsœ‰KL4 6€€€ï;E€ø €‰€‚ÿSets the factor by which the colors in the selection are boosted (see Step 1). Enter the boost factor into the option's text box. >UKPL% €2€" œ€‚ÿInclude Windows ColorsÜLPM$ €¹€€‚ÿAdds the sixteen standard Windows colors to the image's palette. (Standard palette contains the Windows colors by default.) Select this option if you will be using the image under Windows running a 256 color display. =PLM% €0€" œ€‚ÿReduce Color Bleeding•bPM"N3 6€Ä€€ï›® €‰€‚ÿReduces the amount of left-to-right color bleeding that occurs when using Error Diffusion. 1MSN1~ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ/SNÿÿÿÿ NM&"N N' €L€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 6: Select the OK Buttoni8SN O1tb…4ÿÿÿÿ0 OSOo€Step 6: Select the OK ButtonEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')J  NSO* $€@€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿReducing an Image to X ColorsI OœO+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 6: Click the OK ButtonÇ£SOo€$ €G€€‚ÿWhen you have finished selecting the color reduction options, cœOo€ Nlick the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and reduce the image's color depth. 1œO €1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ1 €à€@o€à€' €2€° €‚ÿUsing the Dropper Tool; €* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Steps21à€L1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ2LÿÿÿÿœP)œ' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 1: Select the Dropper Tooll;L‚1ˆÿÿÿÿû53‚K‚¢…Step 1: Select the Dropper ToolDB(`btnPrev');EB(`btnNext')CœK‚* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Dropper ToolM"‚˜‚+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 1: Select the Dropper ToolÌšK‚dƒ$ €Q€€‚ÿUse the Dropper tool to select an active color from the image. Selecting from the image lets you match colors exactly. You can activate the Dropper tool in two ways:‚S…T v€7€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€æ-;¿€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Dropper tool on the Tool palette. If you have tool preferences set to standard, the cursor changes to the Dropper. If you have tool preferences set to precise, the cursor changes to the precision cursor.2While using a painting or drawing tool, press the key. The cursor changes to the Dropper. Keep the key pressed in until after you have finished selecting a color.)dƒ|…& €€P!:€‚ÿ&S…¢…# €€€‚ÿ1|…Ӆ1|ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ4Ӆÿÿÿÿ†K$¢…†' €H€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Step 2: Point At the Colorg6Ӆ…†1*S5ÿÿÿÿ5…†ȆÁˆStep 2: Point At the ColorEB(`btnPrev');DB(`btnNext')C†Ȇ* $€2€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Dropper ToolF…†‡+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿStep 2: Select the ColorO,Ȇ]‡# €X€€‚ÿTo select a color using the Dropper tool:>ü‡›ˆB R€ù€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒƒ‚ƒƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ÿ1Move the Dropper over the color you want to select. Click to select an active color:Left-click to select the foreground color.Right-click to select the background color.2The selected color appears in the appropriate active color box.&]‡Áˆ# €€€‚ÿ1›ˆòˆ1Wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ6ÿÿÿÿòˆ‰&Áˆ‰# €€€‚ÿ1òˆI‰1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ7I‰‰ƉD‰‰' €:€° €‚ÿWorking with Image Windows9I‰Ɖ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1‰÷‰1…ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ8÷‰ÿÿÿÿKŠT-ƉKŠ' €Z€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Working with Image Windows Overviewg6÷‰²Š1wÿÿÿÿ¬59²Š)‹oŽWorking with Image Windows OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')GKŠùŠ* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0²Š)‹, (€ €€†"€é‚ÿQ&ùŠz‹+ &€L€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows Overview(Ÿ)‹¢Œ‰ à€?€€ÌKL(`Opening Image Files')€‰€ÌKL(`Creating Image Files')€‰€æ]K¢€‰€ïó©6€‰€‚ÿWhen you open a file or create a new file, Paint Shop Pro displays the image in an image window. Image windows appear within the Workspace. £5z‹En ¬€n€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæ®ýi€‰€‚†"€ƒÌAL(`Image Window Tasks')€‰€‚ÿAbout Image WindowsImage Window Tasks5¢Œz% € €" œ€‚ÿTitlebar Textõ¥EoŽP n€K€€æ¶òk:€‰€ï¿7˜}€‰€ï4¿1q€‰€‚ÿAn image window's titlebar displays the image's filename and magnification level, and indicates if the image has been edited since it was last saved. 1z Ž1{ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ: ŽÿÿÿÿêŽJ#oŽêŽ' €F€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Selecting an Image Window], ŽG1¶5́5;GŸzÂSelecting an Image WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')Gꎎ* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0GŸ, (€ €€†"€ê‚ÿGŽÀ+ &€8€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿSelecting an Image WinŸÀêŽdowiFŸzÀ# €Œ€€‚ÿOnly one image window can be active at a time. The selected image: WèÀÑÁo ¬€Ù€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ¶òk:€‰€‚†"€ƒæW<¢€‰€‚ÿReceives all editing commands. Appears on top of any other image windows.Has a highlighted titlebar.Has a check next to its filename on the Window menu. Its filename also appears in the Main Window's Titlebar. ©vzÀzÂ3 6€ì€€ï«xP€‰€‚ÿYou can select an image window by clicking on it, or you can choose the image's filename from the Window menu. 1ÑÁ«Â1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ<«Âÿÿÿÿ÷ÂL%zÂ÷Â' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Positioning an Image Window_.«ÂVÃ1¬55„5=VÃÍÞÇPositioning an Image WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')G÷Ã* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0VÃÍÃ, (€ €€†"€ë‚ÿIÃÄ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿPositioning an Image WindowBÍÃXÄ% €:€" œ€‚ÿStandard Windows Commands ßdÄ7Å{ ƀ΀RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï|Ԏ€‰€‚†"€ƒïjTRm€‰€‚†"€ƒïõœ×5€‰€‚ÿMaximize, Minimize, and RestoreMoving an Image WindowResizing an Image Window;XÄrÅ% €,€" œ€‚ÿFull Screen Preview|Y7ÅîÅ# €²€€‚ÿFull Screen Preview displays the active image against a full-screen black background. œrÅÇX ~€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæ. ·ý€‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo use Full Screen Preview, choose it from the View menu, or click the Full Screen Preview button in the Toolbar. To return to normal viewing, press + + . 5îÅ8Ç$ €"€ €‚ÿRelated Topicsf!ÇžÇE Z€D€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï&šú5€‰€‚ÿMaximizing the Workspacef58ÇÈ1¯ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ>ÿÿÿÿÈMÈFull Screen PreviewJI(`',`ImageWindows.Positioning')I!žÇMÈ( €B€" œ€€‚ÿ Search / Full Screen Preview1È~È1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ?~ÈÿÿÿÿÇÈI"MÈÇÈ' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Scrolling the Image Area\+~È#É1ö́5u…5@#ÉšÉ_ËScrolling the Image AreaSaveMark(`SubWin')GÇÈjÉ* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0#ÉšÉ, (€ €€†"€ì‚ÿFjÉàÉ+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿScrolling the Image Area±šÉ‘Ê$ €€€‚ÿIf an image is larger than its window's image area, you can view it by scrolling through the image area. There are three ways to do this: ÎTàÉ_Ëz Ā®€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïÆ¡Z䀉€‚†"€ƒï¬…y€‰€‚†"€ƒïÒÿQ€‰€‚ÿUsing the Mover ToolUsing the ScrollbarsUsing the Cursor Keys1‘ʐË1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿAËÿÿÿÿÖËF_ËÖË' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Closing Image WindowsY(Ë/Ì1ª5„5%6B/ÌŠÌ+Closing Image WindowsSaveMark(`SubWin')GÖËvÌ* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0/ÌŠÌ, (€ €€†"€í‚ÿCvÌéÌ+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿClosing Image WindowsmJŠÌVÍ# €”€€‚ÿWhen you close an image window, you are also closing the image's file. E éÌ›Í% €@€" œ€‚ÿClosing a Single Image Window?ÞVÍÚÎa €œ€PÈ:„3€H€ƒ€ƒïN1õ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæRf¶³€‰€æÀ.-Ȁ‰€‚ÿ1Select the image window. 2Choose Close from the File menu, or click the image window's Close button. If you have edited the file and haven't saved it, you will be prompted to confirm your decision. ;›ÍÏ% €,€" œ€‚ÿClosing All Windows ÊÚÎ+@ N€•€€æqí%„€‰€ïҠ€‚ÿTo close all image windows and the Browser Window, choose Close All from the Window menu. The Window Close All option determines whether you will be prompted to sÏ+ÖËave any new or edited files. 1Ï\1}ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿC\ÿÿÿÿšL%+š' €J€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Arranging the Image Windows_.\1àu…5Y6D~-Arranging the Image WindowsSaveMark(`SubWin')GšN* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0~, (€ €€†"€î‚ÿINÇ+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿArranging the Image Windowsj~T# €Ô€€‚ÿThe Window menu contains three selections that arrange all of the image windows and the Browser Window:}2ÇÑK f€j€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿCascadeTile HorizontallyTile Vertically\9T-# €r€€‚ÿThese commands only affect the non-minimized windows. 1Ñ^1tÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿE^ÿÿÿÿ¡C-¡' €8€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Zooming in and OutV%^÷1®%6Ã6F÷nëZooming in and OutSaveMark(`SubWin')G¡>* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0÷n, (€ €€†"€ï‚ÿ@>®+ &€*€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿZooming In and Out@n/A R€€€€ÌAL(`Zoom Features')€‰€‚ÿThe Zoom Features control the magnification of an image: àJ®– ü€œ€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï9íÿ€‰€‚†"€ƒï¢ýÄ€‰€‚†"€ƒïÐúW«€‰€‚†"€ƒï…â⎀‰€‚ÿZoom ToolHot KeysNormal ViewingZoom Submenus4/C% €€" œ€‚ÿZoom Optionsšuë3 6€ê€€ï%©œ€‰€‚ÿThe Zoom options determine if Paint Shop Pro will automatically resize image windows when you zoom in or out. 1C1yÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿGÿÿÿÿdH!ëd' €B€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Enabling the Pixel Grid[*¿12Y6+6H¿67 Enabling the Pixel GridSaveMark(`SubWin')Gd* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0¿6, (€ €€†"€ð‚ÿ?u+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEnabling the Grid…=6ú H ^€{€€æÑAð€‰€çÆ 0ª€‰€æ? š€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro includes a Grid to help you align your artwork and arrange image elements symmetrically. The grid spacing can be set at any size, and the grid can be configured to display inches, centimeters, and pixels. Set the options in the Rulers and Units tab of the General Preferences dialog box.×u @ N€³€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo display the grid, choose Grid from the View menu. A check mark appears next to the command when its feature is displayed. To hide the grid, choose Grid from the View menu again. The check mark disappears.&ú 7 # €€€‚ÿ1 h 1qÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿIh ÿÿÿÿš @7 š ' €2€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Enabling RulersS"h û 1Ã6n6Jû r QEnabling RulersSaveMark(`SubWin')Gš B * $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows0û r , (€ €€†"€ñ‚ÿ=B ¯ + &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEnabling RulersVr H ^€€€æppàT€‰€çÆ 0ª€‰€æ? š€‰€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro includes Rulers to help you align your artwork and arrange image elements symmetrically. Rulers can be configured to display inches, centimeters, and pixels. Set the options in the Rulers and Units tab of the General Preferences dialog box.߯ $@ N€Ã€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo display the rulers, choose Rulers from the View menu. A check mark appears next to the command when its feature is displayed. To hide the rulers, choose Rulers from the View menu again. The check mark disappears.-Q* $€€Pä:„O€d€‚ÿ1$‚1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿK‚ÿÿÿÿÆDQÆ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Displaying Toolbarsi8‚;@1°+6ÿÿÿÿL;@ÿÿÿÿ‚@DisplayinÆ;@Æg ToolbarsJI(`>Main',`ToolWindows.Displaying')GÆ‚@* $€:€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Image Windows1;@³@1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿM³@õ@0AB‚@õ@' €6€° €‚ÿSelect Window Dialog Box;³@0A* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:How To1õ@aA1„ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿNaAÿÿÿÿŽAS,0AŽA' €X€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Select Window Dialog Boxf5aAB1MÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿOBiB…DUsing the Select Window Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')O%ŽAiB* $€J€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Select Window Dialog Box{XBäB# €°€€‚ÿOnly nine images can appear on the Window menu. To access any remaining open images: ¡GiB…DZ ‚€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæìµÀ€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæ”žÖۀ‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose More Windows from the bottom of the Window menu. Paint Shop Pro will open the Select Window dialog box. 2Click the image's filename. If the filename isn't visible, use the scrollbar to move through the list. 3Click the OK button. Paint Shop Pro will close the dialog box and activate the image. 1äB¶D1lÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿP¶DûD6EE…DûD' €<€° €‚ÿPositioning an Image Window;¶D6E* $€"€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:How To1ûDgE1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿQgEÿÿÿÿ·EP)6E·E' €R€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Maximize, Minimize, and Restorec2gEF1ÿÿÿÿ„„6RF’FþHMaximize, Minimize, and RestoreSaveMark(`SubWin')H·EbF* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPositioning an Image Window0F’F, (€ €€†"€ò‚ÿM"bFßF+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMaximize, Minimize, and RestoreߒFúG< F€¿€€æRf¶³€‰€æ¶òk:€‰€‚ÿYou can maximize, minimize, and restore an image using the appropriate window buttons Double-clicking on the text display section of the titlebar switches an image window between its maximized and normal states. >ßF8H% €2€" œ€‚ÿMaximized Image WindowƖúGþH0 .€-€€æˆÞL£€‰€‚ÿA maximized image window occupies the entire Workspace. When an image window is maximized, its titlebar features are added to the Main Window. 18H/I1xÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿS/IÿÿÿÿvIG þHvI' €@€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Moving an Image WindowZ)/IÐI1ó‘‚6څ6TÐIHJ LMoving an Image WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')HvIJ* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPositioning an Image Window0ÐIHJ, (€ €€†"€ó‚ÿDJŒJ+ &€2€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMoving an Image WindowW4HJãJ# €h€€‚ÿTo move an image window to a different location: 'ČJ Lc ”€‰€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒæ]K¢€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Point the cursor at the text display portion of the titlebar.2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 3Drag the window by moving the mouse.4Release the mouse button.1ãJ;L1zÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿU;Lÿÿÿÿ„LI" L„L' €D€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Resizing an Image Window\+;LàL1ú„„6ÿÿÿÿVàLXM-€Resizing an Image WindowSaveMark(`SubWin')H„L(M* $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿPositioning an Image Window0àLXM, (€ €€†"€ô‚ÿF(MžM+ &€6€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿResizing an Image WindowL)XMêM# €R€€‚ÿTo change the size of an image window:` žMJOW |€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Point at a side or corner of the window. The cursor will change to a double-headed arrow. Point at a corner to move two sides at once.2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 3Drag the window by moving the mouse.4Release the mouse button.J%êM”O% €J€" œ€‚ÿResizing a Window to Fit Its ImagejJO-€# €Ô€€‚ÿTo resize an image window so that it exactly fits its image, choose Fit ”O-€„Lto Image from the Window menu. 1”O^€1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿW^€ €ـB-€ €' €6€° €‚ÿScrolling the Image Area9^€ـ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1 € 1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿX ÿÿÿÿOEـO' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Mover ToolX' §1lÿÿÿÿì7Y§‚W„Using the Mover ToolSaveMark(`SubWin')EOì* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿScrolling the Image Area0§‚, (€ €€†"€õ‚ÿBì^‚+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Mover Tool{X‚ق# €°€€‚ÿYou use the Mover Tool to drag the part of the image that you want to see into view. ~÷^‚W„‡ ܀ï€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæú·€‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæ]K¢€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒæÊ €‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Mover button in the Tool palette. 2Place the mover icon over the image area. 3Press and hold the primary mouse button. 4Scroll through the image by moving the mouse. 5Release the mouse button. 1قˆ„1vÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿZˆ„ÿÿÿÿ̈́EW„̈́' €<€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the ScrollbarsX'ˆ„%…1oH7S7[%…š…؈Using the ScrollbarsSaveMark(`SubWin')Ë́j…* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿScrolling the Image Area0%…š…, (€ €€†"€ö‚ÿBj…܅+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Scrollbars󷚅φ< F€o€€攞Öۀ‰€æü*·3€‰€‚ÿWhen an image is larger than its window's image area, scrollbars appear at the right side and/or bottom of the image area. You use a scrollbar by moving the slider button. ÿ±Ü…·N j€c€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒæÊ €‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Point at the slider button with the mouse. 2Press and hold the primary mouse button. 3Use the mouse to drag the button in the direction you want to scroll. N+φˆ# €V€€‚ÿYou can also move the slider button by: Œ|·؈@ P€ü€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClicking on the arrow buttons at each end of the scrollbar. Clicking between the slider button and an arrow button. 1ˆ ‰1wÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ\ ‰ÿÿÿÿO‰F؈O‰' €>€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Cursor KeysY( ‰š‰1Xì7ÿÿÿÿ]š‰ŠD‹Using the Cursor KeysSaveMark(`SubWin')EO‰í‰* $€6€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿScrolling the Image Area0š‰Š, (€ €€†"€÷‚ÿCí‰`Š+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Cursor Keysä‹ŠD‹Y €€€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ€ €€ €‚†"€ƒ€ €€ €‚ÿPress , , <­>, and <¯> to scroll vertically. Press , , <¬>, and <®> to scroll horizontally. 1`Šu‹1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ^u‹¬‹å‹7D‹¬‹' € €° €‚ÿZoom Features9u‹å‹* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1¬‹Œ1kÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ_ŒÿÿÿÿPŒ:å‹PŒ' €&€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Zoom ToolMŒŒ1<ÿÿÿÿ€7`ŒÀZoom ToolSaveMark(`SubWin'):PŒ׌* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿZoom Features0Œ, (€ €€†"€ø‚ÿ7 ׌>+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿZoom ToolkH©# €€€‚ÿThe Zoom Tool is probably the most intuitive way to zoom in and out. ÿ«>šŽT v€W€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒæaԀ‰€æp3gW€‰€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Click the Zoom button in the Tool palette. The cursor will change to a small magnifying glass. 2You can increase or decrease the magnification level: j©ÀY €€'€PـVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæÊ €‰€‚†"€ƒæès–'€‰€‚ÿTo zoom in, click the image with the primary mouse button. Paint Shop Pro will increase the magnification factor by one level. To zoom out, click the image with the secondary mouse button. Paint Shop Pro will decrease the magnification factošŽÀPŒr by one level. 1šŽOÀ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿaOÀÿÿÿÿˆÀ9ÀˆÀ' €$€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Hot KeysLOÀÔÀ1FJ7ò€7bÔÀ>ÁSÂHot KeysSaveMark(`SubWin'):ˆÀÁ* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿZoom Features0ÔÀ>Á, (€ €€†"€ù‚ÿ6 ÁtÁ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿHot Keysßš>ÁSÂ7 <€Q€Pÿ~‚€€ƒ‚€€ƒ‚ÿZoom InPress <+> on the numeric keypad to increase magnification by one level. Zoom OutPress <-> on the numeric keypad to decrease magnification by one level. 1tÁ„Â1pÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿc„ÂÿÿÿÿÃÂ?SÂÃÂ' €0€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Normal ViewingR!„ÂÃ1Œ€7ց7dÃÃÚÄNormal ViewingSaveMark(`SubWin'):ÃÂOÃ* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿZoom Features0ÃÃ, (€ €€†"€ú‚ÿ<OûÃ+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿNormal ViewingX5ÃÄ# €j€€‚ÿTo return an image to 1:1 magnification, you can: Çp»ÃÚÄW ~€ä€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæ!ÆTǀ‰€æäUÿ€‰€‚ÿChoose Normal Viewing (1:1) from the View menu. Click the Normal Viewing button in the Toolbar. 1Ä Å1oÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿe ÅÿÿÿÿIÅ>ÚÄIÅ' €.€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Zoom SubmenusQ ÅšÅ1Ðò€7ÿÿÿÿfšÅÆ£ÇZoom SubmenusSaveMark(`SubWin'):IÅÔÅ* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿZoom Features0šÅÆ, (€ €€†"€û‚ÿ;ÔÅ?Æ+ &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿZoom SubmenusyVÆžÆ# €¬€€‚ÿThere are two submenus on the View menu that contain image magnification settings: ëª?Æ£ÇA P€Y€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿThe Zoom In selection opens a submenu that lists zoom in magnification factors. The Zoom Out selection opens a submenu that lists zoom out magnification factors. 1žÆÔÇ1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿgÿÿÿÿÔÇúÇ&£ÇúÇ# €€€‚ÿ1ÔÇ+È1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿh+ÈhÈ¡È=úÇhÈ' €,€° €‚ÿWorking with Layers9+È¡È* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Main1hÈÒÈ1uÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿiÒÈÿÿÿÿÉD¡ÈÉ' €:€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Working with Layers`/ÒÈvÉ1›ÿÿÿÿ8jvÉæÉLWorking with Layers OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')@ɶÉ* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Layers0vÉæÉ, (€ €€†"€ü‚ÿ6 ¶ÉÊ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOverviewvRæÉ’Ì$ €¥€€‚ÿA layer is an individual level of an image. Think of it as a transparent sheet. In a multi-layered image, these sheets are placed in a stack. When you apply paint to a layer, it is like covering one of these sheets. Some layers are completely covered in paint; others contain unpainted areas. The areas you haven’t covered remain transparent, and you can see the layer underneath. You can add and delete layers, rearrange their order, and blend their pixels in a variety of ways. Until you merge the layers, they remain independent and can be edited without affecting the rest of the layers.ÙÊ’Ï' €³€€‚‚‚‚ÿA newly created Paint Shop Pro image consists of one layer, the background layer. This is analogous to the canvas of a painting; every image must have at least one layer. Paint Shop Pro supports up to 64 layers per image. The actual number of layers you can create may be further limited by the amount of memory in your computer. The layer you are editing is called the current layer. When you make a layer current, it is made visible; however, a visible current layer will be transparent if it contains no data. As you work with images containing multiple layers, make sure the appropriate layer is current before you start editing. On the Layer palette, the current layer’s Layer and Visibility buttons are "pressed in. "®g’ÌLG \€Ñ€€‚ç'û’Ê€‰€çؒØ.€‰€‚‡"€‚ÿPaint Shop Pro provides the Layer p’ÏLÉalette, the Layer Properties dialog box, and various commands in the Layers menu for working with layers. They contain many of the same functions; use the method you prefer. An image must be a grey scale or 24-bit color image to contain more than one layer. You can increase an image’s bit depth if necessary.`/’Ϭ1qBƒ7=8k¬\Working with Layers OverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')@Lì* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Layers0¬, (€ €€†"€ý‚ÿIìe+ &€<€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLayer Properties Dialog BoxöÆ[0 .€€€æ÷m X€‰€‚ÿUse the Layer Properties dialog box to select and edit the attributes of individual layers. This dialog box automatically opens when you create a new layer using one of the following methods:žejW |€w€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæüc«i€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClicking the Add New Layer button on the Tool palette.Right-clicking a Layer button and choosing New from the pop-up menu.Choosing the New command from the Layers menu. å¿[O& €€€‚‚‚ÿThe upper half of the dialog box contains the Layer and Mask panels. The options within them, except for the Layer Name, can also be controlled using the Layers palette. The default names for new layers are "Layer1," "Layer2," etc. When you create a new layer, type a name that will allow you to recognize the layer contents easily.After you have created a layer, you can re-open its Layer Properties dialog box by doing one of the following: Áj\L f€‰€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚‚ÿClicking its Layer button and choosing Properties from the Layers menu.Right-clicking its Layer button and choosing Properties from the pop-up menu.Double-clicking its Layer button.PO¬1Ô8ï8l¬¿ Layer BasicsSaveMark(`SubWin')@\ì* $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Layers0¬, (€ €€†"€þ‚ÿ:ìV+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLayer Basics^[ § œ€€‚‚çxBÜN€‰€‚çg6€‰€‚çëlx€‰€‚ç Žû­€‰€‚矠×t€‰€‚çŸjŸ„€‰€‚ç %ò€‰€‚çU¶€Œ€‰€‚ç÷#³Ä€‰€‚ç5NR‰€‰€‚ÿClick on the topics below to learn some of the basics about using layers.Background and Background LayerCreating a New LayerAdding a LayerDuplicating a LayerDeleting LayersViewing LayersMoving a Layer within an ImageRenaming a LayerCopying a Layer to Another ImageCopying Layers Using the Browserd*V¿ : D€T€çþ]ú1€‰€‚çÏa9%€‰€‚‚ÿModifying LayersMerging LayersQ [  1)=8ÿÿÿÿm € x Layer OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin')@¿ P * $€,€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿWorking with Layers0 € , (€ €€†"€ÿ‚ÿ;P » + &€ €v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLayer Options•€ P ƒ Ԁ%€€‚€‚犈€‰€‚ç[.+€‰€‚ç&FÕ쀉€‚çÐ N·€‰€‚ç*_[选€‚ç*_[选€‚çows€‰€‚ÿClick on the topics below to learn about various layer options.Using the Smart Mover ToolProtecting Transparent Areas of a LayerGrouping LayersChanging Overall Layer OpacityEnabling a Layer MaskLinking Masks to LayersLayer Blend Modes(» x % €€‘€€‚ÿU$P Í 1~ÿÿÿÿ8nÍ 6BBackground LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9x * $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0Í 6, (€ €€†"€‚ÿM"ƒ+ &€D€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿBackground and Background Layerñ6™% €ã€€‚‚ÿWhen you create a new image with a background color, you create a background layer of the selected color. In order to move a background layer in the stack, you must first promote it to a layer. Do this using one of the following methods:Ճº@@ N€¯€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿRight-click the background and choos™º@x e the Promote to Layer command from the pop-up menu.Open the Layer Properties dialog box. Notice that the dialog box is actually named Promote Layer and Edit Properties.(™â@% €€‘€€‚ÿ/ º@B$ €€€‚ÿWhen you create a new image and choose transparent as the background color, the new image appears as a transparent layer floating above the checkered background. It is labeled Layer 1. Because it is a layer and not a background, you can move it in the stack as is.S"â@dB1[/8~ƒ8odBÍB÷ECreating LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9BB* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0dBÍB, (€ €€†"€‚ÿBBC+ &€.€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCreating a New LayerU2ÍBdC# €d€€‚ÿTo create a new layer, do one of the following:“C÷E… ؀'€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæüc«i€‰€‚†"€ƒæY/Ó7€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæY/Ó7€‰€‚ÿChoose New from the Layers menu. The Layer Properties dialog box opens.Click the Add New Layer button at the lower left of the Layers palette. The Layer Properties dialog box opens.Right-click any Layer button on the Layer palette and choose New from the pop-up menu. The Layer Properties dialog box opens.Click the New Layer button on the toolbar. + Click the Add New Layer button on the Layer palette. A new button appears in the Layer palette, bypassing the Layer Properties dialog box. Q dCHF1ʁ8M†8pHF±FJJAdding LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9÷EF* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0HF±F, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ<FíF+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿAdding a LayerX5±FEG# €j€€‚ÿThere are several ways to add a layer to an image:!ËíFfIV z€Ÿ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿPromote a selection to a layer by choosing the Promote to Layer command from the Selections menu.Promote a floating selection to a layer by choosing the Promote to Layer command from the Selections menu.Promote a floating selection to a layer by right-clicking the Floating Selection button and then choosing Promote to Layer from the pop-up menu.Cut or copy a selection and then press + or choose Paste as New Layer from the Edit menu.ä€EGJJ@ N€M€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿDrag an image thumbnail from the Browser into an open image.Drag a Layer button from the Layer palette of the first image and drop it into the second image.V%fI J1~ƒ8€9q J KnDuplicating LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9JJÙJ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0 J K, (€ €€†"€‚ÿAÙJJK+ &€,€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDuplicating a LayerL) K–K# €R€€‚ÿThere are 4 ways to duplicate a layer:ö‡JKŒMo ¬€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæüc«i€‰€æY/Ó7€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick its Layer button, and then choose Duplicate from the Layers menu. Right-click its Layer button, and then choose Duplicate from the pop-up menu.Drag its Layer button over the Add New Layer button at the lower left of the Layer palette.Click its Layer button, choose Copy from the Edit menu to copy the layer, and then choose Paste as New Layer from the Edit menu.Í©–KYN$ €S€€‚ÿThe duplicated layer is placed in the image above the original layer, and its Layer button appears on the Layers palette above the Layer button of the original layer.L'ŒM¥N% €N€" œ€‚ÿUsing the Layer Palette Layer Button ²YNº€W |€k€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒæY/Ó7€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿEach layer in an image has a corresponding Layer button on the Layer palette that displays the layer name. Click a Layer button to make its layer active. When you add a layer, a Layer button corresponding to this layer appears on the palette; when yo¥Nº€JJu delete or merge a layer, its Layer button disappears. When you right-click a Layer button, a pop-up menu containing many of the same commands as the Layers menu opens.Ž¥Nn5 8€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚ÿWhen you pause your cursor over a Layer button, a thumbnail of that layer appears. Move the cursor to close the thumbnail.S"º€Á1=M†8Û9rÁ*‚6…Deleting LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9nú* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0Á*‚, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ>úh‚+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿDeleting a Layerœm*‚ƒ/ .€Ú€€æY/Ó7€‰€‚ÿTo delete a layer, choose Delete from the Layers menu or do one of the following on the Layer palette:Ï„h‚ӄK d€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿRight-click the Layer button, and choose Delete from the pop-up menu.Click the Layer button, and then click the Delete Layer button (trash can) at the lower left of the palette. A message appears asking you to confirm this action. Click Yes.Drag the Layer button to the Delete Layer button, and release the mouse. A message appears asking you to confirm this action. Click Yes.c@ƒ6…# €€€€‚ÿThe deleted layer’s button disappears from the Layer palette.R!ӄˆ…13€919sˆ…ñ…ó‹Viewing LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')96…Á…* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0ˆ…ñ…, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ=Á….†+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿViewing a Layer:ñ…h†% €*€" œ€‚ÿViewing All LayersjG.†҆# €Ž€€‚ÿTo make all the layers in an image visible, do one of the following:†;h†XˆK d€}€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick the Visibility buttons on the palette until all the layers are visible. When a layer is visible, its Visibility button contains a red, green, and blue square.Choose All from the View command in the Layers menu.Right-click the Layers palette, and choose All from the View command in the pop-up menu.(҆€ˆ% €€‘€€‚ÿAXˆÁˆ% €8€" œ€‚ÿViewing Individual Layers]:€ˆ‰# €t€€‚ÿTo view only a specific layer, do one of the following: ÀÁˆ)‹K d€‡€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick a Layer button to select a layer, and choose Current Only from the View command in the Layers menu.Right-click the Layer button, and choose Current Only from the View command in the pop-up menu.Click the Visibility buttons on the palette until only that layer remains visible. When a layer is visible, its Visibility button contains a red, green, and blue square. You can use this method to make as many layers visible as you want.(‰Q‹% €€‘€€‚ÿ¢v)‹ó‹, (€î€€‡"€‚ÿ Making a layer current automatically makes it visible, but a current layer without data will appear transparent.Q Q‹DŒ1gÛ9€9tDŒ­Œ¬ÀMoving LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9ó‹}Œ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0DŒ­Œ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿL!}ŒùŒ+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMoving a Layer within an Image’­Œ»0 .€%€€æY/Ó7€‰€‚ÿTo move a layer up or down in the stack of layers within an image, click its button on the Layer palette, and then do one of the following:Å…ùŒ€@ N€€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Move Up or Move Down from the Arrange command of the Layers menu. Each time you choose the command, the layer moves up or down one level. Choose Bring to Top to place the layer at the top; choose Send to Bottom to place it at the bottom or just above the background layer if there is one.On the Layer palette, drag the Layer button up or down to a new position in the stack.óÀ»À3 4€ƒ€€‡"€€€‚ÿ You must promote the background layer before you can replace it with an€Àó‹other layer. To promote a background layer, use the Layer Properties dialog box or the Layer palette pop-up menu.-€¬À* $€€PäVˆ,džØ€‚ÿS"ÀÿÀ1v19Ÿ€9uÿÀhÁ­ÂRenaming LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9¬À8Á* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0ÿÀhÁ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ?8Á§Á+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿRenaming a Layer 8hÁßÁ# €*€€‚ÿTo rename a layer:Î~§Á­ÂP p€ü€PäVˆ,džØ€ƒ€€ƒæ÷m X€‰€‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Open the Layer Properties dialog box.2Type a new name in the Name box.3Click OK to close the dialog box.S"ßÁÃ1ˆ€9cƒ9vÃiÃÀÆCopying a LayerSaveMark(`SubWin')9­Â9Ã* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0ÃiÃ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿN#9÷Ã+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCopying a Layer to Another Imageb?iÃÄ# €~€€‚ÿTo copy a layer into another image, do one of the following:ñš·Ã ÆW |€;€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒæY/Ó7€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿCut or copy a selection from the first image, and then choose Paste as New Layer from the Edit menu of the second image.Drag a Layer button from the Layer palette of the first image and drop it into the second image.Click the Layer button of the first image and choose Copy from the Edit menu. Place it into the second image by choosing Paste as New Layer from the Edit menu of the second image.¶’ÄÀÆ$ €%€€‚ÿThe new layer is placed above the current layer of the second image. Its Layer button appears at a corresponding position on the Layer palette.d3 Æ$Ç1Ÿ€9v…9w$ǍÇaÊCopying Layers Using the BrowserSaveMark(`SubWin')9ÀÆ]Ç* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0$ǍÇ, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿN#]ÇÛÇ+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿCopying Layers Using the BrowserS0Ç.È# €`€€‚ÿTo copy the layers of one image into another:QúÛÇÉW |€õ€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1Open the image file that will receive the new layers.2Open the Browser.3Navigate to and select the folder containing the file whose layers you want to copy.4Drag the thumbnail over the open image.5Release the mouse button.â².ÈaÊ0 .€e€€æY/Ó7€‰€‚ÿThe layers are copied into the open image as a linked group. To unlink the layers so that they can be moved separately, click the Layer Group buttons on the Layer palette.T#ɵÊ19 cƒ9®:xµÊˏModifying LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9aÊîÊ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0µÊË, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿ>îÊ\Ë+ &€&€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿModifying LayersS.˯Ë% €\€" œ€‚ÿApplying Effects, Deformations, and FiltersPÙ\ËÿÌw Œ€µ€€‡"€‚‚ç1y 4€‰€ç1y 4€‰€çæ[ €‰€çÖ³Ì}€‰€çÖ³Ì}€‰€çøÿNJ€‰€‚ÿ Before applying a command, make sure the layer is current. You can apply the Flip, Mirror, Rotate, Deformation, Filter, and Effect commands to layers much like you apply them to images.7¯Ë6Í% €$€" œ€‚ÿMatting a Layern?ÿÌ€Î/ ,€€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ The Matting and Defringe commands can only be applied to a grey scale or 24-bit color image.When a layer is created by removing it from an image, some of the pixels surrounding the border are included, especially when it has been antialiased or feathered. Matting cleans up the border by removing these pixels. R#6ÍöÎ/ .€H€" œ€†"€ƒ‚ÿRemoving Black and White MatteîʀΠ$ €•€€‚ÿWhen you promote a selection with white or black at the edges into a layer, the edges contains black and white. If the promoted layer is above a colored layer, the white or black needs to be removed:öÎ aÊ ËöÎ@ N€›€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿTo remove the black matte, choose Remove Black Matte from the Matting command of the Layers menu. To remove the white matte, choose Remove White Matte from the Matting command of the Layers menu.H _/ .€4€" œ€†"€ƒ‚ÿThe Defringe Command åh$ €Ë€€‚ÿDefringing bleeds non-feathered pixels in the layer edges outward and over the "jaggies" in the feathered part of the selection. Use defringe when the background of a layer is a color (not black or white). To defringe a layer:'â_E X€Å€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€ƒ€‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Choose Defringe from the Matting command of the Layers menu. The Defringe dialog box opens.2Enter the pixel width you want to defringe.3Click OK. The dialog box closes, and Paint Shop Pro defringes the layer.R!há1Ov…9ÿÿÿÿyáJh Merging LayersSaveMark(`SubWin')9* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Basics0áJ, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿ<†+ &€"€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿMerging Layers>JÄ% €2€" œ€‚ÿMerging Visible Layersó†Û$ €ç€€‚ÿMerging layers combines multiple layers into one, which decreases the memory requirements of an image. After layers are merged, they can no longer be edited separately; they have been converted into a single layer. To merge visible layers:ۓĶH ^€'€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€æY/Ó7€‰€‚€ƒƒ€‚ÿ1On the Layer palette, make the layers you want to merge visible and hide the others.2Do one of the following on the Layer palette:&æÛÜ@ N€Ñ€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿRight-click one of the layers to be merged, and choose Merge Visible from the Merge command of the pop-up menu.Right-click one of the layers to be merged, and choose Merge Visible from the Merge command of the Layers menu.(¶% €€‘€€‚ÿG"ÜK% €D€" œ€‚ÿMerging All Layers (Flattening)/z . *€€€‡"€‚‚ÿ The transparent areas of the image are replaced with white when the image is flattened. To retain the transparency, use the Merge Visible Layers command.Flattening an image merges all the layers into one background layer. Flattened images require much less memory than images with several layers, but are more difficult to edit. Because many file formats will only save flattened images, it is convenient to save images containing layers in the ".psp" format. To flatten an image, do one of the following:î®Kh @ N€a€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿChoose Merge All (Flatten) from the Merge command of the Layers menu.On the Layer palette, right-click any layer, and choose Merge All (Flatten) from the pop-up menu.Q z ¹ 1ÿÿÿÿŸ :z¹ # úLayer OptionsSaveMark(`SubWin'):h ó * $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0¹ # , (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿHó k + &€:€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Smart Mover Tooli8# Ô1 0€s€€‡"€‚‚‚‚‚ÿ You can drag a layer anywhere in the image window without cropping it, even off the canvas.The Mover tool does not automatically move the current layer -- it moves the uppermost layer that contains data. When you click an image, if you click a transparent area of the top layer, the mover tool ignores the layer and searches the other layers. When it reaches a layer containing non-transparent pixels, it selects and moves this layer. To limit the Mover tool to the current layer, press and hold the key while you click the image and drag the layer. &k ú# €€€‚ÿ`/ÔZ1à1:“‚:{ZÄxCProtecting Transparent AreasSaveMark(`SubWin'):ú”* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0ZÄ, (€ €€†"€ ‚ÿU*”%@+ &€T€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿProtecting TransÄ%@úparent Areas of a LayerˆNÄ­A: B€Ÿ€€‡"€€€‚€€‚ÿ You can lock a layer transparency any time; remember to unlock it before trying to add to the layer.The Protect Transparency option restricts the editing of a layer to the pixels that already contain data. You can edit this data, but you can not cover any transparent areas. To control this option, do one of the following:ܜ%@‰B@ N€=€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick the Protect Transparency button on the Layer palette. Select or clear the "Protect Transparency" check box in the Layer Properties dialog box.(­A±B% €€‘€€‚ÿÇ£‰BxC$ €G€€‚ÿWhen the option is selected, the padlock on the button is colored red and is closed. When the option is not selected, the padlock is colored green and is open. S"±BËC1‰Ÿ :­„:|ËC5DFGrouping LayersSaveMark(`SubWin'):xCD* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0ËC5D, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ=DrD+ &€$€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿGrouping Layersó5DF( €ç€€‚‚‚‚‚ÿThe Layer Group option lets you group layers so that they move together or in unison. When you drag a thumbnail from the Browser and release it over an image, the layers are added to the image as one group.All the layers with the same number on their Group buttons belong to a single group. Each time you click a Group button, it changes to the next valid number. A layer with an asterisk (*) on its button does not belong to any group. To group layers in an image, click their Group buttons.Q rDÞF1P“‚:&ˆ:}ÞFHGgKLayer OpacitySaveMark(`SubWin'):FG* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0ÞFHG, (€ €€†"€‚ÿL!G”G+ &€B€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿChanging Overall Layer Opacity\-HGðH/ ,€]€€‡"€‚‚‚ÿ The overall opacity of a layer and the opacity of its pixels are independent. Changing a layer’s opacity changes the appearance of the pixels, but not their opacity values.You can change the opacity of a layer without first selecting it. To set the opacity of a layer, do one of the following:²r”G¢I@ P€è€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚‚ÿDrag the Opacity slider on the palette.Enter a value for the Opacity in the Layer Properties dialog box. Å¡ðHgK$ €C€€‚ÿAt an overall opacity of 100, a layer is totally opaque and none of the underlying layer shows through. This is the default value for layers. As you drag the slider to the left to reduce the opacity, the underlying layer begins to appear. At an opacity of 75, the image displays 75% of the upper layer and 25% of the underlying layer. At 0 opacity, the layer is transparent, and you see only the underlying layer. Y(¢IÀK1»­„:7Š:~ÀK*LŽNEnabling a Layer MaskSaveMark(`SubWin'):gKúK* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0ÀK*L, (€ €€†"€‚ÿCúKmL+ &€0€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿEnabling a Layer Maskd?*LÑM% €€€‚‚ÿUse the Enable Layer Mask option to control whether a layer is viewed with or without its mask. When this option is on, the layer mask determines the appearance of the layer. When the option is off, the mask is "inactive" and has no effect on the layer’s appearance. To control this option, do one of the following:ã£mLŽN@ N€K€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick the Enable Layer Mask button on the Layer palette. Select or clear the "Mask is enabled for this layer" check box in the Layer Properties dialog box.[*ÑMO1F&ˆ:˜;OyOäLinking Masks to LayersSaveMark(`SubWin'):ŽNIO* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0OyO, (€ €€†"€‚ÿEIOŸO+ &€4€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLinking Masks to LayersDyO& €=€€‚‚‚ÿUse the Link Mask option toŸOŽN move a mask and layer together in an image. When this option is on, the flip, rotate, and mirror commands move the mask and layer as one unit. When the option is off, the layer and mask move independently.To control this option, do one of the following:֖ŸOä@ N€1€PäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒ‚†"€ƒ‚ÿClick the Link Mask button on the Layer palette. Select or clear the "Mask is locked with layer" check box in the Layer Properties dialog box.[*?‚1= 7Š:ÿÿÿÿ€?‚©‚µLinking Masks to LayersSaveMark(`SubWin'):äy‚* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿLayer Options0?‚©‚, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ?y‚è‚+ &€(€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿLayer Blend ModesÝ©‚ë„& €»€€‚‚‚ÿThe layer blend modes are methods of combining the pixels from the current layer with the ones under it. You are not combining the layers permanently; you are previewing the way they will appear if combined. To combine layers permanently, use the Merge command in the Layers menu.The current layer whose blend mode you are changing is the Blend layer. The layer is blended into the result of the combination of underlying layers, not just the layer directly underneath it.:è‚%…% €*€" œ€‚ÿBlend Mode Optionspë„•…V#|€4 (€€Ôqæ­\ü€‰€ ‚ÿ(€€Ôqæù;€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿNormalDissolveo%…†V#|€2 (€€ÔqæíC‚®€‰€ ‚ÿ(€€Ôqæ:Oâ5€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿDarkenOverlays•…w†V#|€: (€€Ôqæ{üY€‰€ ‚ÿ(€€ÔqæÁÊ93€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿLightenHard Lighto†æ†V#|€2 (€€Ôqæúkô€‰€ ‚ÿ(€€Ôqæšfp2€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿHueSoft Lightv w†\‡V#|€@ (€€ÔqæŽ.où€‰€ ‚ÿ(€ €Ôqæû^œü€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿSaturationDifferencelæ†ȇV#|€, (€€Ôqæ©û8]€‰€ ‚ÿ(€€Ôqæ-ël]€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿColorDodgeo\‡7ˆV#|€2 (€€Ôqæø¡@€‰€ ‚ÿ(€€ÔqæÙÝ5ü€‰€ ‚ÿÿÿLuminanceBurnyȇ°ˆZ#„€> 0€€Ôqæ&‘š>€€'ƒ‰€ ‚ÿ(€ €Ôq愎a耉€ ‚ÿÿÿMultiplyExclusionX7ˆ‰J#d€ (€€ÔqæîýY2€‰€ ‚ÿ€€Ôq‚ÿÿÿScreen&°ˆ.‰# €€€‚ÿ4‰b‰% €€" œ€‚ÿBlend Ranges ç.‰mŠ$ €Ï€€‚ÿThe Blend Ranges feature gives you more control over blending. Drop colors out of the current layer and make other colors show through by setting an opacity based on brightness or channel value. To set the Blend Ranges feature:·ib‰$N j€Ó€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ƒ€€ƒ‚ÿ1Select the Blend layer.2Open the Layer Properties dialog box.3In the Blend Ranges panel, select a channel for Paint Shop Pro to use for comparing the layers. Your choices are Grey, Red, Green, and Blue. When the Grey channel is selected, the lightness values of the layers determine opacity.4Set the opacity ramp for the channel. The upper arrows indicate the values at which the opacity will be 100%. The lower arrows indicate the values at which the opacity will be 0%. The values on the left side indicate the ramp up values, while the values on the right side indicate the ramp down values.‘`mŠµ1 2€À€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ€ÿ5Click OK. Paint Shop Pro applies the blend only to the pixels that fall within the range.1$æ1^ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ捎-µŽ* $€€Pä:„O€d€‚ÿ1æDŽ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‚DŽŠŽÎFŽŠŽ' €>€° €‚ÿFormat-Specific Dialog Boxes9DŽÎ* $€€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:More1ŠŽôŽ1jÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿƒôŽÿÿÿÿ-9Î-' €$€° €‚ÿTOPIC: OverviewLôŽy1¢ÿÿÿÿـ;„y ÀyÁOverviewSaveMark(`SubWin')S)-̏* $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Format-Specific Dialog Boxes0y À, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ̏ À-6 ̏BÀ+ &€€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿOverviewŒi ÀÎÀ# €Ò€€‚ÿThere are three file formats that may require additional input before being opened by Paint Shop Pro: «0BÀyÁ{ ƀf€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒï¯íúª€‰€‚†"€ƒïÊ=y€‰€‚†"€ƒïðô^Z€‰€‚ÿMeta / VectorPhoto-CDRAW 1ÎÀªÁ1Šÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ…ªÁÿÿÿÿÂY2yÁÂ' €d€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the Meta Picture Import Dialog Boxl;ªÁoÂ1Ɲ;!„;†oÂò‡ÇUsing the Meta Picture Import Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')S)ÂÂÂ* $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Format-Specific Dialog Boxes0oÂòÂ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿV+ÂÂHÃ+ &€V€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the Meta Picture Import Dialog Boxæ¶òÂ.Ä0 .€m€€æTG0w€‰€‚ÿYou use the Meta Picture Import Dialog Box to set the size for a file or clipboard image that is in a metafile or vector format. Paint Shop Pro will present the dialog box if:ö¥HÃ$ÅQ p€O€RŒäVˆ,džØ€†"€ƒïþ›É€‰€‚†"€ƒ‚ÿYou are opening a file and the "Ask for size" option in the WMF file preferences is selected. You are pasting metafile or vector data from the clipboard.N).ÄrÅ% €R€" œ€‚ÿChanging the Image's Size and/or Scale£p$ÅÆ3 6€à€€ï–QUЀ‰€‚ÿYou change the size and/or scale of the image by entering new values in the Width and Height Text Boxes. 9rÅNÆ% €(€" œ€‚ÿOpening the Image€]ÆÎÆ# €º€€‚ÿClick on the OK Button. Paint Shop Pro will open the image using the selected dimensions. ;NÆ Ç% €,€" œ€‚ÿDefault Import Size~KÎƇÇ3 6€–€€ïþ›É€‰€‚ÿFor help changing the default WMF import size, see WMF Preferences. 1 ÇžÇ1ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‡žÇÿÿÿÿÈN'‡ÇÈ' €N€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the PCD Size Dialog Boxa0žÇgÈ1šـ;>†;ˆgÈêÈSËUsing the PCD Size Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')S)ȺÈ* $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Format-Specific Dialog Boxes0gÈêÈ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿK ºÈ5É+ &€@€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the PCD Size Dialog BoxŠeêÈÛÊA P€Ë€€ïÛɛɀ‰€‚æ@ÿŸ€‰€‚ÿKodak Photo-CD files contain multiple sizes of a single image. The default PCD size option determines which size will be read when a PCD file is opened. If the option labeled "Ask when opening each file" is selected, Paint Shop Pro will present the PCD Size Dialog Box each time you open a PCD file. To select a size option from the dialog box: x@5ÉSË8 @€€€Pä:„O€d€ƒ€ƒ‚€ƒ€ƒ‚ÿ1Click on the desired size. 2Click on the OK Button. 1ÛÊ„Ë1‚ÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‰„ËÿÿÿÿÕËQ*SËÕË' €T€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Using the RAW Options Dialog Boxd3„Ë9Ì1 !„;ÿÿÿÿŠ9̘̌ÏUsing the RAW Options Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')S)ÕËŒÌ* $€R€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿUsing the Format-Specific Dialog Boxes09ÌŒÌ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿN#ŒÌ Í+ &€F€v˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿUsing the RAW Options Dialog BoxÔŒÌÎ0 .€©€€æ²ïGˀ‰€‚ÿYou use the RAW Options Dialog Box to tell Paint Shop Pro how to interpret RAW pixel data. For information about a RAW file's format, refer to the documentation for the application that created the image. 6 ÍDÎ% €"€" œ€‚ÿRAW Pixel DataT0ΘÏ$ €a€€‚ÿIf you are familiar with RAW files, the RAW Options Dialog Box should be self-explanatory. If you are new to the format, please find and read information about RAW data in general and the file you are trying to open in particular. A discussion of RAW pixel data is beyond the scope of this help file. 1DÎÉÏ1iÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‹ÉÏÿÿÿÿ 8˜Ï ( € €° €ƒ‚ÿWindow:More2ÉÏ ˜Ï1ÉÏ>1ˆÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŒ>ÿÿÿÿ•W0 •' €`€° €‚ÿTOPIC: Changing the Image's Size And/or Scalej9>ÿ1sÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿKChanging the Image's Size And/or ScaleSaveMark(`SubWin')L"•K* $€D€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿChanging the Size and/or Scale:áœÿ,$ €{€€‚ÿYou change the size and/or scale of the image by entering new values in the Width and Height Text Boxes. To access a text box, click in it, or press until its text is highlighted. DKp% €>€" œ€‚ÿMaintaining the Aspect RatioÚ,t* "€µ€€€€‚ÿIf you change the width last, the aspect ratio (width/height) will be preserved. When the image is resized, its proportions will be maintained. The height will be determined by the new width and the aspect ratio. Apµ% €8€" œ€‚ÿChanging the Aspect RatioØ®t* "€]€€€€‚ÿIf you change the height last, the aspect ratio (width/height) will be abandoned. When the image is resized, its proportions will be determined by the new measurements. 1µŸ1WÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿŽÿÿÿÿŸä&ä# €€€‚ÿ1Ÿ1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿMŠ8äM' €"€° €‚ÿGetting Around=Š* $€&€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:GraphicsOMÙ1cÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÙEMain WindowSaveMark(`SubWin'):Š, (€€&ˆˆ›„€:€‚ÿMain Window2ÙE. ,€ € ›€†"€‚ÿP•1aÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ‘•ÎþTool WindowsSaveMark(`SubWin')9EÎ* $€€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿTool Windows0•þ, (€ €€†"€‚ÿPÎN1aÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ’NˆžImage WindowSaveMark(`SubWin'):þˆ* $€ €ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Windows0Nž, (€ €€†"€‚ÿ1ˆé1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ“é[5ž' €€° €‚ÿImage Files=é[* $€&€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:Graphics_.º1aÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ”º 2 File Information Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')H[ * $€<€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿFile Information Dialog Box0º2 , (€ €€†"€‚ÿ`/ ’ 1aÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ•’ Û  Image Information Dialog BoxSaveMark(`SubWin')I2 Û * $€>€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿImage Information Dialog Box0’  , (€ €€†"€‚ÿ1Û < 1nÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ–< w Ž ; w ' €(€° €‚ÿHistogram Example=< Ž * $€&€˜V‚…€ƒ‚ÿWindow:GraphicsU$w  1Dÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ— G Z Histogram ExampleSaveMark(`SubWin')>Ž G * $€(€ˆˆ„€:€‚ÿHistogram Example} Ä b#”€6Ô°€€ qv˜„tŽŽÿ&€€Ôqv˜„tŽŽ€‚ÿ €€Ôqv˜„tŽŽ‚ÿÿÿHistogramSource ImageoG 3 g#ž€Ô°€€ qv˜„tŽŽÿ(€€Ôq€†"€‚ÿ"€ €Ôq†"€‚ÿÿÿ'Ä Z $ €€j€‚ÿ13 ‹ 1mÿÿÿÿÿÿÿÿ